Dallas Police Department General Order

300.00 Operations Table of Contents

Revised 01/16/2024

300.00 OPERATIONS

301.00 EMERGENCY VEHICLE OPERATION
301.01 Purpose
301.02 Authorized Emergency Vehicles
301.03 Levels of Response Defined
301.04 Operation of Authorized Emergency Vehicles
301.05 Authority to Operate as an Emergency Vehicle
301.06 Private Vehicle - Emergency Escort
301.07 Vehicle Pursuits
301.08 Inter-Jurisdictional Pursuit Policy
301.09 Pursuits - Reporting and Review
301.10 Moving Surveillance/Tactical Apprehension

302.00 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT
302.01 General Policy
302.02 Traffic Enforcement in Collision Investigations
302.03 Investigation of Minor Collisions
302.04 FLID/FSRA Reporting Procedures
302.05 Use of Police Vehicles to Protect Collision Scenes
302.06 Collisions Involving City Owned Equipment
302.07 Police Jurisdiction on the Dallas North Tollway
302.08 Juvenile Traffic Offenders
302.09 Driving While Intoxicated or Under the Influence of Drugs
302.10 Driving While License Suspended
302.11 Strategic Targeting Against Aggressive Driving and Road Rage
302.12 Multiple Violation Citations
302.13 Reports Required

303.00 ALTERNATIVE TO ARREST PROGRAM (ALTAR)
303.01 Purpose of the Program
303.02 Field Procedure

304.00 CRIME INVESTIGATION
304.01 Eyewitness Identification
304.02 Death or Serious Injury Cases
304.03 Felony in Progress
304.04 Bomb Threat
304.05 Sexual Assault Offenses
304.06 Recovered Stolen Vehicles
304.07 Repossession of Automobiles
304.08 Inspection of Salvage Vehicles
304.09 Missing and Distressed Persons
304.10 Hate Crimes
304.11 Crime Victim Compensation
304.12 Unlisted Telephone Numbers
304.13 Removing or Blocking a Pay Telephone's Ability to Receive In-Coming Calls
304.14 Metal Detector and X-ray Machine Operation
304.15 Assistance for Victims/Witnesses who have been Threatened or Fear Further Victimization
304.16 Citizen Contacts Requiring Interpreter
304.17 Automated License Plate Reader (ALPR)
304.18 Deconfliction

305.00 NON-CRIMINAL SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS
305.01 Method of Request
305.02 Criteria for an Investigation

306.00 OPERATIONS OUTSIDE DALLAS CITY LIMITS

307.00 FAMILY VIOLENCE PREVENTION
307.01 Requirements of Officers
307.02 Stocking of Notification Cards

308.00 PROTECTIVE ORDERS
308.01 Definition
308.02 Legal Services Section Responsibilities
308.03 Youth Operations Unit
308.04 Communications Section Responsibilities
308.05 Officer Responsibilities
308.06 Departmental Employees Protected by or Named in a Protective Order

309.00 DALLAS AREA HOSPITALS
309.01 Dallas Area Hospitals

310.00 DALLAS COUNTY HOSPITAL AND COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
310.00 Dallas County Hospital District (DCHD) and Community College District
310.01 Answering Calls for Service and Investigating Offenses on Dallas County Hospital District Property
310.02 Dallas County Community College District – Answering Calls for Service and Investigating Offenses

311.00 FOOT PURSUITS
311.01 Purpose
311.02 Definitions
311.03 Preventing Foot Pursuits
311.04 Initiating Foot Pursuits – Decision Matrix
311.05 Initiating Foot Pursuits – Accountability and Responsibility
311.06 Discontinuing a Foot Pursuit

312.00 DALLAS AREA RAPID TRANSIT (DART) – ANSWERING CALLS FOR SERVICE AND INVESTIGATING OFFENSES

313.00 ARREST POLICIES (ADULTS)
313.01 Responsibility at the Scene of Police Incidents
313.02 Authority to Arrest
313.03 Misdemeanor Citations
313.04 Citations Requiring Special Handling
313.05 Marijuana Possession
313.06 Public Inebriate Program
313.07 Drug Evaluation and Classification Process
313.08 Stake-Outs and High Risk Apprehension Operations
313.09 Felony Arrest Warrant Service
313.10 Field Warning Procedure
313.11 Field Release of Handcuffed Subjects
313.12 Searching of Prisoners
313.13 Transportation and Handling of Prisoners
313.14 Disposition of Vehicles
313.15 Writ of Habeas Corpus
313.16 Magistrate Procedures for Adults

314.00 ARREST POLICIES (JUVENILES)
314.01 Authority to Take Juveniles Into Custody
314.02 Field Release
314.03 Day Time Curfew
314.04 Critical Missing Child
314.05 Runaway Child
314.06 Missing Child
314.07 Custodial Arrest
314.08 Searching of Juvenile Prisoners
314.09 Charges
314.10 Oral Statements and Confessions
314.11 Fingerprints and Photographs
314.12 Driving While Intoxicated
314.13 Drugs and Controlled Substances Arrests
314.14 Arrests at School During School Hours
314.15 Child Abuse and Neglect
314.16 Transporting of Juveniles

315.00 ARRESTS REQUIRING SPECIAL HANDLING
315.01 Arrests Made by Off-Duty Officers
315.02 Arrests Made on NCIC, TCIC and NCTCIC Checks
315.03 Foreign Nationals
315.04 Immigration
315.05 Military Personnel
315.06 Theft
315.07 Prostitution
315.08 Controlled Substance or Dangerous Drug Violators
315.09 Intoxication
315.10 Hospitalized and Medically Treated Prisoners
315.11 Mentally Ill Persons
315.12 Hospital Outpatients
315.13 Identification Disk for Retarded Children
315.14 Interview and Arrest Procedure For Deaf and Hearing-Impaired Persons
315.15 Arrests for Failure to Identify
315.16 Arrests by Out of Town Peace Officers
315.17 Handgun License Violations
315.18 Underage Alcohol Consumption Laws
315.19 Unusual Security Risks

316.00 ARRESTS INVOLVING CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES OR DANGEROUS DRUGS
316.01 Definitions
316.02 Arrests Involving Suspected Violations of the Texas Health and Safety Code
316.03 Stocking of Reagent Field Test Kits

317.00 OFFICER INVOLVED SHOOTINGS OR OTHER CRITICAL INCIDENTS RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
317.00 Investigations of Officer Involved Shootings or Other Critical Incidents Resulting in Serious Injury or Death
317.01 Assigned Investigative Unit
317.02 Initial Response
317.03 Walk-Through
317.04 Interview and Investigative Procedures
317.05 Administrative Investigation
317.06 Post Incident Management
317.07 Firearms Discharge Review Team (FDRT)
317.08 DPD Critical Incident Monitoring by Director of Office of Community Police Oversight

318.00 BOOKING PROCEDURES
318.01 Booking Procedures for Adults
318.02 Establishing Age as an Adult or Juvenile
318.03 Citizen Information Regarding Juvenile Booked as an Adult
318.04 Booking Procedures for Juveniles

319.00 VOLUNTARY SURRENDER OF WANTED PERSONS

320.00 CRIMINAL CASE FILING PROCEDURES
320.01 General Provisions
320.02 Reduction of Cases Filed in Misdemeanor County Courts
320.03 Criminal Trespass Offenses
320.04 Cases Filed with the Municipal Court
320.05 Referring Complainants to the City Prosecutor's Office
320.06 Cases Filed with the County Prosecutor’s Office via Citation

321.00 EVIDENCE AND PROPERTY
321.01 Processing Procedures
321.02 Property and Evidence Requiring Special Procedures
321.03 Impounding Vehicles as Evidence
321.04 Transporting Property/Evidence to Court
321.05 Processing of Narcotics/Drug Evidence and Narcotics/Drug Found Property
321.06 Property and Evidence Placed at the Lew Sterrett Property/Evidence Temporary Storage Locker
321.07 Conversion of Property

322.00 CITIZENS RIDING OBSERVATION
322.01 Authorization for Riding
322.02 Procedures
322.03 Responsibility of Citizens and Authority of Supervisors
322.04 Conduct While Riding Observation

323.00 PRESS RELATIONS
323.01 News Media Requirements and Privileges
323.02 Major Incidents
323.03 Crime Scenes
323.04 Release of Information
323.05 Information from Police Files
323.06 Photographs and Interviews
323.07 Internal Matters
323.08 News Information Service
323.09 Routine Newsworthy Matters

324.00 SECURITY FOR POLICE FACILITIES
324.01 General Policy
324.02 Restricted Areas
324.03 Procedures

325.00 OPEN RECORDS INFORMATION
325.01 Release of Criminal History Information
325.02 Release of Information on Offense/Incident Reports
325.03 Release of Other Written Records
325.04 Court Subpoenas
325.05 Expunction and Nondisclosure of Adult Criminal Records

326.00 INTERROGATORIES, REQUESTS FOR PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTS, AND DISCOVERY ORDERS

327.00 AFFIDAVITS FOR SUSPENSION OR REVOCATION OF LICENSE TO CARRY HANDGUN

328.00 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE

329.00 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
329.01 Environmental Management Policy and Procedure for the Dallas Police Department
329.02 Definitions
329.03 Policy
329.04 Purpose
329.05 Organization
329.06 Procedures for Environmental Impact Occurrences
329.07 Procedures for Hazardous Spills
329.08 Reporting
329.09 Classifying Preventability, Assigning Points and Disciplinary Action

330.00 CONSENSUAL AND NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCH PROCEDURES
330.01 Definitions
330.02 Policy
330.03 Purpose
330.04 Requirements for Consensual Search
330.05 Evidence and Documentation Procedures for CONSENSUAL SEARCH
330.06 Responsibilities
330.07 Prohibited Procedures
330.08 Requirements for NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCH
330.09 Evidence and Documentation Procedures for NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCH

331.00 PUBLIC RECORDING OF OFFICIAL ACTS
331.01 Policy
331.02 Definitions
331.03 General Information
331.04 Special Circumstances
331.05 Officer Responsibilities
331.06 Supervisor Responsibilities
331.07 Seizing a Bystander’s Video/Audio Recording Device for Evidentiary Purposes

332.00 VIDEO INTEGRATION AND TECHNOLOGIES PROGRAM
332.01 Program Objectives
332.02 Definitions
332.03 General Procedures for Body Worn Cameras
332.04 General Operation of Body Worn Cameras
332.05 Prohibited Use of BWC Equipment
332.06 Body Camera Retention, Storage, and Handling of Videos
332.07 General Procedures for In-Car Camera Systems
332.08 General Operation of the In-Car Camera System
332.09 In-Car Camera Retention, Storage, and Handling of Videos
332.10 Signal Sidearm
332.11 GPS and Live Streaming Body Worn Cameras
332.12 Violations

333.00 INTERACTING WITH TRANSGENDER AND NON-BINARY INDIVIDUALS
333.00 Purpose
333.01 Policy
333.02 Definitions
333.03 Responsibilities
333.04 Guidelines for Field Operations

334.00 PUBLIC RELEASE OF VIDEO RECORDINGS

334.00 PUBLIC RELEASE OF VIDEO RECORDING REGARDING DPD CRITICAL INCIDENTS

335.00 UNMANNED AERIAL SYSTEMS (UAS)
335.00 Mission Statement
335.01 Responsibility for Operating Unmanned Aerial Systems
335.02 Authority to Operate
335.03 Operations
335.04 Manned vs Unmanned Aircraft
335.05 Search Warrants
335.06 Data Collection Minimization
335.07 Data Storage
335.08 Flight Restriction
335.09 Call Back
335.10 Procedure to Deal with Disruptions or Violence Directed Against City Owned Aircraft/UAS
335.11 Arming of UAS
335.12 Civilian Drone Operators

336.00 INVESTIGATIVE FACIAL RECOGNITION TECHNOLOGY (IFRT)
336.01 Purpose
336.02 Definitions
336.03 Use of Investigative Facial Recognition Technology (IFRT)
336.04 General Procedures
336.05 Responsibilities and Limitations
336.06 Oversight, Audits, and Retention

Dallas Police Department General Order

301.00 Emergency Vehicle Operation

Revised 07/20/2021


301.00    EMERGENCY VEHICLE OPERATION
301.01    Purpose
A.    The purpose of this General Order is to describe the authority and to establish guidelines for operating emergency vehicles. It is intended as a broad guide to the application of these procedures during the operation of an emergency vehicle.
B.   Situations exist that require officers to respond quickly to life threatening emergencies and/or engage in pursuit of violators. In any situation, an officer must always base the decision to pursue on probable cause, known facts, and circumstances that can be articulated by the officer.

301.02    Authorized Emergency Vehicles
A.    Vehicles equipped, at a minimum, with a siren and externally mounted red and blue emergency warning lights that have been installed in a manner approved by the Chief of Police will be authorized emergency vehicles.
1.    An exception to externally mounted red and blue lights will be made for designated SUV model vehicles equipped with interior red and blue lights mounted at the top, and extending across the width of the windshield. Additional emergency warning lights will be mounted on these vehicles in accordance with specifications approved by the Chief of Police to allow the vehicle to operate as an emergency vehicle.
2.    Public Service Officer trucks are not authorized emergency vehicles.
B.Vehicles equipped with red and blue lights that are not externally mounted are also authorized emergency vehicles, but these vehicles will be used for traffic stops only and will not be used for any other type of emergency response.
C.    Vehicles not equipped with serviceable emergency equipment as provided in section A or B above will not be operated in an emergency manner.

301.03    Levels of Response Defined
A.    Code 1 - The operation of an emergency vehicle in normal traffic without using emergency lights and siren. All departmental personnel operating emergency vehicles in this mode will comply with the posted speed limit and obey all traffic control devices and signals.
B.    Code 3 - The operation of an emergency vehicle using the emergency warning devices, as well as activating the emergency vehicle’s headlights. This method of operation is authorized by the State Transportation Code and is outlined in General Order 301.05.
1.    The general guideline shall be that officers operating their vehicles in this manner shall not exceed the posted speed limit by more than 20 miles per hour on major streets and freeways and shall observe the posted speed limit in residential neighborhoods and school zones.
2.    Officers operating their vehicles in this manner shall come to a complete stop to ensure an intersection is clear prior to disregarding any stop signal or stop sign.
3.    While operating a vehicle Code 3, an officer is not bound by the requirements listed in 301.03 B. 1-2 above in the following situations:
a.  When responding to cover another law enforcement officer where an imminent threat to the officer’s safety is present.
b.  When responding to an Officer Assist.
c.  When an officer is involved in an authorized pursuit.
However, in all situations, an officer is not relieved of the duty to operate the vehicle with appropriate regard for the safety of all persons or the consequences of reckless disregard for the safety of others.

301.04    Operation of Authorized Emergency Vehicles
A.    In all operations of emergency vehicles, situations will exist which, in the responding officer’s opinion, need an immediate and effective response. In these situations, the responding officer may determine that a delay in response could jeopardize the safety of a citizen or officer and upgrade from a Code 1 to a Code 3 response. When upgrading a response, the responding officer will notify the dispatcher, and upon acknowledgment, immediately activate the emergency equipment and headlights.
B.    When operating Code 3, the operator of the emergency vehicle is responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle. The officer must be able to articulate the facts and circumstances justifying the Code 3 decision.
C.    The authority to drive contrary to regulatory codes when operating an authorized emergency vehicle Code 3 does not relieve the operator of the responsibility of exercising due care. When regulating their speed, officers should give consideration to such things as the nature and seriousness of the offense or suspected offense and be consciously aware of weather conditions, traffic control devices, character of the neighborhood (residential or business), traffic volume, and road and vehicle conditions.
D.    After providing necessary assistance at a Code 3 or Assist Officer incident, the initial responding element will notify the dispatcher when the need for emergency assistance is over.
1.    Dispatcher will immediately sound an alert tone that Code 3 response has ended.
2.    Authorization for all other responses utilizing emergency warning devices will end.
3.   Other officers may proceed to the scene, driving at the posted speed limit and obeying all traffic control devices.
4.    Except when driven Code 3 or to an Assist Officer, no emergency vehicle will be driven faster than the posted speed limit.
E.    Officers requesting a cover element will advise the dispatcher if the response needed is Code 1 or Code 3, and the number of elements required. No other terminology will be used.
1.    When an officer requests cover elements to respond Code 3, it will be implied that the officer is requesting for an Officer Assist response.
2.    If an Officer Assist response is deemed not necessary by the requesting officer, the officer making the request will state that an Officer Assist response is not needed, and the cover elements will respond Code 3 by the requirements listed in 301.03 B. 1-2 above.
3.   A Code 3 response is appropriate when an officer reasonably believes that a delay in response could jeopardize the safety of a citizen or officer.
4.    Officers responding to a Code 3 cover request will notify the dispatcher, and upon acknowledgement, immediately activate the emergency equipment and headlights.
F.    In all Assist Officer incidents, responding officers will be authorized an emergency response as indicated in 301.03 B.3 without the need to notify the dispatcher of their intent to respond.
G.    Officers will hold Code 3 or Officer Assist responses to the essential minimum and terminate a Code 3 or Officer Assist response at the earliest possible time. When the emergency warning devices are deactivated, a Code 1 response is in effect.

301.05    Authority to Operate as an Emergency Vehicle
A.    The State Transportation Code permits authorized emergency vehicles to be operated in an emergency manner in response to an emergency call and in immediate pursuit of an actual or suspected violator of the law.
B.    The following will be considered emergencies within the meaning of Section A above:
1.    Calls assigned by the radio dispatcher that are designated as emergencies and only when dispatched as emergencies by the designation Code 3.
2.    Calls or situations wherein the personal knowledge of an officer justifies the reclassification of a Code 1 assignment to an emergency level Code 3.
3.    Situations wherein a supervisor directs that response be made Code 3.
4.    Routine Traffic Stops-
Pursuit of a violator when the use of both emergency warning lights and siren is necessary to alert other traffic and/or to command the attention of the vehicle operator so that the he/she can be directed to stop. Officers may clock speeding traffic violators without using emergency lights and siren when they can do so safely and only for short distances.
5.    Chase Pursuit- Pursuit of a violator wherein the violator refuses to stop and the continuing use of both emergency warning lights and siren is necessary in the interest of warning others. The authority to drive contrary to traffic regulations requires the emission of an audible signal and activation of emergency warning lights. At the conclusion of the chase pursuit, all visible emergency warning lights will remain on at the scene.
C.     Authorized Levels of Response - The only authorized levels of response are Code 1 and Code 3, which are defined in GO 301.03.
D.    Authorized Operators - No Police Department vehicle will be operated with emergency equipment activated unless operated by a sworn member of the Police Department:
E.    The law enforcement goal of protection of life may be better served if an in-the-act offender is not alerted to an officer’s arrival. When the siren and emergency warning lights are deactivated, the Code 3 response will cease and a Code 1 response will be in effect, and the officer must begin considering a tactical approach.

301.06    Private Vehicle - Emergency Escort
A.    When an officer in the field is requested to escort a private vehicle carrying an injured or ill person, the officer will determine the severity of the injury or illness. The officer should offer to call an ambulance and offer to administer first aid.
B.    If the driver and patient refuse the officer's offer and want to continue to the nearest hospital or medical facility, the officer may escort the vehicle Code 1. The dispatcher will be notified prior to the escort.
C.    If the situation is not of a life threatening nature, the officer will politely suggest that the driver proceed carefully and obey all traffic regulations, and if appropriate, suggest the quickest and safest route to the hospital. Should the driver not know the way to the hospital, the officer may furnish an escort Code 1.
D.   An officer will not escort a private vehicle Code 3.

301.07     Vehicle Pursuits
A.     Purpose - The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for making decisions with regard to vehicular pursuits.
B. Philosophy - General Order 906.01 B., states “Protection of human life is a primary goal of the Police Department; therefore, police officers have a responsibility to use only the degree of force necessary to protect and preserve life.” Initiating or participating in a vehicular pursuit presents a danger to the officers involved, the suspect, and the general public. Accordingly, the decision to initiate a pursuit must be based on the pursuing officer’s conclusion that the immediate danger to the officer, public and suspect created by the pursuit is less than the immediate or potential danger to the public should the suspect remain at large.
C. Definition - A Pursuit is defined as an active attempt by an officer in an authorized emergency vehicle to apprehend a fleeing suspect in a motor vehicle who is attempting to elude the officer. A suspect is considered to be fleeing upon making any overt action intended to avoid arrest. For the purpose of this order, violators who follow all traffic regulations after an officer initiates a traffic stop and are merely failing to yield to the authorized emergency vehicle are not considered to be fleeing. The term “Chase” will be considered synonymous with “Pursuit.”
D. Decision to Initiate Pursuit
1. The decision to pursue must be based upon facts and circumstances known to the officer.
2. In deciding whether to pursue, an officer must take the following pursuit risk factors under consideration:
a. road, weather and environmental conditions,
b. population density, vehicle and pedestrian traffic,
c. relative performance capabilities of both the authorized emergency vehicle and the suspect’s vehicle,
d. seriousness of the offense,
e. presence of other persons in the police vehicle,
f. age of offender,
g. whether or not the offender’s identity is known, and
h. any circumstance under which the pursuing officer will be unable to maintain control of the emergency vehicle.
3. An officer may initiate a pursuit under the following circumstances:
a. when the officer has probable cause to believe that a felony involving the use or threat of physical force or violence has been, or is about to be, committed, or
b. to assist another law enforcement agency that has initiated a pursuit under the same circumstances, or
c. an outside agency has initiated a pursuit which has entered the City of Dallas and there is only one police vehicle involved, or
d. an officer on-views a suspect discharge a firearm in a public place or displays a firearm in a public place in a threatening manner, and
e. the officer reasonably believes that the immediate need to apprehend the offender outweighs the risk to any person of collision, injury or death.
f. all other pursuits are prohibited.
4. Officers will not pursue a motorist whose only offense is driving while intoxicated if the actions of the driver escalate beyond merely failing to yield to the emergency vehicle.
E. Manner of Operation While in Pursuit
1. The emergency warning lights, siren, and emergency vehicle headlights will be used at all times while operating Code 3.
2. Only police vehicles equipped with operable emergency warning lights and sirens will participate in the pursuit of a fleeing vehicle.
3. Unmarked vehicles without roof mounted emergency warning light systems will not become involved in a pursuit. Supervisors in unmarked vehicles will follow the chase using a Code 1 response.
4. If a pursuit is initiated by a motorcycle, the motorcycle will abandon the pursuit when a four-wheel unit with roof mounted emergency warning light systems joins the pursuit.
5. Vehicles with passengers (prisoners, witnesses, suspects, complainants or other non-police personnel who have not signed a waiver of liability) will not become engaged in pursuits.
6. Paddy Wagons will not become engaged in pursuits.
F. Pursuit Termination
1. Pursuing officers shall continually assess the pursuit risk factors and terminate the pursuit when the danger to the officer, public or suspect becomes greater than the immediate need to apprehend the suspect.
2. If visual contact is lost other than momentarily, officers will discontinue the pursuit.
3. Officers will terminate a pursuit when directed to do so by a supervisor.
4. Once the decision has been made to terminate a pursuit, officers will immediately disengage emergency warning lights and siren and reduce to Code 1.
G. Prohibited Practices
1. Setting up roadblocks to stop violators.
2. Attempting to force the vehicle from the roadway by driving alongside or in front of the fleeing vehicle.
3. Bumping or ramming the fleeing vehicle in an attempt to force it from the road.
4. Discharging weapons at a moving vehicle unless an occupant of the vehicle is using or attempting to use deadly force on an officer or other persons.
5. Pursuing violators the wrong way on any freeway, one-way service road, one-way street, or divided roadway. This order is not intended to prohibit pursuit on an adjacent roadway where the officer is driving with the traffic flow.
6. Following so closely that adequate reaction and braking time is insufficient to prevent collision with any leading vehicle.
H. Responsibilities of Pursuing Elements
1. Any element initiating a pursuit will immediately notify the police dispatcher of the following information:
a. Element number.
b. Direction of travel.
c. Reason for pursuit to include offense that has been, or is about to be, committed.
d. Description and number of occupants.
2. No more than the following three vehicles will be involved in a pursuit - the pursuit element, one support element, and a supervisor (either the Controlling Supervisor or another supervisor). The officer in the primary vehicle or the supervisor engaged in the pursuit may request approval from the Controlling Supervisor to add additional elements to the pursuit. The Controlling Supervisor may grant this request and has the option to add additional elements based upon personal judgment. Factors to be considered before requesting or allowing additional elements to join the pursuit include, but are not limited to:
a. The nature of the offense.
b. The number of suspects.
c. Whether to add a third element to the pursuit if no supervisor is able to join it.
d. Whether the participating elements have more than one officer per vehicle.
e. Any factor that could reasonably cause an increased hazard.
3. Other police vehicles will not enter a pursuit to assume the lead or secondary vehicle position unless these factors apply:
a. The lead or secondary vehicles have fallen far enough behind the suspect's vehicle that it may be reasonably assumed the lead or secondary vehicle cannot maintain contact with the suspect's vehicle.
b. The vehicle can enter the pursuit without causing other pursuing squad cars to take evasive action.
c. If a police vehicle assumes the lead or second vehicle position (after meeting the above conditions), the vehicle entering the pursuit will immediately inform the dispatcher of the action taken. The last or third police vehicle (unless it is a supervisor) will then leave the pursuit and notify the dispatcher of this action.
4. Officers involved in a pursuit will immediately inform the dispatcher of any collision or other injury observed by the officer as a result of the pursuit.
5. Vehicles trailing a chase at a distance and at legal speed limits will not follow the chase beyond their Operations Division geographical boundaries and will obey traffic control devices. Sufficient vehicles to provide this support will be available in the Operations Division in which the chase continues.
6. Officers not directly involved in a pursuit will not respond Code 3 to catch up to a pursuit unless directed to do so by a supervisor.
I. Responsibilities of the Controlling Supervisor
1. When an element becomes involved in a pursuit, the field supervisor of the responding element, if available, will be assigned by the dispatcher as the Controlling Supervisor. If this supervisor is not available, another first line supervisor will be assigned. If another first line supervisor is not available, the watch commander will be assigned.
2. Command the pursuit from either a stationary position or while proceeding Code 1 toward the pursuit.
3. Have the option of joining the pursuit, if another supervisor has not done so. If the supervisor joins the pursuit, another supervisor, if available, will become the controlling supervisor.
4. Monitor all radio communications to ensure that only those elements authorized and designated by the dispatcher participate in high-speed pursuits.
5. Consider the nature and seriousness of the offense for which the suspect is being pursued and assess the potential, if any, for identifying and arresting the fleeing offender at a later time.
6. Order a pursuit discontinued when any of the following are applicable:
a. The known circumstances or facts do not justify continuing the pursuit.
b. The actions of other police agencies or individuals increase the danger to officers or the public. This includes actions of other police agencies that violate the Inter-Jurisdictional Pursuit Agreement, whether or not the violating agency is a signatory to that agreement.
c. Upon receiving a recommendation by the primary pursuit element, the supervisor involved in the pursuit, or a superior officer.
d. The risk to any person of injury, collision or death outweighs the immediate need to apprehend the offender.
7. Police motor vehicle pursuits are only authorized in very limited circumstance. However, these circumstances involve potential violent offenders who in some cases may pose a substantial danger to pursuing officers at the conclusion of the pursuit. When these circumstances exist, a controlling supervisor is authorized to add additional elements to the pursuit. Factors to be considered before requesting or allowing additional elements to join the pursuit include, but are not limited to:
a. The nature of the offense.
b. The number of suspects.
c. Whether to add a third element to the pursuit if no supervisor is able to join it.
d. Whether the participating elements have more than one officer per vehicle.
e. Any factor that could reasonably cause an increased hazard.
8. If a supervisor authorizes additional elements in a pursuit, either based on his or her own judgment or in response to a request by involved elements, the justification for the authorization must be documented in the Vehicle Pursuit form.
9. Completion of the Vehicle Pursuit form located on the BlueTeam link under the Dallas Police Department intranet home page. Supervisors must attach the Evading Offense report and Chase report to the Vehicle Pursuit form. If available, supervisors must provide any DVR video, AVL reports, and arrest reports with the Vehicle Pursuit form through the chain-of-command to the Division Commander for review.
J. Responsibilities of the Patrol Watch Commander or Acting Watch Commander
1. Monitor active pursuits to ensure a controlling supervisor has been assigned and pursuit polices are followed.
2. Ensure the justification for the pursuit and decisions made regarding the pursuit are consistent with the Department’s overall pursuit philosophy.
3. Immediately terminate a pursuit which causes substantial danger to the officers or the public that outweighs the need to apprehend the offender.
4. Evaluate all requests to add additional elements by the pursuing officers and authorization for additional elements by the controlling supervisor to ensure the additional elements do not create an unjustified risk to the involved officers and the public.
K. Responsibilities of the Communications Division
1. Develop and maintain standard procedures for a Pursuit Management Team to include a Communications Supervisor, Dispatcher and Service Desk.
2. The radio dispatcher will:
a. Transmit all information pertinent to the pursuit to other police elements.
b. Immediately designate the sector supervisor of the initiating element, if available, as the Controlling Supervisor.
c. Notify the helicopter duty officer.
d. Advise pursuit vehicles of any known or potential hazards in the path of the pursuit (accidents, street closures, repairs, etc.).
e. Attempt to determine the reason why a vehicle is fleeing (e.g., a robbery that may have occurred near the initiation point of the chase, etc.).
f. Sound the alert tone at the cessation of pursuit to audibly emphasize the requirement to reduce to Code 1 driving.
g. Ensure a patrol watch commander is made aware that a pursuit is occurring.
3. When it becomes evident a pursuit may cross into another dispatch area with a different radio frequency, the originating dispatcher will notify the dispatcher responsible for the area into which the pursuit may continue. This dispatcher will activate the Alert Tone to warn elements in his/her dispatch area that emergency radio traffic will be forthcoming. Activation of the alert tone will include two short beeps of this signal followed by pertinent information regarding the pursuit.
4. When a pursuit enters another Operations Division, that channel’s dispatcher will keep the division officers informed of the location of the pursuit. No officer will join a pursuit without obtaining approval from the dispatcher and/or the Controlling Supervisor of the channel and/or division where the pursuit originated. Normally, all pursuits will be maintained and controlled on the radio channel where the pursuit originated and under the direction of the original Controlling Supervisor. The only exceptions to this policy will be:
a. If radio transmissions become weak or unreadable, a Communications Section supervisor will direct elements to a channel where transmissions are improved.
b. If a pursuit continues for an excessive length of time, the Communications Section Supervisor may direct elements to another channel so that operations on the primary channel may return to normal.
c. If the Controlling Supervisor advises that a pursuit should be broadcast on another channel for officer safety, the Communications Section supervisor will direct the elements to another channel.
5. Notify Fusion with all available information so that intelligence can be developed while the pursuit is occurring.
L. Responsibilities of the Station Sergeant
1. Ensure no element within the division is attempting to overtake the pursuit from an impractical distance or with excessive speed.
2. Ensure officers are not trailing pursuit in violation of GO 301.07, H. 5.
3. If the chase proceeds into another division, the station sergeant of that division will also begin monitoring the AVL in addition to the station sergeant from the division where the chase originated.
4. Monitor all elements for violations of the general order.
5. Ensure all elements observed to be violating or attempting to violate department emergency vehicle operation policy are immediately directed to cease the activity.
6. Ensure all violations observed from monitoring the AVL are documented on the chase report.
M. Helicopter Involvement
1. Whenever possible, the helicopter will join a pursuit after notification by the dispatcher. Upon joining the pursuit, the helicopter will:
a. Advise the dispatcher and Controlling Supervisor of the helicopter's presence, its ability to maintain contact while directing the pursuit, and the number of vehicles in the pursuit.
b. Direct ground units to the fleeing vehicle's termination point.
2. If practical and safe, the helicopter will:
a. Maintain a position that allows the pilot and/or observer to see an area several blocks in front of and behind the suspect's vehicle.
b. Notify pursuing officers of any upcoming traffic hazards.
c. Be aware of the number of police vehicles in the pursuit and notify the Controlling Supervisor and/or the dispatcher of any changes in the number of vehicles involved in the pursuit.

301.08 Inter-Jurisdictional Pursuit Policy
A. If it becomes evident the pursuit might cross into another jurisdiction or if elements from another police agency become involved in the pursuit, the dispatcher will determine whether the jurisdiction being entered or agencies participating in the pursuit are signatories to the Inter-Jurisdictional Pursuit Agreement. This information will immediately be broadcast to the pursuit vehicles and Controlling Supervisor.
B. Before a pursuit enters another jurisdiction, the dispatcher will notify the other agency with the following information:
1. The pursuit is about to enter their jurisdiction.
2. Reason for the pursuit and nature of violation.
3. Location and direction of the pursuit.
4. Complete description of occupants and vehicle.
5. Number of elements involved in the pursuit.
6. Whether or not assistance is needed.
7. If applicable, notify that agency when the pursuit is leaving their jurisdictional boundaries or the location of termination.
C. The initiating agency will have control and be responsible for the pursuit. Other agencies will not participate unless requested to assist.
D. A total of no more than three vehicles from the combined jurisdictions will be involved in any pursuit - two elements and one supervisor.
E. During a pursuit involving more than one agency, the following practices are prohibited:
1. Roadblocks.
2. Ramming.
3. Forcing pursued vehicle off roadway.
4. Shooting at pursued vehicle (except to protect against the use of unlawful deadly force).
F. Responsibility of the initiating agency:
1. Arraignment of arrested persons.
2. Disposition of any passenger.
3. Disposition of arrested person's vehicle.
4. Coordination of all reports, citations, and criminal charges.
G. Without unnecessary delay, the apprehending officer will take the arrestee or have him/her taken before one of the following:
1. The magistrate who issued the warrant or the magistrate named in the warrant - if the magistrate is in the same county where the person is arrested.
2. Some magistrate in the county in which he/she was arrested - if the issuing or named magistrate is in another county.
3. A magistrate in a county bordering the county in which the arrest was made - if it is necessary to provide the required warnings more expeditiously to the arrestee.
H. As a matter of professional courtesy, Dallas Police Department personnel will provide police personnel from the agency where the pursuit terminated pertinent information regarding the pursuit.

301.09 Pursuits - Reporting and Review
A. Offense Report
1. At the conclusion of each vehicular pursuit, officers will obtain a service number and prepare a direct entry offense report titled Evading Arrest. This report will be prepared regardless of whether the suspect was arrested or escaped.
2. Officers will prepare an offense report titled Evading Arrest-No Pursuit whenever a suspect fails to stop for an authorized emergency vehicle but a pursuit was prohibited by departmental policy.
3. These offense reports will fully describe the particulars of the incident and actions taken by the officers involved.
4. In instances where the suspect escapes, the offense report will contain as much information as available regarding suspect and vehicle descriptions and any other pertinent identifying data.
5. Information contained in the offense report will be used by detectives to develop a case against an offender who may have escaped. This information may result in the suspect being arrested at a later time and in a safer manner.
B. BlueTeam Vehicle Pursuit Incident Report
1. The Controlling Supervisor will complete a Vehicle Pursuit incident report in BlueTeam prior to the end of their shift. If a Controlling Supervisor is not assigned, the primary pursuit element will advise their assigned supervisor of the details of the pursuit. If the assigned supervisor is not available, the primary pursuit element will then advise the sector relief supervisor or a late relief supervisor assigned to that watch. The supervisor will then be responsible for completing the Vehicle Pursuit incident report in BlueTeam before the end of their shift.
2. The BlueTeam Vehicle Pursuit incident report, offense report, AVL report, any arrest reports, and any video recording of the pursuit will be reviewed by the initiating officer’s chain of command through the Division Commander level.
3. The Division Commander will:
a. Review all pursuits for adherence to departmental policy;
b. Ensure that any appropriate follow-up including commendation, correction or training is taken;
c. Notify the Departmental Safety Officer of any recommendations that may enhance officer or citizen safety.
d. Forward the BlueTeam Vehicle Pursuit incident report to the Program Administrator for review by the DVR ReviewTeam.
4. An annual report of vehicle pursuit incidents will be completed and forwarded to the Chief of Police. The report will analyze available information related to vehicle pursuits in order to reveal patterns or trends that may indicate additional training needs or changes in departmental procedures.

301.10 Moving Surveillance/Tactical Apprehension
A. This order establishes a mechanism for field personnel to effect an apprehension of suspects in a moving vehicle or under circumstances that do not meet the criteria for a pursuit per General Order 301.07.D(3). In this circumstance, the violation must be of a serious nature and the officer believes there is an immediate need to apprehend the suspects. (This will not include traffic or Class C offenses). As with all operations, the safety of police personnel and the community is the primary goal.
B. Tactical Apprehension: a coordinated and supervised operation involving one or more departmental workgroups in the apprehension of a suspect (s) with vehicular mobility or other similar circumstance. An apprehension of this type may be conducted with the helicopter, covert elements and marked units along with a controlling supervisor. To initiate a Tactical Apprehension an officer must do the following:
1. Determine probable cause exists that an offense has been or is about to be committed.
2. Determine that a Code 3 operation is not authorized and no emergency warning lights or siren will be utilized.
3. Notify the dispatcher and a controlling supervisor of the need to tactically apprehend a suspected violator. Ideally, the patrol deployment squad supervisor will control a Tactical Apprehension; but a patrol field supervisor may also assume control if a deployment supervisor is not available. Officers will give the controlling supervisor as much information as possible, including the suspected offense (burglary, auto theft, non-violent felony warrant etc.), element number, direction of travel, reason for request of Tactical Apprehension, description and number of occupants and any other available information.
4. Request helicopter involvement immediately.
C. Covert elements and the helicopter will respond to positions where they will be conducting the moving surveillance of the suspect vehicle, while marked elements will disengage and be directed to trail or perimeter positions by the controlling supervisor. All elements (covert and marked) will operate code 1.
D. Helicopter Involvement – Whenever possible the helicopter will join the tactical apprehension. Upon joining, the helicopter will:
1. Advise dispatcher and controlling supervisors of their presence.
2. Be aware of the number of marked units and their positions. The helicopter may direct marked elements away from the suspect vehicle.
3. Direct ground units to the vehicles termination point.
E. The controlling supervisor will:
1. Be involved in the tactical apprehension to the greatest extent possible and will determine how to coordinate the operation.
2. Have the helicopter and/or covert elements follow the vehicle until the suspect(s) abandon the vehicle or direct marked patrol elements to initiate the stop as dictated by the individual circumstances.
3. Coordinate information directing elements to a suspect’s position for an arrest opportunity. Uniformed officers may be directed by covert elements or the helicopter to the suspect and will be provided with a physical and clothing description of the suspect. Uniformed officers will affect the arrest of the designated suspect (s) and provide transport for those suspects.
4. Ensure no pursuit will be initiated without circumstances that would authorize a pursuit under General Order 301.07.D (3).
F. For safety reasons covert officers will refrain from being part of the arrest and will only expose themselves in an emergency. If an emergency exists and covert officers deploy, they will wear a Dallas Police Identification Jacket or Vest with identifying marks and verbally identify themselves as Dallas Police Officers.
G. A controlling supervisor may also decide that an extended moving surveillance is required prior to an arrest opportunity. This surveillance consists of: the covert and accurate observation of persons, places or things for the purpose of obtaining physical and visual evidence concerning identities or activities of subjects for evidentiary or intelligence gathering purposes. At this point the supervisor will announce this decision on all affected radio channels to ensure involved personnel, field elements and the dispatcher are informed.
H. The controlling supervisor will determine the number of marked patrol elements required for the tactical apprehension of the suspect(s). All other patrol elements shall stay out of the operating area unless requested by the controlling supervisor, or circumstances develop that would require an immediate police response.
I. In some cases the helicopter or divisional deployment assets will not be available in a timely manner. The controlling supervisor should check with dispatch and request assistance from another division. If these resources are not able to respond the supervisor will make the decision to initiate a traffic stop or felony stop. If the suspect vehicle then flees or evades, General Order 301.07 will apply and no pursuit will be initiated.

Dallas Police Department General Order

302.00 Traffic Enforcement

Revised 11/21/2022

302.00 TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT
302.01 General Policy
A. Age Limitations on Citations
1. Traffic citations will not be issued to persons under twelve years of age or to persons over 65 years of age for pedestrian violations.
2. Citations may be issued to persons over 65 for moving traffic violations.
B. Officers should exercise discretion when taking enforcement action on out-of-town or out-of-state visitors. Traffic citations may be issued to out-of-town or out-of-state visitors. If the violation appears intentional or flagrant, the violator may be taken into custody and required to post bond. If unable to post bond, the individual may be placed in jail.
C. Obtaining Arrested Person's Name and Address
1. If a violator is unable to produce proper identification showing name and address, or satisfy the officer as to his/her identity, such person may be taken into custody and required to post bond. If the violator is unable to post bond, he/she may be placed in jail.
2. After arrival at jail, if the violator is able to establish identity and proper address to the satisfaction of the jail supervisor, the jail supervisor will instruct the officer to issue the violator a citation and release the individual.
D. If a violator refuses to sign a citation, he/she may be arrested and required to post bond.
E. When an officer is in the process of having a parking violator's vehicle impounded and the driver returns to the scene before the wrecker leaves with it, a citation will be issued, and the vehicle released to the driver. No wrecker fee will be charged.
F. Officers will not take minor traffic enforcement action when transporting a citizen on a Signal 62 (Public Service), unless public safety would be adversely affected by lack of action.
G. Warnings: Written warnings are not utilized by the Department. Verbal warnings may be used when there is a new enforcement program going into effect and the preliminary phase calls for a period of public education. Newly enacted laws or regulations may be enforced on their effective date. A verbal warning may be sufficient in certain minor violations.
H. Officers responding to a vehicular accident incident with a disturbance between principals will:
1. Determine if an assault has occurred at the scene
2. Investigate the assault, request Dallas Fire Rescue for any injuries and prevent any further assaults prior to investigating the accident.
3. Notate in the narrative section of the state crash form the case or incident number used for any assault that might have occurred during the disturbance.
I. Officers that come into contact with a licensed driver who demonstrates symptoms of a possible health condition that may interfere with the safe operation of a motor vehicle will:
1. Determine if the driver is capable of continuing to operate a motor vehicle at the time of contact, if so record the full name, date of birth and Texas driver’s license number of the driver and release them, if the officer determines that it is not safe to allow the driver to continue to operate a motor vehicle the officer will find a safe alternative to releasing the driver.
2. Report the driver to the Texas Department of Public Safety Driver Improvement and Compliance Bureau by completing a memo with the driver’s information and a description of the contact and the medical or other condition that the officer feels may interfere with the safe operation of a motor vehicle. The memo will be forwarded through the officer’s chain of command to the commander of the Tactical Operations Division.
3. The Commander of the Tactical Operations Division or their designee will forward the information to the Texas Department of Public Safety Driver Improvement and Compliance Bureau.
J. When completing the race/ethnicity field on a citation, officers will use the race or ethnicity category listed in the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure Article 2.132 that most accurately reflects that individual’s race/ethnicity. Officers will not ask an individual for their race, but will make that determination to the best of their ability.
RACE/ETHNICITYCitation Code
BlackB
Asian or Pacific IslanderA
WhiteW
Hispanic or LatinoH
Alaska Native or American IndianI

302.02 Traffic Enforcement in Accident Investigations
A. During the investigation of traffic accidents, any officer who on-viewed and witnessed an accident may issue a citation for any violation occurring in his/her presence.
B. During the investigation of traffic accidents, the investigating officer, although not a witness to the accident, will issue citations for “No Operators License” and “No Liability Insurance”, when these violations have been committed. If any party wishes to file additional charges, he or she will be referred to the City Attorney’s Office. Officers issuing “No Operators License” and “No Liability Insurance” citations will be guided by the following:
1. The officer must have a ‘fact witness’ who is willing to testify in City Court that the violator was, in fact, operating a motor vehicle on a public street, or the violator must admit to the investigating officer that he or she was the operator of the vehicle.
2. The name of the witness, his/her address, zip code, and telephone number will be placed in the space provided on the court’s copy of the citation.
3. Any corroborating information, (such as statements of witnesses, direction of travel of vehicles, lane of traffic, block numbers) should be placed in the narrative portion of the court's copy of the citation.
C. In all cases involving serious injury or death, the appropriate state law covering the incident will be used.
D. Enforcement action will not be taken under the following circumstances:
1. When a motor vehicle overturns in the roadway or runs off the roadway without colliding with another vehicle or object and only the driver is injured and/or the overturned vehicle is damaged.
2. When ice or snow is on the street and is the principal cause of an accident and no reckless disregard of safety is indicated.
3. When an unforeseen hazard exists without forewarning and the hazard is the principal cause of the accident and no reckless disregard of safety is indicated (such as oil slicks, unusual mud deposits, unlighted barricades, piles of dirt or debris, objects left or fallen onto the street).
4. Sections 2 and 3 above do not apply if persons other than the drivers are injured or killed. In this type of accident, the drivers at fault may be charged as appropriate under Chapters 19, 22, or 49 of the Penal Code. The officer conducting the accident investigation will make a reasonable attempt to ensure that the next-of-kin is notified when:
a. An adult or juvenile is killed.
b. An adult is injured or incapacitated to the point that he/she is unable to make his or her own notification.
c. A juvenile is injured.
E. DART Bus Accidents
1. Non-injury and Non-fatality Accidents
a. The bus driver may continue on the route after exchanging all necessary information with the other driver and reporting the accident by telephone to a DART supervisor.
b. Any traffic ticket issued to a DART bus driver, out of the driver's presence, will be delivered to a DART supervisor. It will be noted on the Accident Report that the ticket was Delivered to a DART supervisor.
2. Injury and/or Fatality Accidents
a. The DART driver will remain at the accident scene until released by the investigating officer.
b. A DART adjuster will be ordered through the police dispatcher.

302.03 Investigation of Minor Accidents
A. The investigating officer will complete an Accident Report Form ST-3 for any minor accident when:
1. Any person involved in the accident is injured or claims injury.
2. There is damage to public or private property other than the involved vehicles.
3. An unattended vehicle is involved or damaged.
4. Any criminal action, other than the issuance of citations for “No Operators License” and “No Liability Insurance”, is involved. This will include, but is not limited to, FSRA, FLID, DWI, or when a stolen vehicle is involved. As a rule, officers will investigate FLID and FSRA accidents when either/or both parties have left the scene to:
a. Pursue the suspect;
b. Seek medical attention; and/or
c. Call the police from a telephone in close proximity.
5. There is damage to City equipment. The accident investigator will determine the type of report to be made in accordance with state law and Traffic Section Standard Operating Procedure.
6. A vehicle belonging to any governmental agency is involved.
B. When an accident involves disabled or non-movable vehicles, a field element will be dispatched to the location. If necessary, the element may order a city contract wrecker. Unless the accident involves a situation outlined in 302.03A, an Accident Report is not required. A Miscellaneous Incident Report (MIR), outlining owner information and disposition of vehicle, will be completed instead. An MIR will be completed on any impounded vehicle.
C. When the vehicles can be driven and none of the exceptions listed in 302.03A or B exist, the field element will notify the dispatcher to clear the call with an N-5 (non-police incident) designation.
D. If the damage to the vehicle/property of any one person exceeds $500 and the accident is not investigated by an officer, the responding field element will do one of the following:
1. Provide state blue forms (ST-2) to the persons involved in the accident and advise them that in accordance with state law, they must complete and submit the form to the Statistical Services Bureau of the Texas Department of Public Safety.
2. Direct the parties to any of the police substations where they may pick up a state blue form.
E. When Fire Department 911/311 personnel receive a call reporting an accident, they will:
1. Determine if either Section 302.03A or B is applicable.
2. If the call does not meet the criteria established in Section 302.03A or B, advise the person that the Police Department does not investigate minor accidents.
3. Advise the person that the damage to the property of any one person is $500 or more, the accident must be reported to the state in accordance with 302.03D, and explain where the state blue forms may be obtained.

302.04 FLID and FSRA Reporting Procedure
A. Officers will be required to complete an Offense/Incident Report in conjunction with the Accident Report on FLIDs (Duty to Give Information) or FSRAs (Duty to Give Information and Render Aid). The Offense/Incident Report will be entered on a station RLN, an MDC, or called in to Direct Entry.
B. State and Departmental Reporting Requirements
1. Two service numbers are required: one for the Accident Report and another for the FLID or FSRA Offense Report. Each report must contain a complete narrative of what occurred and be cross-referenced to its related service number.
2. A Polaris Report must be completed and submitted through the reporting officer’s chain-of-command to the Traffic Section. The Accident Report must be completed according to the guidelines in ST-100 (State of Texas Instructions [To Police] for Reporting Accidents on the Texas Peace Officer’s Accident Report Form and Commercial Motor Vehicle Supplement Form).
C. Unless an exception is indicated, each FLID or FSRA Offense Report will contain the following:
1. Property Page - Include a description of the damage done to the complainant’s vehicle only.
2. Vehicle Page - Complete one for each vehicle involved in the accident. If more than two vehicles are involved, the report must be called in to Direct Entry as there are only two vehicle pages available via the MDC.
3. Suspect Page - Required only if suspect information is available.
4. Witness Page - Required only if a witness is located.
5. Narrative Page - The first sentence must be, “See Accident Report on Service #.” (Use the service number of the accident). Include all other information related to the offense such as directions of travel, collision points, vehicle damage, injuries, etc. Do not include any identifying information on witnesses or suspects in the narrative.
D. All other procedures pertaining to FLID offenses shall remain in effect.
E. FLID-type accidents involving property damage that occur on private property (if defined as a non-reportable area in the Patrol Bureau S.O.P.), will be investigated as Reckless Damage or Criminal Mischief incidents, as appropriate.

302.05 Use of Police Vehicles to Protect Accident Scenes
A. Police elements arriving at the scene of an accident may use the police vehicle to block off or protect the scene to determine if there are injuries and what type of assistance is needed.
B. The officer will determine if the police vehicle is needed to protect his/her safety and prevent further injuries. If not, flares will be set out to protect or block off the scene and then the police vehicle will be moved to the shoulder or center median of the roadway.
C. When police vehicles are used to protect the scene of an accident, they will be parked with emergency lights operating in a position that will be clearly visible to oncoming traffic. If possible, flares should also be put out to further secure the area.
D. All officers will ensure that the trunk lid of their squad car does not remain open at an accident scene. An open trunk lid will obstruct emergency lights and render them ineffective.

302.06 Accidents Involving City Owned Equipment
A. Employee Responsibilities
1. A City employee driving a city-owned vehicle involved in an accident will ensure that a supervisor is called to the scene.
2. The involved City employee will complete and submit an Accident Report Involving City Equipment or Privately Owned Equipment Used on City Business form (P-8 Rev.). All accidents involving privately owned vehicles used on City business (mileage reimbursed) will be handled as if city-owned equipment is involved.
B. Property Damage Accidents
1. Involving Only City-Owned Vehicle/Property - No Injuries
a. The investigating officer will complete and submit the following forms:
i. A computer-generated Miscellaneous Incident Report.
ii. Accident Investigator's Report Form 69-12R1 - as an Attachment.
b. The involved City employee is responsible for completing and submitting Accident Report Involving City Equipment or Privately Owned Equipment Used on City Business form (P-8 Rev.).
c. Drivers are not required to submit state blue forms ST-2 or SR-21.
2. Involving Private Property or Private Vehicle - No Injuries
a. Damage Less Than $500 Per Person
i. Unless a private citizen requests an Accident Report filed, the investigating officer will complete and submit the following forms:
(1) Miscellaneous Incident Report.
(2) Accident Investigator’s Report Form 69-12R1 – as an Attachment.
ii. When a private citizen requests an accident report be filed, the investigating officer will complete and submit the following forms:
(1) Motor Vehicle Accident Report Form ST-3.
(2) An Accident Investigator’s Report 69-12R1.
iii. The involved City employee will complete and submit Accident Report Involving City Equipment or Privately Owned Equipment Used on City Business form (P-8 Rev.).
b. Damage at Least $500 Per Person
i. The investigating officer will complete and submit the following reports:
(1) Motor Vehicle Accident Report Form ST-3.
(2) Accident Investigator's Report Form 69-12R1 - as an Attachment.
ii. The involved City employee will complete and submit Accident Report Involving City Equipment or Privately Owned Equipment Used on City Business Form (P-8 Rev.).
c. Drivers are not required to submit state blue forms ST-2 or SR-21 in the following situations:
i. Damage to property or vehicle is less than $500 per person.
ii. The investigating officer submits Motor Vehicle Accident Report Form ST-3.

C. Injury or Fatality Accidents

1. The investigating officer will complete and submit the following reports:
a. Motor Vehicle Accident Report Form ST-3.
b. Accident Investigator's Report Form 69-12R1 - Attachment.
c. A computer-generated Miscellaneous Incident Report - (required only on a fatality).
2. The City employee will complete and submit Accident Report Involving City Equipment or Privately Owned Equipment Used on City Business form (P-8 Rev.).
D. When a DART vehicle is involved, it is not necessary for the investigating officer to complete an Accident Investigator's Report (Form 69-12 R1).
E. Damage Estimates
1. It is unnecessary to call a city mechanic to the scene of an accident involving city- owned vehicles or vehicles working under contract with the City of Dallas.
2. Southeast Service Center body shop personnel will estimate vehicle damages at their office. The body shop will be open for estimates between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 3:30 p.m., Monday - Friday. The following vehicles, however, will not be estimated at the Southeast Service Center body shop:
a. DART vehicles.
b. Privately owned equipment (including city contract wreckers) on city business.
c. Fire Department vehicles.
d. Park Department vehicles.
3. City equipment vehicles that cannot be driven will be taken to the body shop.
4. If the City vehicle sustained very minor damage and will remain in service, the City vehicle driver will:
a. Report to the body shop with the damaged vehicle if the accident occurred during body shop hours.
b. Report to the body shop with the damaged vehicle the next day if the accident occurred after business hours or on Monday if the accident occurs on the weekend. If the driver will not be on duty, they will advise a supervisor who will designate someone to deliver the damaged vehicle to the body shop.
F. Supervisor's Report on City Equipment Accidents (SO2001-16)
1. After reviewing the employee’s P-8 form and the Accident Investigator’s reports concerning the accident, the employee’s immediate supervisor will complete a Supervisor's Investigation of Accident/Injury Report.
2. The employee’s immediate supervisor will assemble a collision packet according to the procedures outlined in General Order 419.06-Police Equipment Collision Guidelines.
G. Damage to Certain Types of Property
1. Fire Hydrant - The investigating officer will contact the dispatcher, who will then notify the Water Utilities Department.
2. Light Pole - The investigating officer will include the light pole number on the Motor Vehicle Accident Report Form.

302.07 Police Jurisdiction on the Dallas North Tollway
A. The Department of Public Safety (DPS) will have primary responsibility for enforcement of traffic laws and investigation of traffic accidents on the Dallas North Tollway and President George Bush Turnpike. DPD officers may take traffic enforcement on the Dallas North Tollway and President George Bush Turnpike for those portions that lie within the Dallas City limits. DPD officers will not use fixed radar locations anywhere on President George Bush Turnpike, Dallas North Tollway or Parkway extension.
B. Criminal offenses, except traffic-related offenses, will be investigated by the local law enforcement officers in whose jurisdiction the offense occurred.
C. Should a vehicle pursued by DPD enter on to the Dallas North Tollway before it can be stopped, the officers may pursue the car. The dispatcher will call DPS and request their assistance in apprehending the driver of the wanted vehicle.
D. Dallas North Tollway Procedure
1. DPD officers who receive a call on the Dallas North Tollway will proceed to the call location. If the element receives an accident call on the Dallas North Tollway, the officers will request DPS officers to meet them at the scene. Immediately upon the arrival of the DPS officers, DPD officers will relinquish the investigation to the DPS officers and return to service.
2. The North Texas Tollway Authority (NTTA) equips DPD with non-revenue toll tags for official police department vehicles through the DPD liaison, stationed at the quartermaster. The liaison is responsible for coordinating all DPD toll tags and communications with the NTTA.
3. Fleet coordinators will be responsible for communications with the liaison regarding any toll tag inquiries, requests or changes (i.e. vehicles to be taken out of service). The liaison will be responsible for ensuring the DPD portion of the NTTA toll tag database is current.
4. All toll tags have individual identification numbers that are entered into the DPD portion of the NTTA database. A toll tag is issued to a vehicle and must remain with the vehicle and be accounted for at all times. Lost, stolen or damaged toll tags must be reported immediately.
5. Non-revenue Toll Tags are not accepted at:
a. Love Field
b. DFW Airport
c. The Harris County Toll Road Authority
6. By agreement, DPS jurisdiction on the Dallas North Tollway begins at the point where a vehicle leaves the City of Dallas right-of-way and enters the Tollway ramp and cannot reverse its action without backing up. The vehicle is said to have reached the point of decision and is thereby committed.
7. The same formula is applied when a vehicle leaves the Tollway right-of-way and completely enters the City of Dallas right-of-way. The vehicle is said to be committed.

302.08 Juvenile Traffic Offenders
A. Under 10 Years of Age
1. Upon detaining a traffic offender under ten years of age, the officer will take the youth home and release him/her to the parents, guardian, or other responsible adult. If no adult is at the location, the officer will take the child into Protective Custody and transport him/her to Child Protective Services at 8700 N. Stemmons Freeway #104.
2. The officer will complete a Field Interrogation Report (FIR) on the incident in accordance with Section 314.02 and forward it to the Youth Operations Unit.
3. If the initial traffic contact is within reasonable distance from the child’s home, the officer may allow the juvenile to push home any involved two-wheel, three-wheel, or four-wheel off-road vehicle/go-cart or impound the vehicle as circumstances warrant.
B. Ages 10 - 16
1. These juveniles detained as traffic violators will be issued a traffic citation that will be set in Municipal Court.
2. After the citation has been issued, a FIR will be issued and the juvenile will be released.
3. If the juvenile is issued a traffic citation for No Operator’s License during the initial traffic contact and is within a reasonable distance from home, the officer may allow the juvenile to push home any involved two-wheel, three- wheel, or four-wheel off-road vehicle/go-cart or impound the vehicle as circumstances warrant.
C. Juveniles Involved in Motor Vehicle Accidents
1. Officer may issue a driver (Ages 10 - 16) involved in a vehicle accident a Municipal Court citation for any violations occurring in the officer’s presence.
2. If the officer did not observe the accident, he/she may issue citations for No Operator’s License and/or No Liability Insurance if the officer has a fact witness. Officers will use the same guidelines established for adults in Section 302.02.
D. Juvenile Driving While Intoxicated procedures are described in Section 314.08.

302.09 Driving While Intoxicated or Under the Influence of Drugs
A. General Provisions
1. Intoxicated juveniles (10-16 years of age) will be processed according to Section 314.08. Juveniles who are not intoxicated, but have any detectable amount of alcohol on their breath will be processed according to General Order 315.18 (Underage Alcohol Consumption Laws).
2. Adults (without obvious injury) will be taken to the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center and processed according to the Detention Services Section Standard Operating Procedures, which will be available for reference. While at the scene, the arresting officer may read the Statutory Warning on Body Worn Camera or the In-Car camera. Once an adult is arrested for DWI the officer has the option to offer a breath and/or blood test. If the arrestee refuses a breath and/or blood test, an affidavit for an evidentiary search warrant will be prepared by the officer and submitted to the Magistrate at Lew Sterrett for signature to obtain a blood specimen to be tested for alcohol and/or drugs. Officers are required to have DWI blood draw evidence drawn at Parkland Hospital Emergency Room, or any of the Hospital Emergency Rooms in the area. If the arrestee voluntarily agrees to provide a blood specimen after being read the Statutory Warning at the scene, the officer may transport the arrestee directly to the hospital for the blood draw prior to going to Lew Sterrett for processing.
3. Adult minors (17 - 20 years of age) who have a breath/blood test result below .08 or adult minors with any detectable amount of alcohol on their breath will be processed according to General Order 315.18 (Underage Alcohol Consumption Laws). Adult minors who refuse to take a breath/blood test will be processed according to the provisions outlined in the remainder of this General Order.
4. Drivers involved in accidents may be charged with D.W.I. under either of these circumstances:
a. A fact witness, either an officer or another person, can identify that the suspect was the driver of the vehicle at the time of the accident.
b. The suspected driver admits to the investigating officer that he/she was driving when the accident occurred.
c. The officer has evidence that the suspect was the driver. Example: Seatbelt marks indicating the suspect was in the driver seat, abrasions on the arms from airbag deployment, etc…
5. The arresting officer is responsible for checking the arrested person's driving record for previous D.W.I. convictions. It will be noted in the Officer’s Comments section who checked for previous conviction information, or if not checked, the reason why (i.e. computers down, etc.).
6. D.W.I. Charges - If the arrested person has:
a. No previous D.W.I. conviction - charge will be DWI M/B.
b. Only one previous D.W.I. conviction - charge will be DWI-Enhanced M/A.
c. Two or more convictions for D.W.I., the charge will be DWI-Enhanced F/3.
7. For enhancement purposes, the following information is required on prior D.W.I. convictions:
a. Date of conviction;
b. County of conviction;
c. Convicting court name;
d. Case or docket number; and
e. Sentence.
8. A conviction prior to January 1, 1984 punished by probation, deferred adjudication, and suspended sentences cannot be used to enhance a D.W.I. case.
B. Procedures for Conducting a Drug Evaluation - This procedure will be used when a suspect is arrested for D.W.I. whether or not it was accident involved.
1. The arresting officer will take the suspect to Lew Sterrett where the subject will be offered a breath test. If the breath test is refused, the subject will be offered a blood test. If the subject refuses to be tested or the test result is .08 or higher, the suspect will be charged with D.W.I. and procedures from 302.09 A.4-7 will be followed.
2. Arresting officers may request a Drug Recognition Expert be called to evaluate a suspect who has a breath alcohol level below .08 and whose impairment is not consistent with the BAC.
C. Public Intoxication in Car
1. An intoxicated person involved in an accident may be charged with Public Intoxication if there is no fact witness and the person does not admit to driving the vehicle when the accident occurred.
2. An intoxicated person found in a parked vehicle may be charged with Public Intoxication if the vehicle is in a public place.
3. Drivers of motor vehicles will be charged with and placed under custodial arrest for Public Intoxication, whenever, in the officer’s opinion, the driver does not meet the statutory .08 limit, but is too impaired to drive.
D. Arrests on Parking Areas - An intoxicated person operating a motor vehicle on a private parking lot (either public or private property) may be charged with Driving While Intoxicated if the parking lot is a public place as defined in Section 1.07, Texas Penal Code. (This normally includes parking lots of apartment complexes, restaurants, bars, and shopping centers where a substantial portion of the public has ready access to such areas).

302.10 Driving While License Suspended
A. Mandatory Suspension
1. Definition: A D.W.I. charge is usually the cause of this type of suspension.
2. Procedure
a. When a subject check is made and it is determined the operator is Driving While License is Suspended (DWLS) with a mandatory suspension, the Communications Section personnel will notify the officer of the following applicable information:
i. Reason suspended.
ii. Location (county) of suspension.
iii. Expiration date of suspension.
b. The subject will be arrested for the county charge of Investigation of D.W.L.S., if driving with this type of suspension. The information provided in A.2.a above (reason, location, expiration) will be included in the Arrest Report.
B. Habitual Violator Suspension
1. Definition: Repeated violations are the cause of this type of suspension.
2. Procedure
a. When a subject check is made and it is determined the operator is D.W.L.S. with a habitual violator suspension, the Communications Section personnel will notify the officer of the following applicable information:
i. Location (county) of suspension.
ii. Expiration date.
b. The subject will be arrested for the county charge of Investigation of D.W.L.S. if driving with this type of suspension and the information provided in B.2.a above (location, expiration) will be included in the Arrest Report.
C. Safety Responsibility Suspension
1. Definition: A liability problem with a motor vehicle accident is the cause of this type of suspension.
2. Procedure
a. If a judgment number (i.e., a number containing a "J" that is listed after the SR Suspension on the printout) is present, a judgment has been rendered on the D.W.L.S. charge by the court. Regardless of the date given or the absence of one, the subject will be arrested on the county charge of Investigation of D.W.L.S.
b. If there is no "J" present in the number, the date of the suspension determines whether the subject may be arrested for the county charge of Investigation of D.W.L.S.
i. Prior to June 19, 1975, citizens did not have the opportunity to challenge a safety responsibility suspension. Therefore, it was ruled an illegal suspension and the subject cannot be arrested on the county charge of Investigation of D.W.L.S. if it is dated before June 19, 1975. However, the operator may be written a citation or arrested for No Valid Texas Driver's License.
ii. Since June 19, 1975, citizens have had the opportunity to challenge a safety responsibility suspension. Therefore, a subject who has had a license suspended since that date will be arrested on the county charge of Investigation of D.W.L.S.
c. When a check is made on a subject and it is determined the operator is D.W.L.S. with a safety responsibility suspension, the Communications Section personnel will notify the officer of the following applicable information:
i. Judgment number.
ii. Date the safety responsibility suspension was rendered if there is no judgment number.
d. When a subject with a safety responsibility suspension is arrested for the county charge of Investigation of D.W.L.S., the information provided in C.2.c above will be listed on the Arrest Report.
D. Occupational Driver's License
1. Definition
a. A restricted driver's license ordered by a court.
b. It specifies time and/or geographical conditions under which a person is permitted to operate a vehicle while the person's driver's license has a mandatory, habitual or safety responsibility suspension.
c. The fact that a subject has an occupational driver's license will not appear on the computer printout.
2. Procedure
a. If a subject has violated the restriction of the occupational driver's license, the operator will be arrested for the charge of Violation Code Restriction, Occupation License, M/B.
b. The type of suspension given to the individual prior to receiving the occupational driver's license will be listed on the Arrest Report.
c. The restrictions on the occupational driver's license will be listed on the Arrest Report.
E. Charging Suspects with Driving While License Suspended
1. Suspects may be charged with D.W.L.S. based on witness observation that the suspect was operating a motor vehicle. The suspect must be under arrest for an offense other than D.W.L.S. before the D.W.L.S. charge can be added.
2. The civilian witness may be used at the trial to testify that he/she observed the suspect driving the vehicle at the time in question. For that reason, the arresting officer must obtain the name and address of the civilian witness so that the witness can be contacted at a later date to testify, if needed.
3. D.W.L.S. arrests based on witness observation of driving cannot be made in situations where that is the only charge.
F. Revoked Driver’s License
1. Definition: Non-compliance with Administrative procedures outlined in the Texas Transportation Code is usually the reason for Driver’s License Revocation.
2. Procedure
a. When a Driver’s License check is made and it is determined that the license has been revoked, the Communications Section personnel will notify the officer of the following applicable information:
i. That the Driver’s License has been revoked.
ii. The reason for the revocation as defined in the Texas Transportation Code, Section 521.294
b. The Driver may be charged with No Valid Texas Operators License.

302.11 Strategic Targeting Against Aggressive Driving and Road Rage
A. The primary goal of this program is proactive traffic enforcement to reduce the number of traffic accidents at high accident locations using a mandated zero tolerance approach. Each Patrol Operations Division will be assigned an unmarked vehicle to handle traffic problems, such as reducing the number of accidents at specific intersections, as identified by Traffic Section accident analysis. The unmarked vehicles will also be used in responding to neighborhood concerns of speeding, traffic violations at red light or stop sign controlled intersections, aggressive driving, road rage, and other non-traffic neighborhood concerns. Officer safety will not be minimized.
B. Definitions
1. Aggressive Driving - Inconsiderate and other forms of negligent driving that may include following too closely, speeding, unsafe lane changes, or failure to signal, etc.
2. Road Rage - That behavior that typically surfaces as an angry, frequently violent response to an aggressive driving incident.
C. Unmarked vehicles used in this enforcement are for traffic stops only and will be operated only under the exceptions as described in Section 301.02. If involved in a self-initiated pursuit, the operator of the STARR vehicle will immediately abandon the pursuit and reduce to a Code 1 status once a marked element is able to take over the pursuit. STARR vehicles will not become involved in a pursuit initiated by any other element.
D. When used for traffic enforcement, the unmarked vehicle may be staffed by one or two officers. If staffed by only one officer, that officer must have successfully completed a basic radar certification school. If staffed by two officers, one officer must have successfully completed a basic radar certification school.
E. To avoid citizen confusion, assigned officers must be in full uniform and carry their departmental identification cards.
F. Violators may be cautious when stopped by an unmarked vehicle; therefore, officers should not become offended or overly assertive if someone refuses to stop.

302.12 Multiple Violation Citations
A. The goal of this program is to reduce the amount of paper citations that an officer must write out in order to complete an enforcement action against a violator in the field.
B. Officers will not place more than three violations on one citation.
C. Officers will inform the violator of the number and types of charges they are issuing to the violator
D. Officers will not add charges to the citation without providing the violator with documentation of the added charges at the time of contact.

302.13 Reports Required
During all motor vehicle stops (regardless if a citation is issued or not), officers are required to record and report the following information:
A. The gender of the individual stopped
B. The race or ethnicity of the individual
C. If the race or ethnicity was known prior to the stop
D. A reason for the stop
E. Location of the stop
F. If a search was conducted
G. The reason for the search
H. If any contraband was discovered
I. Description of discovered contraband
J. Result of the stop
K. If there was an arrest, what the arrest was based on
L. If any physical force resulting in bodily injury was used
Officers shall ensure all data is gathered from every motor vehicle stop and submitted prior to the end of their shift. Supervisors shall ensure officers comply with this order.

Dallas Police Department General Order

303.00 Alternative to Arrest Program

Revised 05/10/2024

303.00 ALTERNATIVE TO ARREST PROGRAM (ALTAR)
303.01 Purpose of the Program
A. The purpose of the Alternative to Arrest Program is to allow the field officer the option of releasing, in the field, any person with a single Alias Warrant. It is designed to reduce jail activity, extend a courtesy to the citizens of Dallas, and create more street patrol time.
B. The ALTAR Program is designed to be an option for the field officer. Its use is left solely to the discretion of the officer.
C. This will not be used on Misdemeanor Class C Family Violence warrants.

303.02 Field Procedure
A. Upon being notified by the Communications Group that a subject has a single misdemeanor warrant with the City of Dallas, an officer may opt to release the subject in the field.
1. The officer will request the OCA Number from the Communications Group. That 6-digit number is also the Citation Number.
2. For a misdemeanor Class C Family Violence warrant, officers will confirm the warrant and make the arrest.
3. The officer will then issue the subject a citation for Failure to Appear (F.T.A.). F.T.A., plus the OCA Number, will be written in the Other Violation area of the citation.
4. It is not necessary to confirm the warrant if the officer chooses not to arrest and instead issues a citation. If the warrant is invalid, the F.T.A. citation will be dismissed by Court Services personnel.
5. If the subject is to be placed in jail, then confirmation would be accomplished in the usual manner.
B. Failure to Appear is a non-traffic violation. It will be considered a city arrest when posting daily activity.
C. When issuing a citation for Failure to Appear under the ALTAR Program, the officer will inform the citizen that:
1. If, within 21 days, he/she adjudicates or otherwise disposes of the citation for which a warrant was issued, the
F.T.A. citation will automatically be dismissed.
2. If the F.T.A. citation is ignored, he/she will be prosecuted for both offenses and specifically targeted for arrest by the Office of the City Marshal.

Dallas Police Department General Order

304.00 Crime Investigation

Revised 03/10/2023


304.00 CRIME INVESTIGATION
A. Uniformed Operations Division officers will be responsible for conducting preliminary investigations in most cases. Any officer may perform this function on a need basis. Officers will be responsible for the following when conducting preliminary investigations:
1. Observing all conditions, events and remarks;
2. Locating, identifying and interviewing the complainant, witnesses and suspects;
3. Maintaining and protecting crime scene and contacting PES for collection of evidence.
B. Detectives will be assigned cases per General Order 210.05 and will be responsible for conducting the follow-up investigation.
C. Detectives from investigative units will attend shift briefings as needed; to share, obtain and disseminate intelligence information. Detectives from Property Crimes will attend and participate in shift briefings at their stations regularly, during working hours, as outlined in the Property Crimes SOP. Detective’s attendance should be recorded on the patrol daily detail and reported to their supervisor.
D. All crime scenes will be approached with caution to avoid damaging or destroying possible evidence. If a victim is involved, the officer's primary responsibility is protection of the victim and the scene until a search can be conducted.
E. The first officer arriving at any crime scene will be responsible for protecting the scene. If the responding officer determines that the Crime Scene Response Section’s Physical Evidence Squad (PES) is needed to process the crime scene, the officer will request PES through the dispatcher or by telephone. The officer will not leave the scene until relieved by other officers or released by detectives who have follow-up responsibility and PES personnel. Should the initial officer need to leave the scene, the relief officers will be briefed on the particulars of the crime so that they can relay this information to the PES personnel. In a medical emergency, the officer will, if at all possible, make a list of all Dallas Fire Department personnel entering the crime scene and provide a list to PES personnel on their arrival. This information will allow PES to eliminate fingerprints left at the scene by paramedics.
F. No personnel other than medical personnel, or personnel needed to preserve the victim's life or to protect other officers or citizens will be allowed to enter the scene until the arrival of PES or the detectives who have follow-up responsibility. The immediate supervisor of the officers responsible for protecting the scene may enter the scene if it becomes necessary.
G. No personnel shall take unauthorized photographs of crime scenes or other evidence.
H. The crime scene will continue to be secured by the initial responding officers and no one, including non-authorized police personnel and members of the news media, will be allowed to enter without authorization of PES and detectives who have follow-up responsibility for conducting the crime scene search.
I. The procedures outlined in sections D-F will be followed for all scenes in which the downtown PES is called. The exceptions will be theft, burglary, and criminal mischief offenses and in auto theft cases in which the vehicle is not taken to the pound, but PES is called.
J. When seizing digital evidence it is important to consider the many and differing types of items and electronic storage devices available for use. When seizing a personal computer, if the computer is turned off, do not power it on. If the computer is turned on; a normal routine shut down may be used to power down the computer. When seizing a laptop and/or PDA, the power supply must also be seized. If the evidence is on a larger system with a server, the Financial Investigations Unit – Computer Crimes Squad will be contacted and a certified digital forensics examiner will be consulted with, prior to the seizure. The investigating detective will determine what evidence is transported to the North Texas Regional Computer Forensics Laboratory (NTRCFL).
K. When following up on an offense, if a patrol officer obtains evidence related to the offense, the officer will complete a supplement on the offense case number in FBR documenting the evidence, who received it, and when/how it was obtained. The officer will communicate with the assigned case detective and ensure all evidence is uploaded to RMS, placed in the property room or transferred to the detective promptly.

304.01 EYEWITNESS IDENTIFICATION PURPOSE
Eyewitness identification will always be a significant tool in the investigation and prosecution of criminal cases. Most agree that it can be the most important, powerful, and convincing evidence in a criminal trial. Recent developments with DNA evidence however has shown that innocent people have been convicted, many based on misidentifications by eyewitnesses. As a result of these documented cases of witness error, there has been an ongoing national discussion centered on law enforcement practices in the identification process. The Dallas Police Department has monitored both the research on this topic and implementation of new policies by other agencies. It is our belief that implementation of new policies requiring “blind” administration of line-ups using the “sequential” method will assist in eliminating errors and restoring confidence in the eyewitness identification process. To that end, the following policies are adopted for the administration of line-ups. Even with implementation of this policy, our goal of verifying all eyewitness identifications through independent evidence will remain.

Definitions
Blind Administrator – The person administering the line-up has no knowledge of which person in the Photo Line-Up is the suspect.
Sequential – A method of administration where photographs are shown to the witness one at a time, with an independent decision on each, before the next photo is shown.
Line-Up Administration Squad – primary unit comprised of sworn and non-sworn employees who have successfully completed the appropriate training.

A. Photo Line-up Policy
1. All Photo Line-Ups will be conducted by Line-Up Administrators who have been specifically trained in the “sequential” method of administration.
2. Line-Up Administrators must not know the identity of the suspect to be included in the line-up.
3. The Investigations Bureau Commander will develop and administer appropriate training for all Line-Up Administrators in the “sequential” line-up process and will ensure that all trained administrators are promptly notified of any changes in protocols for “sequential” Line-Up Administration.
B. Preparation of Photo Line-ups
1. The detective assigned responsibility for investigative follow-up will remain the primary contact for all victims and witnesses to a criminal case. The detective will be responsible for identifying cases requiring a line-up and will assemble a line-up packet, which will require a sergeant’s or above approval from their designated unit, prior to contacting a trained Line-Up Administrator.
2. Prior to creating the line-up, the investigating detective will contact the complainant/witness and complete the “Line-up Creation Form” which is used to support the line-up in court and can be found on the DPD Intranet under Resources/Forms in the Photo Line-Up folder. (Link: Photo Lineup Packet.pdf) The Photo Line-Up packet has been updated and approved.
a. The sequential line-up packet will consist of a photograph of the suspect and 5 “filler” photos of persons unconnected to the incident under investigation.
b. The suspect and “filler” photographs should resemble the witness’s description of the suspect in significant features, such as race, sex, age, facial features, profile, height, weight, build, specific items of clothing, etc. to the extent applicable to the photo being used of the suspect.
i. If multiple photographs of the suspect are available, detectives will select the photograph that most resembles the suspect description or appearance at the time of the incident.
ii. Attention should be paid to unusual identifying marks described by the witness that are visible on the suspect’s photo. In these cases, photos containing a similar feature should be included, or the area of the feature may be covered on all photographs to be included.
iii. All photos should be the same size; no photo should unduly stand out from the others.
c. Once selected, all of the photographs will be copied individually onto the middle section of separate sheets of paper. The detective preparing the line-up packet will select one of the filler photos and will place the number “1” on the back of the photo in a manner that it cannot be seen by the complainant or witness when viewing the photos. In the subsequent line-up, the administrator will place this photo in the first position. The investigating detective will not number the suspect or other filler photos, as the Line-Up Administrator will later randomize and number them on the back of each photo, corresponding to their position in the line-up.
3. If multiple suspects are involved, a separate Line-Up Packet must be prepared for each suspect to be presented to the witness.
4. In cases where one witness will view multiple line-ups containing different suspects, detectives will ensure that different “filler” photographs are used in each line-up packet.
5. If multiple witnesses will be shown a line-up containing the same suspect, there also must be a separate line-up packet assembled for each witness. The detective may use the same “filler” photographs in each packet, (when there will be no time delay or opportunity for communication), color copies will be made and placed in a separate packet for each witness.
6. In cases where there is a time delay between showing the line-ups or when there is an opportunity for witnesses to communicate after one has viewed the line-up, the “filler” photo labeled as number “1” should be changed by the investigating detective and the Line-Up Administrator should randomize the remaining photos.
7. The detective will ensure the Photo Line-Up packet is complete and that a sergeant from their designated unit has approved and signed the Photo Line-Up packet before it is administered.
C. Administration of Photo Line-Ups
1. The Line-Up Administrator will ensure the packet has been signed by a sergeant before conducting the line-up. If the packet has not been approved; it will not be administered.
2. A line-up should be scheduled at the convenience of the complainant/witness. The investigating detective can arrange transportation for the complainant/witness to be brought to headquarters or if necessary, the line-up can be shown to the complainant/witness at their residence, place of employment, or other alternate location. Once a line-up is scheduled by the investigating detective, the Line-Up Administration Squad will be contacted and told of the time and place of the line-up. The Line-up Administration Squad will ensure that a trained administrator is at the location to administer the line-up. If a line-up needs to be shown after hours, the investigating detective can call the Fusion Center for an on-call Line-Up Administrator.
3. Determine before any Photo Line-Up presentation if the witness is deaf, illiterate, or has limited English proficiency. If the witness is deaf, illiterate, non-English speaking, or has limited English proficiency; then the detective will arrange for assistance to translate the Photo Line-Up Form in the language of the witness or otherwise assist the witness in understanding the instructions before proceeding. The identification of the assisting individual will be documented as well as the assistance provided.
4. No information on the identity of the suspect will be revealed to the Line-Up Administrator.
5. Detectives will attempt to schedule line-ups at facilities with video recording equipment if possible. Copies of the video recordings will be obtained by the Line-Up Administration Squad after completing the line-up and placed in the case file to be maintained for courtroom purposes.
6. The Line-Up Administrator will conduct the line-up following the process for “Sequential” administration established by the Investigations Bureau Commander.
7. The assigned detective, or anyone with knowledge of the suspect, will not be allowed in the room at the time of the Line-Up Administration.
8. The Line-Up Administrator will give instructions to the witness by verbally reading the admonishment form located in the Photo Line-Up folder to the complainant/witness and determine if they understand. The complainant/witness will then be asked to sign and date the form.
9. If the complainant/witness is a child and not capable of comprehending the instructions in the admonishment form, the Line-up Administrator does not have to read the form to the child. In these cases, the line-up must be conducted at a facility with video and audio recording capabilities.
10. The Line-up Administrator will avoid any actions or comments that could be construed as an attempt to influence a complainant/witness to select a particular photo.
11. If the complainant/witness identifies someone the Line-up Administrator will then ask the complainant/witness to describe in their own words how confident they are of the identification. Even if someone is identified all of the photographs in the series will be shown
12. Once the line-up is conducted, the Line-up Administrator will return the line-up packet to the investigating detective along with a copy of the results report.
13. The Line-up Administrator is prohibited from providing any feedback about the line-up results to the complainant/witness.
14. Once the sequential line-up process is complete, the Line-Up Administrator will record the results of the sequential line-up, initial the back of each photograph for line-up verification in court and sign the Results Report.
15. The investigating detective will return to the witness/complainant and answer any questions or conduct further interview with the witness/complainant.
16. The investigating detective will maintain the line-up packet in the case file or will place it in the property room to be maintained for review in subsequent court proceedings.
17. These procedures do not apply in the following circumstances:
a. On-scene identifications immediately after the commission of an offense. See One Person “Show Up” Identifications, G.O. 304.01 E.
b. When an officer is notified by a complainant and/or witness that a specific individual who the complainant and/or witness knows by true name and face is the person who committed the offense. See One-Person Photo Line-up, G.O. 304.01 D.
c. On rare occasions in which an alternate identification process is necessary for expediency and in the interest of public safety. This must be approved by a supervisor and justification must be documented in an investigative supplement. If the administration of a “Blind Line-up” is not possible then the sequential method will be utilized if possible.
d. Other specialized circumstances where alternative procedures are necessary and are reviewed by the District Attorney and approved by the Investigations Bureau Commander.
D. One-Person Photo Line-up
1. Introduction - Field investigations conducted by responding officers are vital and are often a major contributor in determining the outcome of a criminal investigation.
2. The identification of the unknown suspect in any crime can be determined by many factors such as:
a. Fingerprints
b. DNA Evidence
c. Eyewitness Identification
3. Each technique used to identify the unknown suspect has certain protocols that need to be completed to ensure that such evidence can withstand integrity tests/admissibility challenges in a future criminal trial.
4. Presenting a single photograph of a subject to a complainant/witness to determine if the subject is the unknown offender in the case is improper and will not be done by any officer. This type of identification will not withstand the admissibility challenges in court and can negatively affect the outcome of an investigation and/or prosecution.
a. When an officer has information and/or knowledge that could assist in the identification of the unknown suspect, it should be provided to the investigative detective responsible for the investigation, (MIR, supplement, email, etc.).
b. It is the responsibility of the investigative detective to determine what technique(s) is to be used to identify the unknown suspect.
5. In a criminal case where the complainant/witness knows the suspect by a true name and face, a presentation of a single photograph of the named person can be done. This procedure would be utilized to verify that the person depicted in the single photograph is the same person known by the complainant/witness and is the offender. This procedure is done for verification purposes only on known suspects.
6. The above policies are applicable to offenses in which an officer or the City of Dallas is the complainant such as evading on foot or in a vehicle.
7. Juvenile photographs (Techshare photos) can only be displayed if there is no identifying information or Techshare criminal history information visible when showing the photo.
8. When an officer has concerns regarding any identification technique(s) that should be utilized, the involved officer should contact the assigned investigator or the On-Call detective in the unit that will have investigative follow-up responsibility.
E. One Person “Show-Up” Identification
Philosophy - While allowing a crime victim or witness to view a potential suspect in a one person “show-up” identification may sometimes be necessary to establish probable cause for an arrest, it can be suggestive in nature and will only be used in very limited circumstances. Specifically, use of this process should be limited to those circumstances in which there is insufficient probable cause for an arrest or long-term detention, and there are public safety concerns if the suspect were to be released without attempting the identification.
1. “Show-Up” identification is the presentation of one suspect to a victim or eyewitness within a short time frame after the commission of a crime. This process is allowed under the law if the following criteria are present:
a. If the suspect is apprehended within a short time period and the “show-up” is conducted within a short window of time.
b. If the suspect is apprehended at or near the crime scene.
2. Policy - If probable cause exists to make an arrest for either the offense in question, for an unrelated charge, or warrants that will result in detention at the Lew Sterrett jail, then the one person “show-up” identification process will not be used. When the current investigation involves a felony offense, the on-call detective of the division who has investigative responsibility will be contacted and consulted. This consultation will be regarding what action will be taken prior to the possible suspect being placed in jail. In misdemeanor cases where the subject is arrested on unrelated charges, the possible suspect information will be forwarded to the appropriate investigative unit that has follow up responsibility.
a. When there is insufficient probable cause to secure the arrest of a suspect and there are public safety concerns if the suspect were to be released without attempting identification, the “show-up” identification procedure may be used. In these cases, the following policy must be followed:
i. A Sergeant must respond to the scene and supervise the process.
ii. Officers will attempt to gain consent from the suspect to be transported to the investigative division with follow-up responsibility. The detective at the investigative unit will create a Photo Line-Up and present the line-up to the witness or complainant for identification purposes.
iii. If the offense occurs after business hours and is an offense in which notification of an on-call detective is not required, Fusion will be notified, and the suspect will be transported to the appropriate investigative unit where a Photo Line-Up will be created. A Fusion Center detective will present the line- up to the witness or complainant for identification purposes.
iv. If the suspect refuses to be transported, the supervisor will contact the Watch Commander to obtain approval to conduct a “show-up” identification.
v. The supervisor will further direct the process to ensure:
(1) That the suspect was located near the crime scene and detained within a short time period before the “show-up” identification is conducted and within a short window of time after the offense occurred.
(2) That the witness or victim has provided a detailed description of the suspect and that the person to be placed in the “show-up” identification fits the provided description.
(3) That whenever possible, the witness should be transported to the detained suspect’s location rather than bringing the suspect to the witness location or crime scene. This procedure will limit the legal impact of the suspect’s detention and eliminate the possibility of crime scene contamination.
(4) That when the witness requests, or is concerned about possible retaliation, officers should attempt to conceal the witness during the “show-up” identification procedure.
(5) That an attempt to obtain a verbal consent from the suspect is made. Consent from the suspect is not required but should be obtained if possible.
(6) That an admonishment is provided to the witness prior to the “show-up” identification acknowledging that the person to be viewed may or may not be the offender and that the investigation will continue regardless of whether or not identification is obtained.
(7) That if there are multiple witnesses and one witness makes an identification during the “show-up” identification; further “show-up” identifications will not be done. (Other identification procedures will be used for the remaining witnesses)
(8) That the “show-up” identification is limited to one witness at a time and those witnesses have been separated and are not present when another witness is viewing the “show-up” identification.
(9) That the procedure is completed in such a manner to avoid suggestiveness, avoiding any statements suggesting that we have “apprehended the suspect” or have “who we think is responsible.”
b. Although it is not improper to have the potential suspect in a police vehicle and handcuffed if necessary for safety, it is preferred that the suspect is unhandcuffed and outside of any police vehicle during a “show-up” identification.
c. If the complainant/witness identifies someone, the officer conducting the “show-up” will then ask the complainant/witness to describe in their own words how confident they are of the identification.
d. The officer conducting the “show up” is prohibited from providing any feedback about the “show up” results to the complainant/witness.
e. At the conclusion of the process, the supervisor will be responsible for completing a “show-up” identification documentation form on all uses of this process. A copy of the form must be emailed to the Investigations Bureau Commander and the original forwarded through the sergeant’s chain of command to the Deputy Chief and then forwarded to the investigative unit with follow-up responsibility.

304.02 Death or Serious Injury Cases
A. In incidents involving death or serious injury, the investigating section assigned to handle the incident is responsible for notifying the next of kin as soon as possible. This notification will be made in person by a DPD officer if the relative lives within the city limits of Dallas. If the nearest relative lives outside the City of Dallas, the law enforcement agency where the relative resides will be notified and requested to notify the relative. Notification by telephone will only be used when other methods are not feasible.
B. A supervisor will be called to all scenes where a death occurs.
C. The Medical Examiner will be notified as soon as possible by telephone in all death cases.
D. The Traffic Section has responsibility for conducting preliminary investigations in cases of accidental death attributable directly or indirectly to the motion of a motor vehicle or its load, whether or not the death occurs on a roadway.

304.03 Felony in Progress
A. Felony in progress calls demand three primary considerations:
1. To ensure the greatest level of safety available to all officers and citizens concerned with the call.
2. To contain the scene to prevent the escape of suspects.
3. To preserve the scene and all evidence.
B. The first element on the scene has responsibility for:
1. Ascertaining if it is a legitimate call and if it is not, disregarding other elements.
2. Advising the dispatcher what assistance is needed.
3. Immediately broadcasting descriptions of suspects and/or vehicles if they have left the scene.
4. Reporting on the DEFRS System.
C. Other elements will not go to the scene after the first element advises that the situation is under control.

304.04 Bomb Threat
A. An Operations Division supervisor and field element will be dispatched to the location to contact the person in charge of the premises. It will be left to the discretion of the person in charge of the premises whether or not the building will be evacuated and/or searched.
B. If the premises are to be searched, the patrol supervisor will ask for adequate elements to make a quick and thorough search. If explosives or anything resembling explosives are found, officers will evacuate all persons from the endangered area and stand by for a member of the Explosive Ordnance Squad.
C. Explosives will not be brought into Operations Division stations or the City Hall complex. The Explosive Ordnance Squad will transport all explosives to the Firearms Training Center. The explosives will be destroyed by the Explosive Ordnance Squad at the Firearms Training Center or stored until released to the Military Explosive Ordnance Disposal.
D. Ammunition that is .50 caliber and smaller will not be considered to be explosives and may be handled by the investigating officer.
E. In all incidents involving explosives, the protection of human life will be the key point dictating the procedure to be followed. Police supervisors who are not familiar with explosive disposal procedures will not order or direct the disposal of an explosive item without full consideration of the Explosive Ordnance Squad's opinion.
F. If a bomb threat involves a commercial airplane, the FBI will be in charge of the investigation. The Operations Division supervisor and elements assigned to the incident will offer assistance to the FBI representatives. The Operations Division supervisor and elements will not search the individual passengers' luggage. The airline will supply personnel for this purpose.

304.05 Sexual Assault Offenses
A. After the officers answering the call determine that a sexual assault may have occurred and they have control of the situation, they will inform the female victim that a female police officer will conduct any further interviews if the victim so desires. The responding officer will notify the dispatcher if the female victim requests a female police officer.
1. If no female police officer is available to interview the victim, a female officer from another division will be called in to conduct the interview.
2. If the only available female police officer is inexperienced in interviewing complainants, she will be present while an experienced police officer conducts the interview.
B. The responding officer will notify a supervisor and the Crime Scene Response Section.
1. The officer will advise the victim that they may have their examination performed at Parkland Memorial Hospital (PMH), Texas Health Presbyterian Hospital Dallas, or any area hospital that has a SANE (Sexual Assault Nurse Examiner) program.
2. The supervisor will arrange for transportation to and from the examination location for the victim if he/she so desires.
3. The supervisor will also determine whether the transporting officers will remain with the victim at the hospital until the examination has been completed.
C. The responding officer will notify the Crimes Against Persons Division under the following circumstances:
1. All sexual assault offenses where a suspect is arrested.
2. A stranger-on-stranger home invasion/sexual assault.
3. Any serial case.
4. Any abduction/sexual assault offense where the complainant is restrained, taken to a place and held, other than nearby the initial offense location.
5. The facts and/or evidence do not corroborate the victim’s account of the offense, or when there is insufficient information to establish the elements of a sexual assault. The detective and officers at the scene will discuss the case and determine what course of action should be taken. The detective will make the final determination if an offense, sexual assault preliminary investigation report, or a miscellaneous incident report is the most appropriate course of action to be taken.
6. An offense is reported more than five days after it has occurred (beyond the time when a sexual assault offense examination can be performed). The responding officer will also advise the victim that a Sexual Assault Unit detective will contact her/him as soon as possible to make an appointment to discuss the case. The officer will make a preliminary investigation report, list all complainant contact information, and request that it be routed to the CAPERS’ Sexual Assault Unit.
D. If taken to PMH, the victim will be taken to the Emergency Admissions Desk regardless of whether the assault was of an oral, vaginal, or anal nature. After routine admission papers have been completed, female victims will be taken to the OB/GYN Section of the Emergency Room, while male victims will be taken to Medicine A or B.
E. The patrol officers are responsible for identifying, obtaining, and properly submitting clothing or any other items of evidentiary value in sexual assault cases.
F. The interviewing officer will make the report on the DEFRS System.
G. The transporting officer will furnish the examining physician with the service number of the offense.

304.06 Recovered Stolen Vehicles
A. All recovered stolen vehicles that were reported stolen in Dallas will be canceled by the Records Section NCIC operator.
B. The unit assigned to an offense has the final responsibility for canceling the stolen vehicle through an NCIC operator. When notified of the recovery of a stolen vehicle, the procedure is to:
1. Notify the NCIC operator that the vehicle is recovered.
2. Enter information on the Daily Clearance Log Form in the Auto Theft Unit and forward the original to the Records Section.
C. Any telephone calls regarding the recovery in another jurisdiction of a vehicle reported stolen in Dallas will be referred to the Auto Theft Unit during the hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. The Communications Section will take calls during other hours and route the information to the Auto Theft Unit.
D. The teletype operator will record all teletypes regarding stolen vehicles in the logbook and forward a copy of the teletype to the Auto Theft Unit. The entry number will be on both the original and copy of the teletype.
E. When the Auto Theft Unit is not on duty, the Salvage Unit will send a list of impounded stolen vehicles to the Auto Theft Unit by fax.
F. Notification of Owners
1. The unit assigned to an offense is responsible for notifying the owner when a stolen vehicle is recovered.
2. The person making notification will inform the Auto Pound Section that the owner has been contacted.
3. The Auto Theft Unit will notify all initiating police agencies of any recovered stolen vehicle.
G. Stolen Vehicles Recovered in Storage or on Paid Parking Lots
1. Officers recovering a stolen vehicle in storage or on a paid parking lot will either:
a. Cause the recovered stolen vehicle to be impounded (particularly if it needs to be checked for prints or paint samples).
b. If the owner is at the location (except paid parking lots) and desires that the car not be impounded (i.e., left at the scene or released at the scene), request the owner or their representative to take immediate custody of the vehicle. If the car is not otherwise in violation of the law (and physical evidence, such as prints, is not needed) and the owner insists it be left in place, there is no legal basis to take further action. If a vehicle is released to the owner under these circumstances, it will be noted in the offense supplement.
2. Under no circumstances should an officer remove a vehicle from a parking lot (requiring paid parking) without impounding the vehicle. Impounding the vehicle will ensure that the officer is not accused of being a party to a theft of service.
H. Allowing Recovered Stolen Vehicles to Become Occupied
1. Officers will not allow an unoccupied stolen vehicle to become occupied with the following exceptions (and then only with supervisory approval):
a. The vehicle was taken in the commission of a felony involving the use or threat of physical force or violence, or
b. The vehicle has been identified as the suspect vehicle in a felony involving the use or threat of physical force or violence, or
c. Approved surveillance by non-uniformed officers.
2. Supervisors must weigh the likelihood of a pursuit and the risk to the public against the seriousness of the offense and the immediate need to apprehend a suspect prior to granting approval to allow an unoccupied stolen vehicle to become occupied.
I. Additional information on the disposition of vehicles is in Section 313.14.

304.07 Repossession of Automobiles
A. A repossessor may legally repossess a vehicle as long as he does so peaceably and does not destroy any private property. A court order is not necessary. An example is when a repossessor tows away a vehicle from private or public property without the owner's knowledge.
B. If the owner catches the repossessor and the Police Department is called, it is a civil matter unless the repossessor has a court order.
1. A repossessor with a valid court order and who has obtained full physical possession of a vehicle will be permitted to retain possession of the vehicle.
2. If the owner has full physical possession of the vehicle, the repossessor will be directed to the Sheriff's Department or the appropriate Constable's office for service of the order.
3. If neither the owner nor repossessor has full physical possession of the vehicle, the repossessor will also be directed to the Sheriff's Department or the appropriate Constable's office for service and the owner may retain possession of the vehicle.
C. If the owner takes the vehicle back from the repossessor, a theft charge will not be accepted unless the repossessor had a court order.
D. Dallas Police Department personnel will not be directly involved in the service or execution of a court order in civil cases.
E. This order is not intended to prevent arrest if probable cause exists that a theft is taking place. Repossessors will normally have documents on the car (i.e., title, license receipt) and/or instructions on the lien holder's letterhead.

304.08 Inspection of Salvage Vehicles
Only officers assigned to the Auto Theft Unit will perform salvage inspections of vehicles.

304.09 Missing and Distressed Persons
A. Missing or Wanted to Locate Reporting
1. Reports from citizens will be accepted on all persons who become missing persons in, or who were last seen in, Dallas. The reportee need not be in Dallas.
2. Reports will be accepted from other law enforcement agencies when notified officially whether by mail, teletype, telegram, or telephone. When taking reports directly, identify the reporting agency, the reporting officer, and the agency telephone number.
3. Reports will be taken immediately. No arbitrary waiting period is required.
4. Reports will not be taken from citizens when the person did not become missing in nor was the person last seen in Dallas, or where there is no reason to believe the person is in Dallas. Tactfully inform the citizen how to file the initial report in the city of jurisdiction with assurance that the Dallas Police Department will assist in any requested follow-up.
5. Reports will not be taken from Child Welfare workers when a child runs away from the Children's Shelter and that child is a resident of a Dallas suburb. Child Welfare will be advised to contact the jurisdiction where the runaway resides.
B. Immediate and Continuing Investigations
1. An immediate and continuing investigation will be conducted when the missing person is:
a. A child less than ten years of age.
b. An adult more than 70 years of age.
c. Mentally incompetent (for this purpose, competency will be measured by the subject's ability to provide for his or her safety, necessities, or medication, and ability to communicate).
d. The possible victim of some harm or criminal act.
2. Exceptions may exist where a continuing investigation would not be warranted, such as:
a. Where a child less than ten years of age is mature beyond their chronological age and is a frequent runaway.
b. Where an adult more than 70 years of age is mentally and physically capable of managing their own affairs.
3. Where a continuing investigation is required, the officer handling the call will:
a. Determine that a supervisor has been notified.
b. Request the helicopter and such other assistance as might be required.
c. Notify the Youth Operations Unit.
d. Submit the report into FBR.
e. Call staff review and have the report approved and immediately placed on NCIC
f. Start a systematic search.
4. While a continuing investigation is being conducted, the details will be reported on the involved Operations Division's 24-hour report for the Chief of Police by each reviewing watch. Reporting will continue until the person is located or the search is terminated. The last entry will clearly indicate the means by which the search was terminated.
5. Ordinarily, searches will continue until the person is located. When the determination is made under B.2 above that a continuing search will not be conducted or to discontinue the search, it will be the responsibility of the Operations Division Watch Commander and the Youth Operations Unit Commander to reach the concurring opinion that there is no practical reason to continue. Their judgments will consider such factors as information learned, the absence of workable information, and the absence of some indication of harm or a criminal act against the victim.
C. Elderly Senile Persons
1. Officers contacting an elderly person who is lost will call the Youth Operations Unit to determine if a Wanted to Locate Report has been made or if any information pertaining to the person is in the Youth Operations Unit files. If no information is available in the Youth Operations Unit files, the officer making the original contact will take the individual to the Salvation Army Welfare Center, 5302 Harry Hines, and furnish the Youth Operations Unit with all information regarding the person.
2. If such person is contacted in the field and can be returned home, the officer making the contact will notify the Youth Operations Unit of the contact and disposition.
3. Should an officer come in contact with an elderly senile person who is obviously a danger to self or others, the procedures outlined in General Order 315.11 will be followed.
4. In all cases involving a found elderly senile person, a Youth Operations Unit detective will be assigned to make a follow-up investigation.
5. The Youth Operations Unit will maintain a file on all elderly persons brought to their attention. The information in this file will be made available to all officers.

304.10 Hate Crimes
A. Philosophy - The Dallas Police Department will take a proactive role in promoting peace within the community and in ensuring that rights guaranteed by state laws and the U.S. Constitution are protected for all citizens regardless of race, color, sexual orientation, ethnicity, or religion. All acts of violence or threats of violence predicated on race, religion, ethnicity, or sexual orientation will be viewed as serious and the investigations will be given priority attention. It will be the policy of the Department to bring the investigative and enforcement elements of the Police Department into action following any and all reported or observed criminal offenses involving racial, religious, ethnic, or sexual orientation hatred. Special emphasis will be placed on victim assistance and community cooperation in order to reduce victim/community trauma or fear. It must be remembered that actions taken by the Department in dealing with hate crimes are visible signs of concern and commitment to the community.
B. Definition - Hate crimes and crimes of prejudice are those offenses motivated by hatred or prejudice due to the race, religion, ethnicity, or sexual orientation of the victim. Further defined, a hate crime is an act or a threatened or an attempted act by any person or group of persons against a person or the property of an individual or group that constitutes an expression of racial, religious, ethnic, or sexual orientation hostility. This would include threatening telephone calls, hate mail, physical assaults, arson, vandalism, cross burning or destruction of other religious symbols. While this listing is not all-inclusive, some incidents may not clearly fit a specific definition. In such cases, a common sense approach must be used. Verification of motive should be determined during the investigation.
C. Procedure for Handling Hate Crimes
1. Patrol Operations personnel responding to the scene of a reported hate crime will:
a. Determine whether the offense fits the definition of a hate crime and should be handled as a crime of this type.
b. Prepare an offense report. Justification for the hate crime designation should be included in the narrative section.
c. Inform Direct Entry personnel that this offense report should be flagged as a hate crime/crime of prejudice. This will ensure that Criminal Intelligence Unit personnel, in addition to personnel with primary investigative jurisdiction, receive a copy of all offense reports and supplements.
2. Criminal Intelligence Unit - Protective Services Squad duties.
a. Verify that a flagged offense fits the requirements of a hate crime/crime of prejudice.
b. If is determined that a crime should not be classified as a hate crime, prepare a supplement to change the classification.
c. If the hate crime classification is confirmed, the Protective Services Unit will notify the Patrol Operations Division Commander where the incident occurred. The Protective Services Squad will also notify the division, section, or unit having  primary investigative responsibility to offer assistance as needed.
d. The Protective Services Unit supervisor will be responsible for facilitating follow-up investigations and notifying the appropriate personnel of the status of an investigation.
e. The Criminal Intelligence Unit will serve in a support role to the primary investigative division, section, or unit and provide assistance as requested by an affected Division Commander.
3. Patrol Operations Division responsibilities:
a. The Patrol Operations Division Commander or designee should ensure that personnel are aware of the incident, and initiate a contact (in person or by telephone depending on the circumstances) with the victim, if appropriate.
b. The Patrol Operations Division Commander should initiate necessary actions to prevent any escalation or counter violence at a hate crime location.
4. Patrol Operations Division/Investigative Unit duties:
a. The division, section, or unit having primary investigative responsibility for an offense will ensure that all related supplemental offense and arrest reports are routed to the Protective Services Squad for inclusion in the incident file.
b. Primary investigative and case filing responsibilities remain with the division, section, or unit having investigative responsibility.
c. It is the responsibility of the Division Commander whose personnel conduct the initial on-the-scene investigation or the follow-up investigation, which will result in case filing, to ensure that the Protective Services Squad supervisor is notified.

304.11 Crime Victim Compensation
A. Eligibility for crime victim assistance:
1. Must be an innocent victim, intervener, or dependent.
2. The crime must have been reported to the police within a reasonable amount of time.
3. The crime must have resulted in personal injury or death. (No payment for loss of property or damage unless medically necessary)
4. The crime must have occurred after January 1, 1980.
5. Police and Firefighters are eligible for Crime Victims compensation.
B. Procedure:
1. Crime Victim Information Notices will be kept at Operations Divisions.
2. Duties of the officer making the preliminary report:
a. All officers will carry Crime Victim Information Notices.
b. Unless prohibited by either the physical or emotional condition of the crime victim, the officer making the preliminary offense report will deliver a Crime Victim Information Notice to the victim or the victim's next-of- kin.
c. The officer making the preliminary report will note in the report whether a Crime Victim Information Notice was delivered.
3. Duties of the Victim Services Coordinator or Victim Advocate:
a. The Victim Services Coordinator or Victim Advocate will respond to all inquiries about the Crime Victim Compensation Act from victims of community referrals.
i. The name, address, and any other pertinent information of all persons requesting crime victim assistance will be maintained in a permanent record.
ii. All requests for crime victim assistance will be reviewed by the Victim Services Coordinator or Victim Advocate. When the request meets the basic qualifications, a Crime Victim Compensation Application will be provided along with assistance to apply. A permanent record will be made to reflect whether a Crime Victim Compensation Application was provided and assistance and services provided will be documented.
b. The Victim Services Coordinator/Liaison and Victim Advocate will respond to all requests from the Attorney General for records associated with a Crime Victim Compensation Application.
c. The Victim Services Coordinator and Victim Advocate will complete all required reports and forward them to the Attorney General.

304.12 Unlisted Telephone Numbers
To obtain telephone subscriber information under non-emergency circumstances, officers will contact the Communications Section for instructions.

304.13 Removing or Blocking a Pay Telephone's Ability to Receive In-Coming Calls
A. Upon determining that a pay telephone is being used to further illegal activities such as prostitutes receiving phone calls from customers or the relay of drug trafficking information, officers may request that the telephone be removed or blocked from receiving in-coming calls.
B. If a pay telephone appears to be the only one available in the area for law abiding citizens to use, blocking incoming calls should be requested rather than removal of the telephone.
C. An officer wishing to remove or block a pay telephone will document the request in a memorandum and send it through the Division Commander to the Communications Section.
D. The Communications Section will make the request that AT&T Telephone Company remove or block the pay telephone.

304.14 Metal Detectors and X-ray Machine Operation
A. No officer, either on-duty or off-duty, will operate or supervise the operation of a magnetometer (metal detector) or x- ray machine to screen persons or packages entering buildings or secured areas unless directed by a Division Commander or working security at the Jack Evans Police Headquarters Building.
B. Officers will not conduct a search of a person or property based solely on the activation of a metal detector or x-ray machine unless directed by a Division Commander or working security at the Jack Evans Police Headquarters Building.
C. Officers may remain nearby while a metal detector or x-ray machine is being operated. Officers may provide assistance if a disturbance occurs or after an authorized operator conducts a search and finds contraband items. Appropriate enforcement action may be taken by officers and will be based upon applicable laws of arrest and/or search and seizure.
D. Notices posted in the Jack Evans Police Headquarters Building, and other locations designated by Division Commanders, will state that people and packages entering secured areas are subject to a search. People entering these secured areas are consenting to a search of their person and their property.

304.15 Assistance for Victims/Witnesses who have been Threatened or Fear Further Victimization
A. The Dallas Police Department will provide appropriate assistance to victims/witnesses who have been threatened or who, in the judgment of the agency, express specific, credible reasons for fearing intimidation or further victimization. As a rule the Dallas Police Department does not provide protection to crime victims/witnesses unless it is solicited from someone whose personal safety is put at risk because of their involvement in a criminal episode, or during the course of an investigation the Dallas Police Department discovers a real or valid threat to the victim or witness. An officer, detective or employee of the police department that either receives a request for protection or feels that protection is needed will draft a memo describing the solicitation for or the facts discovered during the investigation that warrants protection to the Commander of the effected workgroup. The Commander of the effected workgroup will make the determination if protection is warranted.
B. This General Order does not relieve officers from immediately assisting victims and witnesses by providing protection while they collect their belongings or transportation to a safe environment.

304.16 Citizen Contacts Requiring Interpreter
A. During the course of their duties, officers may come into contact with citizens who are unable to speak or otherwise communicate effectively, ie. Foreign language speaker only, a deaf person, a deaf/blind person, etc. These individuals may not recognize or be able to respond to officer’s directions. This may lead the officer to improperly believe that these individuals are uncooperative. When encountering such a citizen, the officer will do the following:
1. Speak clearly and slowly while facing the citizen tactically safe.
2. Attempt to communicate through written means if the person is hearing impaired prior to requesting a sign language interpreter.
3. Utilize hand signals while trying to get the attention of a deaf person at a distance.
4. It is important to clearly identify yourself and explain all processes for blind individuals.
5. Avoid using a family member to translate if possible. Dependent on the type of possible offense, it is preferable to use an officer or independent interpreter, as the family member that is assisting in translating may be a potential suspect. Family members may also be emotionally involved which could lead to an improper interpretation.
6. Contact the dispatcher and request an officer to translate. The dispatcher will attempt to locate an officer that can translate from the division first, and then citywide. If unable to locate an officer, the dispatcher will follow Communications SOP in contacting a translator and advise the officer. For foreign languages, the LANGUAGE LINE may be used to speak with an interpreter by phone. For citizens that are totally hearing and speech impaired (that communicate through sign language), an interpreter will come to the scene if written communication is not effective.
B. An officer will contact a supervisor if advised that no interpreter is available or is uncertain if the circumstances require an interpreter.
C. Document all actions taken to communicate in the offense report. This will enable the investigator to prepare any necessary resources.
D. See G.O. 315.14 Interview and Arrest Procedure for Deaf and Hearing-Impaired Persons.
 
304.17 Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR)
A. Purpose – This policy provides guidelines on the proper use of Automated License Plate Recognition (ALPR) systems. ALPR camera systems, fixed and mobile, scan license plates and immediately compare them to databases for “hits” such as stolen/wanted vehicles. The historical data collected may also be used by officers in the investigation of offenses in attempting to find a vehicle. Operational Technology is the unit responsible for overseeing the ALPR program and related training.
B. Strategy – The City of Dallas Police Department will deploy fixed and mobile automated license plate recognition cameras to identify wanted vehicles and suspects. They will be deployed at intelligence-driven locations throughout the city. Members will abide by the guidelines set forth herein when using ALPR systems.
C. Restrictions – The use of ALPR systems is restricted to public safety-related missions of the Dallas Police Department.
1. ALPR systems and associated equipment and databases are authorized for official public safety purposes. Misuse of this equipment and associated databases, or data, may be subject to sanctions and/or disciplinary actions.
2. ALPR systems and ALPR data are the property of the Dallas Police Department and intended for use in conducting official business.
D. Administration – The Dallas Police Department will designate employees with administrative oversight for the ALPR system deployment and operations that are responsible for:
1. Establishing protocols to preserve and document ALPR reads and “alerts” or “hits” that are acted on in the field or associated with investigations or prosecutions.
2. Establishing protocols to establish and ensure the security and integrity of the data captured, stored, and/or retained by the ALPR system.
3. Ensuring the proper training of personnel approved to operate the ALPR system.
4. Maintaining records of approved ALPR deployments and documenting their results, including appropriate documentation of significant incidents and arrests that are related to ALPR usage.
5. Authorizing any requests for ALPR systems use or data access according to the policies and guidelines of the Dallas Police Department.
6. Designated trained personnel in coordination with the vendor will check equipment on a regular basis to ensure functionality and camera alignment. Any equipment that falls outside expected functionality shall be taken out of service and reported to the vendor for immediate repair.
a. ALPR system repairs, hardware or software, shall be made by authorized vendors.
E. Automated License Plate Recognition System Usage:
1. ALPR operations and access to ALPR collected data shall be for official Dallas Police Department purposes only.
2. Only officers who have been given administrative access in the use and operational protocols of the ALPR systems shall be permitted to use it.
3. Searches into the ALPR database must a have law enforcement reason entered into the database prior to conducting a search in the ALPR database.
a. Examples: Case Number, CAD Number, Offense Type, etc.
4. ALPR Alerts/Hits: Prior to the initiation of the traffic stop officers will:
a. Visually verify that the vehicle plate number matches the plate number run by the ALPR system, including both alphanumeric characters of the license plate and the state of issuance.
b. Verify the current status of the plate through dispatch or MDC query when circumstances allow.
c. Employees must be assigned a City of Dallas work phone to receive Alerts/Hits via SMS text message.
d. Use of personal cell phones, personal computers, or any other electronic device not owned by the City of Dallas or authorized for use by the City of Dallas is strictly prohibited.
5. In each case in which an “alert” or a “hit” is triggered, the user will record the disposition of the “alert” and the “hit” into the ALPR system.
6. Custom Hotlists may be updated manually by entering a specific plate into the ALPR system. Manual entry of a plate into the system may be made by an individual employee or by the Fusion Center and the reason must be documented.
a. Each individual employee that manually enters a Custom Hotlist will be responsible for every entry they make into the ALPR database.
i. Individual employees must review their custom hotlist entries every 14 days to validate if the entry needs to remain or be removed from the database.
ii. A specific description involving the criminal investigation of the vehicle must be added into the custom entry. Examples include but are not limited to: Burglary Investigation, Narcotics Investigation, Robbery Suspect.
b. Custom Hotlists will be reviewed by ALPR administrative personnel and/or Fusion personnel, for validity of hot list entries and duration.
c. Custom Hotlist entries to be shared with the entire Department will require approval from a Fusion Supervisor prior to being created.
i. These entries may include: Wanted Felons, fresh in-the-act offenses, any vehicle involved in a situation that the officer would deem an officer safety issue.
7. Special Details: ALPR use during non-traditional deployments (e.g., special operations or during a criminal investigation) must be approved by the Division Commander of the Intelligence Division.
F. ALPR Data Sharing and Dissemination – ALPR data should be considered “For Official Use Only” and can be shared for legitimate law enforcement purposes:
1. Information sharing amongst agencies will be dictated in accordance with MOUs (memoranda of understanding).
2. All data dissemination outside the Dallas Police Department will be documented in a secondary dissemination log.
G. Retention Policy – Automated License Plate Recognition system data will be retained for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of the read.
1. “Hits” or “Reads” shall be preserved:
a. if it results in enforcement action
b. if it is needed for case filing
c. if it is needed for evidence
2. Preservation of the “hit” or “read” shall be saved to the employees’ Evidence.com account and tagged with the appropriate category for retention.
3. If the employee does not have an Evidence.com account, the employee shall preserve the “hit” or “read” into the case in RMS.

304.18 Deconfliction
A. Deconfliction of planned law enforcement operations will be completed in order to avoid dangerous confrontations with other law enforcement personnel conducting overlapping investigations and to reduce the risk of compromising on- going investigations.
B. Event Deconfliction
1. An event is planned law enforcement action that will occur at a designated place during a defined period of time. Events shall be entered in the Case Explorer deconfliction program by contacting the Dallas Fusion Center. Alternatively, units that have assigned officers who have been trained to use the Case Explorer system will utilize the appropriate officer within their unit. All information entered is considered confidential and law enforcement sensitive. When a conflict arises, both agencies are notified and can decide the extent to which they wish to share case details.
2. The following activities/events shall be entered into the event deconfliction system:
a. The service of search warrants.
b. The service of arrest warrants.
c. The planned arrest of a person immediately after the anticipated delivery or receipt of contraband (buy-busts, reverse sting operations, controlled drug deliveries, etc.).
d. Taking delivery of any contraband from a suspect who is not arrested, pending further investigation (buy- walk).
e. Informant or officer face-to-face meetings with suspects for the purpose of receiving, delivering, or negotiating receipt or delivery of any contraband.
f. Approaching a person at his or her residence and requesting permission to search for any contraband, evidence, or person (knock and talk).
g. Planned surveillance, whether stationary or mobile.
h. Covert activity by officers, or informants acting under the direction of officers, that could initiate a response from citizens or law enforcement who may reasonably believe that a crime is in progress.
i. Fugitive operations (roundups).
j. Any other high-risk or specialized law enforcement activities that would benefit from deconfliction.
3. All operations requiring entry into the deconfliction system shall be submitted as soon as information is available and, whenever possible, at least two hours before the commencement of the event. In no case should an event be initiated without prior deconfliction.
4. Information entered into the deconfliction system shall include:
a. Date and time of planned operation.
b. Type of operation.
c. Location of operation.
d. Available Information about the suspects, including names, dates of birth, vehicle information, and phone numbers.
e. Lead and participating agency names.
f. Name, agency and telephone number of the person initiating the event, as well as a secondary point of contact.
5. If a conflict with another law enforcement activity is identified, Dallas Fusion Center personnel will notify both of the contact persons for the respective events. Each affected law enforcement entity is responsible for resolving the conflict before taking further action. Investigating personnel must refrain from executing any operations until identified conflicts have been resolved.
6. Unresolved operational conflicts will be referred to the involved unit’s supervisor. Any deviation from this procedure shall be considered on a case-by-case basis and approved by a Lieutenant or above.
C. Target Deconfliction
1. A target is the case subject of an investigation and includes persons, addresses, vehicles, phone numbers and e-mail addresses.
2. Any target of an open investigation may be submitted for deconfliction through the Texoma HIDTA Watch Center. The Watch Center is available Monday through Friday from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Officers may email the deconfliction/information request form to watch.center@texomahidta.org.
3. Each arrest warrant entered into RMS by a Detective will be assigned by badge to an officer for apprehension.
4. The assigned officers will maintain a case management linked to the original case number associated to the arrest warrant. The officer assigned to the warrant is responsible for uploading the warrant packet and all other relevant information regarding the apprehension into RMS under the linked case management for Michael Morton compliance.
5. If a warrant is already assigned for apprehension in RMS and a separate officer has relevant information, then it will be discussed with the assigned officer to prevent conflicts.
D. Do not contact the Dallas Fusion Center and the Texoma HIDTA Watch Center for the same Target or Event Deconfliction, as it will create a conflict.


Dallas Police Department General Order

305.00 Non-criminal Special Investigations

Revised 01/30/2007


305.00 NON-CRIMINAL SPECIAL INVESTIGATIONS

305.01 Method of Request
A. All requests for special investigations of a non-criminal nature from personnel outside the Department will be addressed to the Chief of Police and forwarded through the chain-of-command to the Investigations Bureau for action.
B. The request for investigation must be originated by the City Manager, one of the Assistant City Managers, or a Department Director.

305.02 Criteria for an Investigation
A. The appointee, employee, or prospective employee to be investigated must have a position of trust and/or of a highly sensitive nature. A brief explanation of the sensitivity of the position should be included in the request for investigation.
B. The request should be accompanied by the following:
1. A fact sheet or job application containing all available physical and numerical identifiers.
2. A current photograph.
3. A Waiver of Liability Form signed by the individual to be investigated.
C. The results of the completed investigation will be forwarded through the Chief of Police to the originator of the request.

Dallas Police Department General Order

306.00 Operations Outside Dallas City Limits

Revised 01/30/2007


306.00 OPERATIONS OUTSIDE DALLAS CITY LIMITS
A. As a general rule, officers should refrain from involving themselves in Class C matters occurring in other jurisdictions except in cases of a breach of the peace where there is a potential for injury to a citizen. In all cases involving other jurisdictions, whether on or off-duty, officers are expected to respond only to the extent that their ability and preparedness allow, keeping in mind the safety of the citizens and officer. In cases where an officer takes any enforcement action in another jurisdiction, he shall notify the other jurisdiction and a Dallas Police Supervisor, beforehand if possible, or as soon as he can safely do so.
B. Anytime police personnel conduct preplanned operations, including warrants and surveillances, outside the City of Dallas, the involved jurisdiction will be notified of the nature and extent of the operation prior to the operation, unless such notification will jeopardize the safety or integrity of the operation. In such cases, a Division Commander shall be notified and the decision on when to notify the involved jurisdiction will be made. Routine covert vehicle surveillances, where a vehicle is simply being followed through an adjoining jurisdiction do not need to be reported, unless the vehicle stops and some enforcement action is taken in the other jurisdiction.

Dallas Police Department General Order

307.00 Family Violence Prevention

Revised 11/03/2015

307.00 FAMILY VIOLENCE PREVENTION
307.01 Requirements of Officers
A. Officers responding to calls involving family violence are required to protect any victims or potential victims of family violence, without regard to the relationship between the alleged offender and victim.
1. An officer shall arrest a suspect when there is probable cause to believe that the suspect has committed or will commit an act of family violence as defined under the provisions of Section One, Chapter Five, or Section Two, Article 14.03 of the Code of Criminal Procedure.
2. An officer shall make an arrest when there is probable cause to believe that the suspect has committed a violation of a protective order issued under provisions of Sections 3.581, 71.11 or 71.12 of the Family Code.
B. Officers responding to family violence incidents will fully interview the complainant and witnesses and will make a reasonable effort to locate the suspect, if applicable.
C. Officers will leave a Notice to Adult Victims of Family Violence card with adult victims and verbally advise them of their legal rights and remedies and of the availability of shelter or other community services for family violence victims.
D. Officers having reason to believe that an offense involving family violence has occurred will submit an offense report and include the following information:
1. A narrative of the incident.
2. A description of the injuries.
3. An indication of whether family violence has occurred or was alleged.
4. A description of the suspect, when necessary.
5. Witness information.
6. Notations regarding other family violence reports, if the reporting officer has personal knowledge of such reports.
7. In the narrative of the offense/incident report, the officer will note the issuance of the Notice to Adult Victims of Family Violence card and the verbal advisement of available legal remedies.
8. A Domestic Violence Supplement Packet form will be completed by patrol officers when responding to all family violence assaultive offenses (Chapter 22, Texas Penal Code).
9. Complete a Lethality Assessment Survey on all intimate partner offenses in which violence has occurred, regardless of the penalty group.
a. This will be completed in accordance with Roll Call Training Bulletin 2012-49.
b. Intimate Partner is defined as two consenting adults, regardless of their gender, engaged or having engaged in a dating relationship.
E Officers that respond to domestic violence calls involving Police Department employees will do the following:
1. Immediately notify a supervisor to respond to the scene.
2. The patrol supervisor will notify Communications Division who will contact the Domestic Violence Unit on call detective. A Domestic Violence Unit supervisor will respond to the scene.
3. The involved employee’s Chain of Command will defer any offense investigation to the Domestic Violence Unit.
F. Employees, on or off-duty, that become aware of a potential family violence incident involving another employee will immediately notify a supervisor. Supervisors will defer all questions related to a family violence incident to the Domestic Violence Unit.

307.02 Stocking of Notification Cards
Patrol Operations Division stations will secure and maintain an adequate supply of Notice to Adult Victims of Family Violence cards (POL-03484), which will be ordered through the Purchasing Department.

Dallas Police Department General Order

308.00 Protective Orders

Revised 02/17/2017

308.00 PROTECTIVE ORDERS
308.01 Definition
A protective order is issued by a court that finds that family violence has occurred and is likely to occur again in the foreseeable future. It prohibits a party from doing specified acts or requires a party to do specified acts necessary or appropriate to prevent or reduce the likelihood of family violence. The order usually lists the names of persons involved. It also gives the length of time the order will remain in effect. The maximum length is two years.

308.02 Legal Services Section Responsibilities
The Legal Services Section will:
A. Receive the protective orders from the clerk of the District Courts.
B. Enter into the computerized Protective Order File the names of the persons protected by the order, home and business addresses of the persons protected by the order, names of the persons to whom the protective order is directed, and the expiration date of the protective order (either specified or by operation of law).
C. Forward the original protective order to the Youth Operations Unit.

308.03 Youth Operations Unit
The Youth Operations Unit will maintain copies of enforceable protective orders that will be available for review on a 24 hour basis. The Domestic Violence Unit is responsible for filing all cases where there exists probable cause to believe a protective order has been violated.

308.04 Communications Section Responsibilities
The Communications Section will inform the officers dispatched to an address where a valid protective order has been issued of the existence of the order and, if available, give the names of the persons and relationships involved. Officers on the scene of an incident will, if necessary, request the Communications Section check for the existence of protective orders by name of protected person, name of the person to whom the order is directed, home address of the protected person, or business address of the protected person.

308.05 Officer Responsibilities
A. Officers will enforce valid protective orders and temporary ex parte orders that are issued under the provisions of Texas Penal Code 25.07 and Chapter 85, Chapter 86, Chapter 87, and Chapter 88 of the Family Code. Peace Bonds and restraining orders will not be enforced; however an MIR should be completed documenting the violation of the civil order.
B. Officers will accept as valid a certified copy of a protective order, or a copy of a certified protective order that appears to be valid, for enforcement purposes. Officers should presume that the order is valid unless the termination date is past or two year has passed since the date of issuance.
C. Field officers will notify their immediate supervisor when it comes to their attention that a protective order address needs to be removed from the Protective Order File.
D. Patrol Operations Division supervisors will send a memo to the Legal Services Section when they learn that a protective order is no longer in existence at an address.

308.06 Departmental Employees Protected by or Named in a Protective Order
A. All employees will notify their chain of command as soon as they are aware that they are named in a Protective Order or they obtain a Protective Order. The employee will provide a complete copy of the Protective Order to their chain of command.
B. The Division Commander will forward a copy of the protective order to the Youth Services Section (Domestic Violence Unit), which will be responsible for ensuring the order is entered into the protective order computer files and the statewide protective order registry. The Domestic Violence Unit supervisor will also maintain a current list of all employees currently affected by a protective order.
C. These guidelines apply to both ex parte and permanent protective orders issued by any court in any jurisdiction.
D. A sworn employee who is the respondent of a Protective Order, issued under Section 6.504 or Chapter 85, Texas Family Code, or under Article 17.292, Code of Criminal Procedure, or by another jurisdiction as provided by Chapter 88, Texas Family Code, will comply with the following stipulations in order to comply with Federal Law 18 U.S.C. section 922 (g) (8) and 922 (d) (8).
1. The sworn employee will only be armed when on duty or actually working an approved off-duty job. At all other times, the sworn employee’s duty weapon will be secured in their work locker. The weapon will be secured immediately after completing any police department assignment.
2. An exception will be allowed for the employee to travel directly from his/her work place to the location of off-duty employment and to travel directly from off-duty employment to the work place.
3. At no other time may be armed.
4. At any time when the employee is not scheduled to be on duty or not working an off-duty job, a supervisor may check the location of the employee’s weapon for compliance with this order. The affected employee must sign a statement that he/she has read and understands General Order 506.03 (A), search of lockers.

Dallas Police Department General Order

309.00 Dallas Area Hospitals

Revised 02/24/2009


309.00 DALLAS AREA HOSPITALS
309.01 Dallas Area Hospitals
A. The following Dallas Area Hospitals have their own Police Department:
1. Baylor University Medical Center (BUMC) – 3500 Gaston Avenue
a. BUMC Department of Public Safety Administrative office telephone number - (214) 820-2358
b. BUMC Department of Public Safety Emergency telephone number - (214) 820-4444
2. St. Paul Medical Center (SPMC) – 5909 Harry Hines Boulevard
a. SPMC Department of Public Safety Administrative office telephone number - (214) 879-2670
b. SPMC Department of Public Safety Emergency telephone number - (214) 879-2671
3. Methodist Dallas Medical Center (MDMC) – 1441 N. Beckley Avenue
a. MDMC Police Department Administrative office telephone number - (214) 947-8181
b. MDMC Police Department Emergency telephone number - (214) 947-8899
4. Methodist Charleston Medical Center (MCMC) – 3500 W. Wheatland Road
a. MCMC Police Department Administrative office telephone number - (214) 947-7777
b. MCMC Police Department Emergency telephone number - (214) 947-7784
B. The Dallas Police Department and the Dallas Area Hospitals listed in G.O. 309.01A (further referred to as “hospital”) share concurrent jurisdiction in responding to calls for service on hospital property. The following guidelines apply for answering calls on hospital property:
1. As a general rule, Hospital Police Departments mentioned in G.O. 309.01A will respond to all calls for service and have primary jurisdiction in all misdemeanor and felony property crimes, including Robbery and Aggravated Robbery.
2. The Dallas Police Department will respond to all felony-in-progress calls and have primary jurisdiction on all felony crimes against persons (except those noted on 309.01 B.1.). These offenses include but are not limited to: homicide, suicide, unexplained deaths, officer-involved shooting incidents, felony motor vehicle offenses, hostage situations and the criminal attempt of these offenses. The Hospital Police Departments will also respond but will only control the situation, protect the crime scene, render first aid and detain suspects and witnesses until the Dallas Police Department arrives.
3. All E-911 calls received by the Dallas Fire Department Communications Division occurring on hospital properties will be forwarded to the respective hospital. The Dallas Police Department will respond to all Priority I calls, except E-911 hang-ups, received by the DPD dispatcher on all hospital properties. If the caller insists on Dallas Police on any call, one will be dispatched. Dallas Police will not normally respond to Priority III calls on hospital properties.
4. Hospital Police Departments will request assistance on offenses when it determines the expertise of the DPD will help in solving the case. The extent of involvement of DPD personnel will be determined by the DPD Bureau or Division Commander who has offense jurisdiction.
C. Follow-up investigations will generally be handled and completed by the same department (DPD or Hospital Police Department) that handled the initial call for service. General rules for investigation include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Each agency will keep the other informed of the progress of any investigation of an offense occurring on hospital property.
2. The Dallas Police Department will conduct physical evidence investigations of all offenses in its area of responsibility occurring on hospital property. The Dallas Police Department will act only in an advisory capacity, if requested, for investigations conducted by Hospital Police Departments.
D. If notified by Fire Department personnel that a caller requests a Dallas police Officer, Communications Section personnel will notify Hospital Police Departments any time a DPD element is dispatched to hospital property.

Dallas Police Department General Order

310.00 Dallas County Hospital & Community College District

Revised 05/12/2010


310.00 DALLAS COUNTY HOSPITAL DISTRICT (DCHD) AND COMMUNITY COLLEGE DISTRICT
The Dallas County Hospital District (DCHD) Department of Security/Public Safety and Dallas County Community College District (DCCCD) Police Department are fully accredited police departments with authority and rights granted by the State of Texas. These rights include the authority to arrest, answer calls, and investigate offenses on DCHD and DCCCD property. The officers may also issue citations on streets inside and adjacent to DCHD and DCCCD property. The following sections include guidelines and procedures to be followed when answering calls for service on DCHD and DCCCD property. Also included are guidelines for investigation of offenses and lists of various responsibilities for individual divisions.

310.01 Answering Calls For Service and Investigating Offenses on Dallas County Hospital District Property
A. The Dallas Police Department and the DCHD share concurrent jurisdiction in responding to calls for service on DCHD property. The following guidelines for answering calls on DCHD property apply:
1. As a general rule, DCHD will respond to all calls for service and have primary jurisdiction for simple assaults and property crimes, including Robbery and Aggravated Robbery.
2. The Dallas Police Department will respond to all felony-in-progress calls and have primary jurisdiction on all felony crimes against persons. These offenses include, but are not limited to: homicide, suicide, unexplained deaths, sexual assaults, officer-involved shooting incidents, felony motor vehicle offenses, hostage situations and the criminal attempt of these offenses. DCHD will also respond but will only control the situation, protect the crime scene, render first aid, and detain suspects and witnesses until the Dallas Police Department arrives.
3. All E-911 calls received by the Dallas Fire Department that occurred on DCHD properties will be forwarded to DCHD. The Dallas Police Department will respond to all Priority I and crimes against persons calls, except simple assaults on DCHD property. DCHD will handle all E-911 hang-ups on its property.
4. DCHD will request assistance on offenses when it determines the expertise of the Dallas Police Department will help in solving the case. The extent of involvement of Dallas Police Department personnel will be determined by the Dallas Police Department Division Commander who has offense jurisdiction.
5. DCHD will continue to enforce traffic regulations pertinent to their property, and transport any prisoners they arrest to the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center.
B. Follow-up investigations will generally be handled and completed by the same department (DPD or DCHD) that handled the initial call. However, where the interest of the Dallas Police Department and DCHD are best served, the Dallas Police Department will assist DCHD in the execution of search and arrest warrants at the request of DCHD. General rules for investigation include but are not limited to the following:
1. When requested, each agency will keep the other informed of the progress of any investigation of an offense occurring on DCHD property if such action does not compromise the investigation/prosecution.
2. The Dallas Police Department will conduct physical evidence investigations on all offenses in its area of responsibility occurring on DCHD property. The Department will act only in an advisory capacity, if requested, for investigations conducted by DCHD.
C. The Communications Section will notify DCHD whenever a DPD element is dispatched to DCHD property on any type of call except routine report taking and follow-up of off-site incidents.

310.02 Dallas County Community College District – Answering Calls for Service and Investigating Offenses
A. The Dallas County Community College District has four campuses that are within the geographical boundaries of the city of Dallas.
1. Richland College, 12800 Abrams Road, Dallas, TX 75243-2199
2. Mountain View College, 4849 W. Illinois Ave. Dallas, TX 75211
3. El Centro College, 801 Main Street Dallas, TX 75202-3605
4. Eastfield College Extension, 802 S. Buckner Blvd., Dallas, TX 75217
B. The Dallas Police Department and the Richland College Police Department, Mountain View College Police Department and the El Centro College Police Department share concurrent jurisdiction in responding to calls for service on the above listed three Dallas County Community College (DCCCD) properties. The following guidelines apply for answering calls on these DCCCD properties:
1. As a general rule the DCCCD Campus Police Departments will respond to all calls for service and have primary jurisdiction in all misdemeanor and felony crimes.
2. The Dallas Police Department will respond to all 911 calls received by the Dallas Police Department 911 center, but will allow the Campus Police Department to take the lead in all investigations unless otherwise requested by the Chief of the Campus Police. The Dallas Police Department will afford any assistance needed to help the Campus Police Department to safely handle all situations.
3. The Dallas Police Department will respond to request for assistance from the appropriate DCCCD Campus Police Department on offenses when it determines the expertise of the DPD will help in solving the case. The extent of involvement of DPD personnel will be determined by the DPD Bureau or Division Commander who has offense jurisdiction.
4. Each of the independent DCCCD Campus Police Departments have their own phone numbers:
a. Richland College Police Department, 972-238-6911
b. El Centro College Police Department, 214-860-2232
c. Mountain View College Police Department, 214-860-8758
d. Eastfield College Extension (Main DCCCD Dispatch), 972-860-4290
C. Follow-up investigations will generally be handled and completed by the same department (DPD or appropriate DCCD Campus Police Department) that handled the initial call for service. General rules for investigation include, but are not limited to the following:
1. The Dallas Police Department will act only in an advisory capacity, if requested, for investigations conducted by DCCCD Campus Police Department.
2. The Dallas Police Department will update the appropriate DCCCD Police Department regarding any investigation in their jurisdiction when requested to do so by the DCCCD Police Department.
D. If notified by a 911 operator that a caller requests a Dallas police Officer, Communications Section personnel will notify the appropriate DCCCD Campus Police Department any time a DPD element is dispatched to a DCCCD Campus that lies within the geographical boundaries of the City of Dallas. If a DPD element arrives at the scene of a call and determines that the call for service is within a DCCCD Police Departments jurisdiction they will notify the Communications Section and ask them to contact the appropriate DCCCD Police Department.

Dallas Police Department General Order

311.00 Foot Pursuits

Revised 11/08/2018


311.00 FOOT PURSUITS
311.01 Purpose
A. The purpose of this General Order is to provide guidance and serve as a training tool for foot pursuits and establish guidelines for foot pursuits. Foot pursuits are rapidly evolving incidents that occur with little or no warning to the officer. As such, this order is intended as general guidance for officers in determining whether to initiate a foot pursuit and establishes criteria for termination of a foot pursuit. These guidelines are also intended to provide officers tactical considerations to avoid foot pursuits, alternatives to foot pursuits and safety considerations during a foot pursuit.
B. Philosophy - Situations exist that may require officers to pursue a suspect who is evading capture on foot. It is the policy of the Dallas Police Department that the safety of our officers and the public shall be the determining factor for initiating and/or terminating a foot pursuit. Accordingly, the decision to initiate a foot pursuit must be based on the pursuing officer’s belief that the immediate danger to the public created by the failure to apprehend the suspect outweighs the potential risk in pursuing the suspect on foot.

311.02 Definitions
A. Foot Pursuit is defined as an active attempt by an officer to pursue a suspect or potential suspect who is evading detention or arrest by fleeing from the officer on foot.
B. Evading Arrest or Detention (Texas Penal Code § 38.04)(a) A person commits an offense if he intentionally flees from a person he knows is a peace officer attempting lawfully to arrest or detain him.
C. Unprovoked Flight is the physical act of running from or in the presence of a police officer uninitiated by any readily ascertainable reason other than the presence of the police officer.

Differentiating Unprovoked Flight from Evading Detention or Arrest
An officer has the authority to stop any person with or without a warrant when there is reasonable suspicion to believe that the person has committed or is about to commit a criminal offense or the officer has established lawful grounds to detain or arrest the suspect.
A. Terry Stops. The United States Supreme Court has ruled that an officer who has reasonable, articulable suspicion that criminal activity is afoot may conduct a brief, investigatory stop, Terry v. Ohio, 392 US 1 (1968). It is also well settled that officers may detain (but not arrest) a person if they are aware of facts constituting “reasonable suspicion” to believe the person was committing a crime. See Alabama v. White, 496 US 325 (1990).
B. It is important to note that flight alone does not constitute sufficient legal justification to detain or arrest an individual. The Supreme Court, in Illinois v. Wardlow, 529 US 119 (2000), while acknowledging that unprovoked flight is suggestive of wrongdoing, rejected the argument that a detention is always justifiable when a suspect flees upon “seeing a clearly identifiable police officer.” Flight must be accompanied by one or more factors that together provide sufficient justification to support a temporary investigatory stop.

311.03 Preventing Foot Pursuits
A. Based on the inherent dangers associated with foot pursuits, officers shall take precautions when confronting suspects in order to prevent the suspect an opportunity to flee on foot.
B. Officers should take preventative measures when approaching a suspect to reduce the opportunity for flight by the suspect.
C. Utilize the Contact/Cover Principle
1. Tactical positioning by officer during initial contact with suspect to cut off suspect’s escape routes
2. Officers should place suspects in positions of advantage to the officer, example: sitting, kneeling etc.
3. Calm the suspect by tone of voice and choice of words. Talking with suspect keeps their mind focused on what the officer is saying
4. Command presence / officer presence - Take control of the suspect and situation
D. Be aware of suspect’s body language
1. Telegraphing signs they might run
2. Pulling pants up getting ready to run
3. Looking for escape routes

311.04 Initiating Foot Pursuits – Considerations
Although it is an officer’s decision to initiate a stop, it is the suspect or violator who decides to precipitate a foot pursuit by fleeing. If the officer has sufficient legal justification to detain or arrest and the individual flees to evade detention, arrest or escape from custody, an officer’s decision to pursue on foot shall be made with an awareness of the risk to which the officer and others will be exposed.
A. In deciding whether or not to initiate a pursuit, an officer shall consider the following alternatives to foot pursuit:
1. Aerial support
2. Utilizing police vehicle
3. Containment of the area
4. Canine search
5. Saturation of the area with patrol personnel
6. Apprehension at another time and place when the officer knows the identity of the subject or has other information that would likely allow for later apprehension
B. In deciding whether to initiate or continue a foot pursuit, officers should consider the following risk factors:
1. Whether the officer is acting alone
2. Familiarity with the area or an area that is hostile
3. The ability or inability to obtain backup in a timely manner
4 The dangers of pursuing in inclement weather, darkness, or reduced visibility conditions
5 Whether the officer is in adequate physical condition to conduct a foot pursuit
6. Geographic and physical hazards that could endanger the officer

311.05 Initiating Foot Pursuits – Accountability and Responsibility Responsibility of Pursuing Officer(s)
Officers initiating foot pursuits shall be responsible for the foot pursuit unless circumstances dictate otherwise or until relieved by a supervisor. In any situation, an officer must always base the decision to engage in a foot pursuit on known facts, and circumstances that can be articulated by the officer. To engage in a foot pursuit the officer must have a reasonable suspicion that the person has committed or is about to commit a criminal offense. It is important to note that flight alone does not constitute sufficient legal justification to detain or arrest an individual.

Pursuit Procedures
A. One officer shall not attempt to pursue more than one suspect at a time. Attempting to pursue and capture two or more suspects simultaneously creates significant risk to the pursuing officer and should not occur.
B. If two officers engage two or more suspects and the suspects flee in different directions, the two officers shall not separate and should pursue a single suspect.
C. If two or more officers have multiple suspects detained and one suspect flees, an officer shall not pursue the fleeing suspect if that leaves his/her partner or fellow officers in a situation in which the number of detained suspects cannot be safely controlled by the remaining officers.
D. An officer shall not initiate and/or continue a foot pursuit if the officer knowingly loses possession of his/her firearm.
E. An officer should not initiate and/or continue a foot pursuit if the officer loses their ability to communicate with dispatch.
F. Once an officer decides to initiate a pursuit the initiating officer shall:
1. Identify his/her element number over the radio and advise the dispatcher of the foot pursuit
2. Provide location and direction of travel
3. Give description of the suspect and his/her clothing description
4. Advise whether the suspect is armed
5. Advise the dispatcher and responding elements if sight of the suspect is lost and last location
6. Advise the dispatcher if responding elements can reduce to code 1
7. Advise the dispatcher once suspect is taken into custody

Supervisor Responsibilities
A. Upon becoming aware of a foot pursuit, the supervisor shall monitor the pursuit and decide as soon as possible whether the foot pursuit should continue. The supervisor should allow the pursuit to continue if:
1. There is a reasonable belief that the suspect has committed an act that would permit the officers to detain the suspect
2. There is a reasonable belief that the suspect poses an immediate threat to the safety of the public or other police officers
B. The supervisor shall terminate a foot pursuit at any time he or she concludes that the danger to pursuing officers or the public outweighs the necessity for immediate apprehension.
C. The supervisor monitoring the foot pursuit shall command, control, and coordinate the situation as soon as possible, appropriately directing resources to safely apprehend the suspect.
D. The monitoring supervisor shall respond to the culmination point of a pursuit if an arrest is made.
E. The supervisor monitoring and controlling the foot pursuit will be responsible for ensuring a Blue Team entry is completed.

Communications Division Responsibilities
A. Receive, record, and immediately report incoming information from the officer(s) involved in the pursuit to other officers regarding the suspect; and ensure cover officers are immediately assigned.
B. Alert a patrol supervisor from the division of the foot pursuit.
C. Alert the helicopter.

311.06 Discontinuing a Foot Pursuit
An officer shall not continue a pursuit under the following conditions:
A. An officer or a third party is injured during the pursuit and requires immediate assistance, and there are no other police or medical personnel able to render assistance.
B. The suspect flees into buildings, structures, confined spaces, or into wooded or otherwise isolated areas and the officer does not have sufficient backup. In this instance the primary officer shall stand by, radio his or her location, and await the arrival of other officers to establish a perimeter. At this point, the incident may be considered a barricaded person.
C. The pursuing officer loses more than momentary visual contact with the suspect and becomes unsure of the suspect(s) whereabouts or continued direction of travel.
D. The pursuing officer is unsure of his or her own location or direction of travel.
E. Anytime the danger to the pursuing officer(s) or public outweighs the necessity for immediate apprehension of the suspect.

311.07 Training
This General Order is intended to be used as a training tool for officers when they engage in a foot pursuit and as ongoing guidance about the potentially dangerous nature of foot pursuits and as such no discipline will be associated with violations.

311.08 Reporting Requirements for Foot Pursuits
A. The involved officers are required to enter any required offense or arrest reports.
B. If a suspect is captured, involved officers must enter a Response to Resistance report in BlueTeam per General Order 909. “Evading on Foot” will be listed as a “Type of Resistance Citizen Used Against Officer.” “Foot Pursuit” will be attached as “Force Used by Officer Against the Citizen” in addition to any additional resistance and response types used. Involved officers will forward their BlueTeam entry to their supervisor for approval.
C. If a suspect is not captured and no other force has been used by any involved officer, a single Response to Resistance entry will be made in BlueTeam by the officer completing the Evading Detention/Arrest offense report to document the incident. “Evading on Foot” will be listed as a “Type of Resistance Citizen Used Against Officer.” “Foot Pursuit” will be attached to every officer involved as “Force Used by Officer Against the Citizen.” The completed entry will be forwarded to the supervisor of the officer completing the single BlueTeam incident report.
D. Supervisors will be responsible for ensuring the appropriate BlueTeam entry is completed for any related offense/arrest reports and forwarded through the chain of command. Response to Resistance reporting and approval guidelines in General Order 909 will be followed.

Dallas Police Department General Order

312.00 Dallas Area Rapid Transit (DART)

Revised 01/16/2024


312.00 DALLAS AREA RAPID TRANSIT - ANSWERING CALLS FOR SERVICE AND INVESTIGATING OFFENSES
A. The Dallas Police Department and the Dallas Area Rapid Transit Police Department (DART) share concurrent jurisdiction in responding to calls for service on DART property. The following guidelines apply for answering calls on DART property:
1. As a general rule, DART Police will respond to all calls for service and have primary jurisdiction in all misdemeanor and felony crimes.
2. DART Police can request assistance on offenses when it determines the expertise of the DPD will help in solving the case. The extent of involvement of DPD personnel will be determined by the DPD Bureau or Division Commander who has offense jurisdiction.
3. The DART Police Headquarters is located at 2111 S. Corinth St. Road Dallas, TX 75203, Emergency Only Number 214-928-6300 and the Non-Emergency number is 214-749-5900.
B. Follow-up investigations will generally be handled and completed by the same department (DPD or DART) that handled the initial call for service. General rules for investigation include, but are not limited to the following:
1. The Dallas Police Department will update the DART Police Department on any investigation, where the offense occurred on DART property, when requested to do so.
2. The Department will act only in an advisory capacity, if requested, for investigations conducted by DART Police Department.
C. If notified by a 911 operator that a caller requests a Dallas Police Officer, Communications Section personnel will notify the Dart Police Department any time a DPD element is dispatched to a DART location that lies within the geographical boundaries of the City of Dallas. If a DPD element arrives at the scene of a call and determines that the call for service is at a DART location or within the DART Police Departments jurisdiction they will notify the Communications Section and ask them to contact the DART Police Department.

Dallas Police Department General Order

313.00 Arrest Policies - Adults

Revised 10/04/2024

313.00 ARREST POLICIES (ADULTS)
313.01 Responsibility at the Scene of Police Incidents
A. The senior officer or ranking supervisor at the scene of any police incident will be responsible for the proper disposition of that incident.
B. The senior officer or ranking supervisor will remain at the scene until such time as the incident is under control until the incident is being properly handled in accordance with existing policies until sufficient instruction has been issued to result in the proper disposition of that incident, or until relieved.
C. Exceptions to this policy are listed in General Order sections 600.00 thru 620.00.

313.02 Authority to Arrest
A. Arrests will be made in the following instances:
1. When a warrant of arrest has been issued by a magistrate or court of law.
2. When arrest without a warrant is authorized under the laws of the United States, laws of the State of Texas, or the ordinances of the City of Dallas.
3. The arrest does not conflict with Dallas Police Department General Orders or Standard Operating Procedures.
B. Discretion should be used, however, when the warrant of arrest is for a Class C Misdemeanor and extreme hardship or inconvenience may result from an immediate arrest. In most instances, the arresting officer may issue the offender a Failure to Appear citation under the ALTAR Program (General Order Section 303.00) in lieu of making a full custody arrest. Additionally, the person should be advised of the warrant and the procedures for posting bond or paying the fine.

313.03 Misdemeanor Citations
A. Generally, the misdemeanor citation will be used in every case of violations of the traffic code or non-traffic City Ordinances wherein the officer is authorized to release the person charged on the individual's own recognizance at the scene of the arrest.
B. A prisoner arrested for a Class C Misdemeanor only who requires medical treatment will be taken directly to Parkland Memorial Hospital. The prisoner will be issued a citation (traffic or non-traffic), and/or any necessary offense/incident report will be prepared. No prisoner under these circumstances will be booked into jail unless an unusual situation exists and with supervisory approval. The arresting officer must include in the Arrest Report the justification for placing the person in jail.
C. The Class C misdemeanor citation may also be used in any other instance of charging an individual with a violation of a non-traffic City Ordinance as currently authorized by accepted procedures or as may be authorized in the future. These violations include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Unauthorized collection of trash.
2. Fireworks violations.
3. Anti-litter ordinance.
4. Animals running at large.
5. Advertising by holding show cards on public property.
6. Loud speaker violations.
7. Abandonment of refrigerators.
8. Sleeping in public places.
9. Operating motor vehicles in an unauthorized area of public parks.
10. Disorderly conduct.
11. Class C Misdemeanor Theft.
12. Class C Misdemeanor Theft, when the suspect obtained the property by issuing/passing a check.
13. Class C Misdemeanor Theft of Service.
14. Reckless Damage or Destruction.
15. Class C Misdemeanor Criminal Mischief.
D. In lieu of a jail arrest, officers may issue a non-traffic citation for Municipal Court to the suspect in the above offenses after:
1. Establishing positive identification.
2. Checking the suspect for outstanding warrants (in all cases) and prior arrests (in the case of all thefts).
E. When a citation is issued for M/C Theft, Theft of Service, or Reckless Damage (or Destruction), the below information must be entered on the back of the citation in the area provided for non-traffic violation information. The same elements must be provided in an Arrest Report if a custody arrest is affected:
1. Name, address, and phone number of the complainant. If the complainant is a business concern, the name, address, and phone number of the business.
2. Name, address, and phone number of the person in charge of the property if the complainant is a business concern. This person can be any of the following: the store manager, the department manager, or the buyer for the store.
3. Name, address, and phone number of the witness to the offense. (In most cases this will be the store security guard).
4. Complete description of the property taken or damaged.
5. Value of the property taken or damaged.
F. When issuing citations for Disorderly Conduct or Class C Family Violence to persons licensed to carry a handgun, officers will include the handgun license number on the back of the citation in the area provided for non-traffic violation information.

313.04 Citations Requiring Special Handling
A. Purpose
1. In order to maintain the integrity of the Department, it is important that all individuals who are issued citations are made aware of the citation’s existence. In addition, the Department must be able to ensure any citation issued without the acknowledgment of the recipient is within Departmental policies and procedures.
2. The purpose of this general order is to establish guidelines for issuing either traffic or non-traffic citations when the individual is unable or refuses to sign the citation. This order also establishes a procedure for the capture and periodic review of citations issued without an acknowledgment.
B. General Guidelines
1. In all cases when the individual receiving a citation is present and has the capacity to acknowledge receipt, officers will request the individual to sign the acknowledgment section on the citation.
2. Traffic and non-traffic citations, except for speeding violations, should not be issued to individuals who are placed in Lew Sterrett Justice Center. Instead, these charges will normally be added to the arrest report. Officers are authorized to count each traffic charge on their daily activity in these circumstances. Exceptions may be made with prior field supervision approval. The issuing officer will record the supervisor’s name and badge number in the “Notes” section on the back of the citation.
3. Individuals who are arrested for outstanding warrants and transported to another detention facility may be issued traffic and non-traffic citations with field supervisor approval. The issuing officer will record the supervisor’s name and badge number in the “Notes” section on the back of the citation.
4. Officers must notify an on-duty supervisor as soon as possible after issuing a citation where the individual refused to sign the citation or is unable to sign the citation due to physical or mental condition. In all cases, this notification must be made prior to the end of the issuing officer’s shift. The issuing officer will record the supervisor’s name and badge number in the “Notes” section on the back of the citation. Officers must receive supervisory approval before issuing a “Filed at Large” citation.
C. Individual Refuses to Sign Citation
1. Traffic Citations
a. Individuals who can be positively identified at the scene and refuse to sign the acknowledgment section of the citation may be issued the citation(s) without his or her signature. Officers will print “REFUSED” in the acknowledgment section of the citations and along the top of the citation. An arrest may be authorized in this circumstance as outlined in General Order 302.01D.
b. Individuals whose identity cannot be positively identified at the scene and refuse to sign the acknowledgment section of the citation may be arrested as authorized by General Order 302.01C.
2. Non-Traffic Citations M/C
a. Individuals whose identity can be positively determined at the scene and refuse to sign the acknowledgment section of the citation may be issued the citation(s) without his or her signature. Officers will print “REFUSED” in the acknowledgment section of the citations and along the top of the citation. An arrest may be authorized by an on-duty supervisor in this circumstance in lieu of a citation being issued.
b. Individuals, who cannot be positively identified, regardless of their willingness to sign the acknowledgment section, will be handled as outlined in General Order 313.03.
D. Individual Unable to Sign M/C Citation
1. Citations may be issued to individuals who are unable to sign the acknowledgment section of the citation due to medical reasons or intoxication and are not taken into a full custodial arrest.
2. The individual’s copies of the citation will be placed with his/her personal property. Officers will document the following information in the “Notes” section of the citation:
a. The location the individual was released such as Parkland Hospital or the violator’s home. Exact addresses should be used when the location is not a commonly known public facility.
b. The name or identifier of the person or group to whom the individual was released. Example entries are DFD717, Parkland Emergency Room Staff, or the name of the individual taking responsibility for the violator.
c. The location where copies of the citations were placed.
3. Officers will print “RELEASED TO APPEAR” in the acknowledgment section of the citations and along the top of the citation.
E. M/C Citations Issued to Individuals No Longer at the Location
1. “Filed At Large” citations can only be issued under the following circumstances:
a. The violator is no longer at the location.
b. The name, race, sex, date of birth, and home address of the violator is known by the issuing officer.
c. The approximate time and location of the offense is known.
d. The violation is a class C misdemeanor and no other charges with a higher penalty classification are being filed.
2. Officers will print “FILED AT LARGE” in the acknowledgment section of the citations and along the top of the citation.
3. “Filed At Large” citations will not be issued when the violator has no home address.
4. Officers must notify an on-duty supervisor prior to issuing a “Filed At Large” citation. The issuing officer will record the approving supervisor’s name and badge number in the “Notes” section on the back of the citation.
5. A citation issued for a Handicapped Parking Violation will not require the violator’s race, sex, and date of birth when the violator is not present at the location. Officers will list the registered owner’s name and address in the operator’s section of the citation and place two copies of the citation and instruction sheet on the vehicle.
F. Reporting Requirements
1. Each division will maintain a database of all citations issued without a violator’s signature. The database will contain the following information:
a. Name and badge number of issuing officer.
b. Name and badge number of approving field supervisor.
c. Race, sex, and date of birth of violator.
d. Citation number.
e. Date and Time of Issuance.
f. Charge on the citation.
g. Location of offense.
h. Justification in acknowledgment section – “Refused”, “Released to Appear” or “Filed at Large.”
2. All citations without a violator’s signature will be reviewed by an administrative supervisor to confirm they are complete and were approved by a field supervisor. The reviewing supervisor will initial the lower left corner of these citations after review. The administrative supervisor will ensure each of these citations is entered into the division database.
3. A copy of each citation will be made and forwarded to the issuing officer’s direct supervisor. The officer’s supervisor will review related offenses, arrest, or other reports to ensure all information is consistent with the charges filed.
4. Field supervisors are responsible for reviewing their assigned personnel in the divisional citation database on a monthly basis to identify trends or indications of possible abuse. Supervisors will notify the division commander by memo if any trends or possible abuse are identified.
5. The Division Commander will provide a monthly report to the Bureau Commander on all “Filed At Large” citations. This report is not required for divisions who are not assigned field operations.

313.05 Marijuana Possession
To reduce the burden on police resources and to lessen the impact of arresting individuals for low-level amounts of marijuana, the following procedures will be followed for individuals found to be in possession of misdemeanor A or B amounts of marijuana. These procedures do not decriminalize marijuana, nor do they alter the penalties for possession of a controlled substance.
A. Misdemeanor B amounts of marijuana (less than 2 ounces):
1. If one of the following circumstances is met, the officer shall make a custodial arrest for the corresponding possession of marijuana charge:
a. The circumstances of the possession are indicative of marijuana distribution. Such as:
Multiple small individual baggies packed for resale
Presence of digital scales, packs of empty baggies
Officer observed hand-to-hand drug transactions
The offender was involved in a drug-related call or Narcotics Division investigation
b. The offender possesses marijuana in conjunction with a weapon.
c. The offender has a companion charge for a crime against person offense.
d. The officer can document an articulable reason for a custodial arrest and obtains approval from a supervisor.
2. If one of the following circumstances below is met, the officer shall NOT immediately arrest or charge the offender for possession of marijuana and instead shall complete a ‘preliminary investigation’ report:
a. Circumstances of the possession do not indicate distribution (as outlined above).
b. The only companion charge(s) is a warrant hold.
c. The offender has a companion felony drug charge.
3. It is not necessary to field test marijuana that will be part of a preliminary investigation. All marijuana evidence will be packaged and transported in accordance with G.O. 321.04. Under no circumstances shall seized marijuana be destroyed at the scene.
B. Misdemeanor A amounts of marijuana (more than 2 ounces but less than 4 ounces):
1. If an offender possesses a misdemeanor A amount of marijuana, officers will utilize the Cite and Release program if the offender meets the requirements. If the offender does not meet the requirements, officers shall make a custodial arrest for the corresponding possession charge. Cite and Release is a program allowing an officer to issue an Acknowledgement & Acceptance Form (citation) for the misdemeanor possession of marijuana in lieu of a full custodial arrest. All officers will utilize the Cite & Release process for those who meet the eligibility requirements unless the officer can document an articulable reason for custodial arrest and obtains approval from a supervisor.
2. Requirements
a. The offense must be the possession of marijuana (misdemeanor A or B).
b. The offense must occur in Dallas County.
c. The offender must reside in Dallas County.
d. The offender must be in possession of a valid driver’s license or identification card issued by the State of Texas.
e. The offender must be 17 years of age or older.
f. Possession of marijuana must be the only offense in which the offender is subject to arrest with the following exceptions:
Companion Class C offenses DO NOT disqualify an individual from Cite and Release. This includes all Class C offenses except breaches of the peace (e.g., Public intoxication where the individual is a danger to themselves or others.) Multiple traffic offenses (i.e., “Jail Traffic”) will NOT disqualify a person from Cite and Release. If you wish to charge the individual with traffic offenses, issue a citation.
g. Offenses occurring in Drug-Free Zones are not eligible for Cite and Release.
3. Officer Responsibilities:
a. Seize suspected marijuana.
b. Request a supervisor to the scene to field test and obtain the preliminary weight of suspected marijuana. The marijuana must weigh more than two (2) ounces but less than four (4) ounces.
c. Complete an Acknowledgement & Acceptance Form.
d. Obtain thumbprints from the offender.
e. Contact Detention Services to obtain a Cite & Release warrant number and write the number on the
f. Acknowledgement & Acceptance Form (citation).
g. Issue the offender a court date (3rd Wednesday of the month set two months in advance) and release the offender to appear.
h. Transport the marijuana evidence in accordance with G.O. 321.04.
i. Complete the offense report.
j. Contact a Detention Services supervisor to review and approve the offense report.
4. Supervisor Responsibilities:
a. Report as requested to the officer’s location.
b. Ensure all requirements for the cite and release program are met.
c. Field test and weigh suspected marijuana.
d. Ensure the Acknowledgement & Acceptance Form has been completed.
e. Ensure the officer has obtained thumbprints from the offender and issued the correct court date.

313.06 Public Inebriate Program
A. General Information
1. The facility is located at 1600 Chestnut.
2. Prisoners will be received on a 24-hour basis.
3. Prisoners will be held a minimum of four hours before any type of release is allowed.
4. Checks will be made on all prisoners that are to be taken to the Public Inebriate Detention Center (PIDC). The check may be made over the radio if necessary.
B. Admission Policy - The processing of persons at PIDC will be in accordance with the procedures established by the City Marshal’s Office and approved by the Chief of Police. These procedures will be posted at the Center and available for reference. Any questions will be referred to an on-duty Patrol supervisor.
C. When an arrest is rejected by a PIDC supervisor, a police supervisor from the arresting officer's division will be notified. The police supervisor will determine what should be done with the arrested person (i.e., released to a relative, mental evaluation) and the facts documented in an offense/incident report.

313.07 Drug Evaluation and Classification Process
A. Only officers with current Drug Recognition Expert (D.R.E.) certification will conduct D.R.E. post-arrest evaluations on suspects.
B. All D.R.E. evaluations will be conducted according to the current Drug Evaluation and Classification S.O.P., which will be available for review at the jail.
C. D.R.E. officers may be requested to conduct drug evaluations at Lew Sterrett. Drug evaluations may be conducted at other bureaus throughout the department if the D.R.E. approves of the testing area.
D. In general, a drug evaluation will not be conducted on suspects with a breath alcohol concentration of 0.08 or above or when blood tests are given, and alcohol is the only suspected cause of impairment.
E. A D.R.E. officer may request a urine specimen from a suspect who has been evaluated, in addition to any other specimen which would be prudent to request, depending on the crime. All Dallas police officers may request a urine specimen, in addition to a blood specimen in D.W.I. cases, when no D.R.E. evaluation is performed, and the officer believes the impairment is caused by substances other than alcohol.

313.08 Stake-outs and High-Risk Apprehension Operations
A. Definitions
1. Stake-out: an operation in which officers assume concealed or covert positions in anticipation of a criminal act for the purpose of apprehending the persons involved.
2. Surveillance: the continuous observation of persons, places, and things for the purpose of gathering information.
3. High-Risk Apprehension: any planned arrest in which there is good reason to believe that the person to be arrested may be armed and intent upon resistance.
B. Objectives
1. To apprehend the suspect with a minimum risk to persons and property.
2. To obtain information concerning the activities and identities of individuals.
3. To protect any informant who may be involved.
C. Procedures
1. All surveillance, stakeouts, and high-risk apprehensions must have the prior approval of a supervisor and be entered into Case Explorer in accordance with section 304.18.
2. The supervisor in charge will develop a plan for the operation. This plan will include but not be restricted to the following:
a. Staffing with sufficient personnel to ensure the safety of all persons involved and successful completion of the objective.
b. Briefing of all personnel as to the objectives, and fully informing them of the nature of their assignment and their individual responsibilities.
c. Ensuring that all personnel are familiar with any specialized equipment to be used.
d. Ensuring, when necessary, that all personnel have distinctive and/or protective clothing available if an arrest/confrontation is necessary.
e. Arranging for uniformed police officers to be available if an arrest or pursuit is anticipated.
f. Providing for adequate communication capabilities for all units and personnel involved.
g. Providing relief for personnel if the operation is prolonged.
h. Remaining aware of and providing for the safety of all persons involved.
3. Unless there is a clear possibility of compromising the operation, the following organizations will be notified:
a. Communications Section.
b. Patrol Operations Division where the operation is to take place.
c. Any other departmental unit which may be involved/affected by the operation.
4. This notification should include the nature of the operation, number of personnel involved, supervisor in charge, vehicles involved (if possible), the dress of officers involved, and any other information necessary for the safety of the officers involved and any other officers who may respond as back-up in an emergency situation.
D. Requests for SWAT Assistance during Stake-Out and High-Risk Apprehension of Suspects
1. Officers receiving information that a violent crime is likely to occur will notify their supervisor who will notify the SWAT Unit.
2. Examples of the types of offense situations to which the SWAT Unit will respond and have primary command responsibility are armed robbery, hostage situations, barricaded persons, kidnapping, or any other violent crime involving an armed suspect. Routine stakeouts, surveillance, drug raids, and Fugitive Squad apprehensions, for example, do not require that the SWAT Unit be called.
3. Any supervisor may request the presence of SWAT Unit personnel in situations other than the extreme instances of D.2. Supervisors may request assistance in conducting routine stakeouts and surveillance. In these instances, the requesting bureau/ division/section will retain command responsibility.
4. Consideration of such factors as the type of information, the time element involved, risk of persons involved, anticipated length of operation, etc., will be made by the requesting supervisor to determine if a situation warrants requesting SWAT Unit assistance.
E. Procedure
1. If the SWAT Unit is needed, a SWAT supervisor will be notified.
2. When the SWAT Unit responds to a request, it will be the responsibility of the SWAT Unit to coordinate the efforts of the operation.
a. The requesting division will be in charge of the scene until the SWAT Unit arrives.
b. Upon their arrival, SWAT Unit personnel will take charge of the scene, except in those instances in D.3 where command responsibility remains with the requesting unit.
3. Informants
a. Sole responsibility for dealing with any informants involved rests with the requesting unit personnel who originally developed the information.
b. SWAT Unit personnel will be provided information about informants only on a need-to-know basis. The identity of an informant does not necessarily have to be revealed.
F. Where applicable these procedures will be incorporated into division Standard Operating Procedures, along with any additional special considerations unique to a particular division.

313.09 Felony Arrest Warrant Service
This General Order does not apply to misdemeanor arrest warrants, but these procedures may be used at the discretion of the supervisor in charge. This General Order does not preclude any officer or detective from knocking on a door and attempting to arrest a wanted person, however, should the wanted person not voluntarily come to the door and surrender, officers/detectives will not enter the location in order to search for the suspect without following the procedures
specified in this general order.
A. Definitions
1. Felony Arrest Warrant Service: a planned execution of a felony arrest warrant in which officers intend to enter a location and search for a suspect.
2. Arrest Warrant Service Class: the Dallas Police Department’s arrest warrant service training program.
B. Objective
1. Apprehend the suspect with minimum risk to officers, suspects, and citizens.
C. Procedures and Requirements
1. Confirm all arrest warrants before attempting service.
2. A planning session, conducted by a warrant-trained supervisor, will be conducted before any warrant is served. All personnel serving the warrant will attend the planning session. This may take place in the field if necessary.
3. Handheld police radios must be carried by all personnel participating in the warrant execution. The supervisor will ensure that all personnel have their radio set to the designated operating channel.
4. The controlling supervisor will ensure a deconfliction is completed through the Fusion Center in accordance with General Order 304.18. A deconfliction is an intelligence-sharing system that promotes the highest level of public safety and to prevent law enforcement officers from confronting blue – on – blue situations in the field.
5. The Communications Services Group and the affected Patrol Division will be notified prior to the execution of the warrant.
6. All personnel will wear body armor.
7. All personnel will wear clothing which clearly identifies them as Dallas Police officers. This includes the Dallas Police uniform as well as identification jackets or vests issued by the Department. The vests and/or jackets must have the badge or the badge insignia and “Dallas Police” markings.
8. Officers will use available means (including, but not limited to: surveillance, telephone calls, or credible information from Confidential Informants or witnesses as defined in Narcotics SOP) to confirm that the suspect is at a location before attempting to execute an arrest warrant, but a lack of such information will not preclude an attempt to serve a warrant.
9. Personnel requirements: A minimum of 6 (six) officers will be required to serve a felony warrant. This includes a trained supervisor, a trained three officer search team, and two perimeter officers. Perimeter officers do not have to be warrant trained, but must attend the planning session.
10. Calls for service regarding a wanted person at a location require that the above procedures be followed, unless the wanted person is at another government facility such as a parole office, etc.
D. Third Party Residence
1. If the arrest warrant for the felony suspect is taking place at the residence of a third party, then officers must obtain a search warrant in order to enter the location.
2. The search warrant requirement may be waived if:
a. Exigent circumstance exist (i.e. hot pursuit, screams for help, etc).
b. Written consent to search is given by a third party who has standing to give such consent.
c. The officers can articulate facts and circumstances that give rise to the belief that the suspect actually resides in the residence owned by a third party.
E. Forced Entry
1. Definition: Any entry into a residence without the consent of the owner or legal representative, regardless of whether physical force is used.
2. Forced entry is allowed when serving a felony arrest warrant.
3. Forced entry is not allowed when serving a misdemeanor arrest warrant.
4. A search warrant is not required to execute a forced entry at the current residence of the wanted person, however; officers and the controlling supervisor must be able to articulate reasonable grounds to believe that:
a. The address is the residence of the wanted person.
b. The wanted person is actually inside the residence at the time.
5. The use of forced entry will be at the discretion of the controlling supervisor.
6. Mechanical breaching equipment is authorized. This equipment reduces the risk of injury to officers and should be utilized at the discretion of the controlling supervisor.
7. Officers will only use handheld rams and pry bars for forced entry. Officers will not use vehicles to pull/push open doors or bars unless they are assigned to SWAT.
8. Diversions, such as breaking windows, etc. are authorized. These tactics reduce the risk of injury to officers and should be utilized at the discretion of the controlling supervisor.
9. Forced entry will not be authorized at locations where drug sales routinely occur, whether fortified or not, unless assigned to SWAT.
10. No officers may use explosive or incendiary diversion devices such as “flash bangs”, or any type of explosive entry, unless assigned to SWAT or the Tactical Investigations Group.
F. SWAT Requirement
1. The felony arrest warrant should be considered a high risk apprehension and deferred to the SWAT Unit (as noted in General Order 313.08), if credible intelligence indicates any of the following are present:
a. Fortified location: Fortified is defined as preparing a location in a manner to impede the entry of police. Examples include, but are not limited to, door blocks or stops, burglar bar cages (both exterior and interior), surveillance cameras, or a combination of any such items. Burglar bars alone do not constitute a fortified location.
b. Automatic weapons, explosives, or booby traps.
c. Body armor was worn during the commission of the original offense.
d. The suspect or others at the location are actively taking measures to violently resist or repel any law enforcement effort to arrest.
G. Outside Agency/ Jurisdiction Considerations
1. Officers may execute Dallas PD arrest warrants in other jurisdictions.
2. The arrest warrant must have been issued for a Dallas PD offense or the wanted person may be a suspect in an unrelated Dallas PD offense.
3. Officers will notify the law enforcement agency having jurisdiction before serving a warrant outside of the city limits of Dallas, unless this would compromise the safety and integrity of the warrant service.
4. Officers may execute arrest warrants for other agencies within the city limits of Dallas.
5. Entry teams will be comprised of Dallas officers ONLY. Outside agencies’ officers will be allowed to perform perimeter duties if they have attended the warrant briefing. Dallas officers may perform perimeter duties for other agencies entry teams, if those agencies choose to execute the arrest warrant. Everyone that will participate in the warrant execution (entry, perimeter) must attend the briefing.
H. Exceptions
1. The planned arrest execution takes place during a vehicle stop. If this tactic is used, Officers should perform a felony stop.
2. When the wanted person is located in a public place.
3. When a wanted person voluntarily surrenders.
4. Prisoner transfers.
I. Ongoing training
1. All officers and supervisors that complete the Felony Arrest Warrant class will be required to participate in and pass semi-annual training. One remedial training session will be allowed if an officer or supervisor is unable to complete this training at an acceptable level.
2. Any officer, senior corporal, or supervisor that is unable to satisfactorily complete the Felony Arrest Warrant class or the semi-annual training will not be authorized to serve felony arrest warrants, and may be removed from any position where warrant service is an integral part of that Unit’s function at the discretion of his/her Chain of Command
J. Search Warrants
1. The 4th Amendment prohibits unreasonable searches. The Supreme Court has stated a warrantless search is an unreasonable search unless it meets the criteria of a recognized exception to the search warrant requirement. Therefore, officers should operate under the presumption a search warrant is needed. In the event officers determine a search warrant is required, officers will contact a detective for assistance in obtaining a warrant and in the execution of the warrant.
2. Officers should reference Patrol SOP 804 Warrantless Searches for questions regarding an exception to the search warrant requirement.
K. Types of warrant entries
1. Dynamic Entry
a. Dynamic Entry is the rapid entry into a structure to limit occupant movements and prevent the destruction of evidence, where speed, surprise and domination is the objective. Executing officers must have a reasonable suspicion that knocking and announcing their presence, under the particular circumstances, would be dangerous or futile or that it would inhibit the effective investigation of the crime.
b. As a general policy, the Dallas Police Department will not execute dynamic entry search warrants in the following instances: early in the morning (before daylight) or late at night, when serving misdemeanor warrants, if there is evidence of children present inside the location, or at locations housing suspects who are considered low level offenders where the propensity for violence and anticipated resistance is minimal. Dynamic search warrants will only be executed by the SWAT Unit. There may be instances where dynamic entry must be utilized, including hostage rescue operations, exigent circumstances that require immediate entry be made to prioritize the safety of innocent parties inside a location, or when it has been deemed the safest and most tactically effective way to handle the situation, based upon suspect/offense and location analysis.
c. Pre-operational surveillance will be conducted on the target location, in an attempt to identify any potential hazards that may exist, including the presence of children, elderly or disabled individuals, safety of surrounding residents or third parties, or any other factor that would necessitate conducting the operation in a different manner. This will also ensure the target location is visually identified prior to warrant service, thus reducing the risk of executing the warrant at the wrong location.
d. Based upon the target analysis and the totality of the location and suspect factors identified, SWAT will make the determination if the warrant will be executed dynamically.
e. On each warrant request, SWAT will complete a Warrant Execution Form and a Review for Dynamic Warrant Service Form. The SWAT Commander will make the tactical consideration for service of the warrant
and obtain final approval from the Deputy Chief over the Tactical Operations Group.
2. Deliberate Entry, Breach and Hold and Call Out
a. Can be accomplished through setting a perimeter, knocking and announcing, breaching and holding at the entry point, and calling out the suspect(s) from the entry point, or effecting entry.
b. Deliberate entry into a structure where the pace at which the clearing operation conducted is reduced significantly.
c. The basic concept is that the search is slower, and the structure can be partially cleared from the outside.
d. If entry is made, ballistic shields can be utilized to minimize risk to entry personnel.
3. Surround and Call Out
a. The overall objective is to set a perimeter and call out the suspect(s) from the structure, then effect the arrest.
b. The use of a “loud hailer” or LRAD should be utilized to notify occupants to safely exit the structure.
c. The escalation of tactics may become necessary if suspect(s) are non-compliant or officers receive no response.
d. Entry may be necessary to clear the location and locate the suspect(s).
e. If children, elderly, and/or handicapped persons are believed to be present, ‘Surround and Call Out’ is the only warrant type that will be utilized unless SWAT executes the warrant and received permission from their chain of command.
L. Warrant Threat Assessment Matrix
1. Any Unit authorized to execute felony arrest warrants is also authorized to serve search warrants, with the exception of warrants on locations where narcotics are known to be routinely sold. Warrants on locations where narcotics are known to be routinely sold will only be served by authorized units within the Tactical Investigations Group and SWAT Unit. Factors that require the SWAT Unit to execute an arrest warrant also apply to search warrants. Authorized units within the Tactical Investigations Group and the SWAT Unit will follow their respective unit SOPs in regards to Threat Assessment but no unit SOP will supersede a decision made by the SWAT Unit that a warrant will not be executed based on the threat assessment. If a search warrant requires entry into an occupied or possibly occupied structure and intelligence indicates any of the factors listed below are present, the supervisor will assess whether to notify a SWAT supervisor to determine if the SWAT Unit will execute the warrant:
a. Suspect/Offense Assessment:
1. The offense is for Murder or any violent felony with firearms
2. The suspect(s) is believed to have committed previous violent felony offenses
3. Body armor is believed to be available to the suspect
4. Suspect(s) have police/military training
5. Suspect(s) known to have used or carried firearms during the commission of the offense
6. Threats or offenses made by suspect(s) against officers
7. Aggressive resistance is anticipated
8. Suspect(s) known to possess automatic weapons, scoped firearms, explosives
9. Suspect(s) have two or more previous felony convictions
10. Suspect(s) is on probation/parole
11. Suspect(s) is affiliated with a gang or is a documented gang member
12. Suspect(s) has previous weapons charges
13. Suspect(s) drug/alcohol abuse
14. Suspect(s) has mental health history
15. Suspect(s) has previous felony convictions
b. Should a proposed operation contain any of the “suspect/offense” assessment factors listed as hazards 1- 8, then service by SWAT will be requested. A SWAT supervisor will make the determination if the SWAT Unit will execute the warrant. If after consultation between the SWAT supervisor and the on-scene supervisor, it is determined that SWAT is not needed to execute the warrant, then the requesting unit supervisor may execute the warrant. When assessing a proposed operation, the supervisor shall consider factors such as manpower, personnel capabilities and other hazards such as those listed in 9-15. This assessment applies to operations that are based on officers securing a residence, building, or a structure that will need to be searched to effect the arrest of a suspect(s) and/or secure evidence.
c. Location Assessment:
1. Location is heavily fortified: (i.e. external/internal cages, barnyard blocks, etc.)
2. Rapid entry is required to limit occupant movement or to prevent the destruction of evidence
3. The location is used for the sale of illegal drugs
4. Children, elderly and/or handicapped persons are believed to be present
5. Counter surveillance is present (good-eyes, cameras)
6. Is the amount of planning appropriate for the operation?
7. Geographic barriers: (upstairs apt, location on high ground, limited access)
8. Surrounding area high crime/unfriendly towards police
9. Vicious and/or guard dogs are present
10. Access to the location is restricted: (i.e. fencing, high walls, adjacent structures)
11. Previously considered a hazardous location
12. Size/complexity of the location
13. The day of week and time of day of operation
14. Proximity to a school or daycare
15. Is the intelligence from a credible source
d. Should a proposed operation contain any of the “location” assessment factors listed as hazards 1-4, then service by SWAT will be requested. A SWAT supervisor will make the determination if the SWAT Unit will execute the warrant. If after consultation between the SWAT supervisor and the on-scene supervisor, it is determined that SWAT is not needed to execute the warrant, then the requesting unit supervisor may execute the warrant. The requesting unit cannot execute the warrant if the SWAT supervisor determines that SWAT will not run the warrant due to risk and their own SOP. When assessing a proposed operation, the supervisor shall consider factors such as manpower, personnel capabilities and other hazards such as those listed in 5-15. This assessment applies to operations that are based on officers securing a residence, building, or a structure that will need to be searched to effect the arrest of a suspect(s) and/or secure evidence.
The Threat Assessment Matrix cannot reasonably cover all possibilities and factors relating to the service of warrants. Although the hazards and considerations on the Threat Assessment Matrix may not require SWAT activation, there may be instances where consultation would be appropriate. Nothing in this matrix should dissuade supervisors from soliciting information, advice or guidance from a SWAT supervisor.

313.10 Field Warning Procedure
A. Arresting officers are not required to provide Miranda rights to persons in custody unless they are going to interrogate them. If it becomes necessary to interrogate an arrested subject, the officer must provide the Miranda rights before any questioning occurs.
B. If the subject invokes any of the Miranda rights, the officer will note it in the arrest report and provide specific information on the rights invoked, such as the right to remain silent, right to have an attorney present, etc.
C. Field warnings are not required under the following circumstances:
1. When no questioning or interrogation will occur.
2. During general questioning of persons present at a criminal offense scene, and the investigation has not centered upon the individual as a suspect in the case.
3. Ordinary City Ordinance violations.
4. Class C misdemeanors.
5. Ordinary traffic violations.
D. Arresting officers should refrain from questioning arrested persons in offense incidents where immediate follow-up will be conducted by a detective. In these circumstances, the detective will warn the arrested person of his/her rights at the appropriate time.

313.11 Field Release of Handcuffed Subjects
A. Handcuffed subjects will be field released in the following instances when sworn police personnel determine that:
1. An arrest made (on or off-duty) is erroneous, improper, or otherwise inappropriate prior to book-in at the Jail or Public Inebriate Detention Center (PIDC).
2. A subject who has been handcuffed for officer safety is not going to be arrested and charged with an offense.
3. A subject who has been handcuffed and charged with a Class C Misdemeanor (traffic or non-traffic), but meets the guidelines as described in General Order 313.03, Misdemeanor Citations.
B. The releasing officer will:
1. Field release the subject at the original arrest location or contact site.
2. Document the facts and circumstances necessitating and justifying the release in an M.I.R or related offense report. (MDC-generated or handwritten).
3. List the subject as the complainant on the M.I.R. and include the subject’s telephone number and address.
4. Notify a supervisor and document the notification in the M.I.R.
5. Forward a copy of the M.I.R. through the chain-of-command to his/her Organizational Commander.
C. In situations where more than one individual is detained and released only one M.I.R. needs to be generated. The releasing officer will document the name, address, and telephone number of the additional subjects on the witness pages of the M.I.R. and the facts and circumstances of the incident in the narrative.

313.12 Searching of Prisoners
A. All prisoners will be searched at the time of arrest, or as soon as possible after the arrest, and before being transported.
B. Officers will not perform any strip or body cavity searches of any prisoner. These searches will be conducted at Lew Sterrett Justice Center by a Dallas County deputy or detention officer.
C. Purses, luggage, belt packs, hats, gloves, and coat pockets of female prisoners will be searched by the arresting officer at the time of arrest.
D. Bodily searches of female prisoners will be conducted only by female Dallas Police officers. If a female officer is not available in the arresting officer’s division, the arresting officer will contact Communications to request a female officer from another division or law enforcement agency.
E. Officers transporting prisoners for other officers will search all prisoners before accepting custody. Transporting officers will be present during the search of a female prisoner by a female officer before accepting custody.
F. The transporting officer will be held accountable for any prisoner arriving at any jail, detention or police facility with a weapon or contraband.

313.13 Transportation and Handling of Prisoners
A. General Guidelines for Transporting Prisoners
1. The following definitions apply to this section:
a. Police vehicle: Refers to any city owned vehicle used to transport prisoners.
b. Officer: Refers to any sworn member of the Department.
2. Officers will search their issued police vehicles before beginning their tour of duty. This will include prior to and after transporting prisoners to ensure that the vehicles are free of any weapons and contraband.
3. Motorcycles will not be used for transporting prisoners.
4. Unless otherwise approved by a supervisor, all prisoners will be handcuffed behind their back, palms facing out, and the handcuffs double locked.
5. Prisoners will be secured in their seat with a seat belt.
6. Once the prisoner is secured the officer will immediately disable the vehicle’s door locks and windows by
utilizing the lockout buttons on the driver’s door control panel. Officers will engage the child safety locks on the back doors of the patrol vehicle by using the end of the ignition key and move the plastic key/lock device to engage the child safety locks.
7. The feet of violent or potentially violent prisoners should be secured with flex-cuffs or leg restraints or both if their actions indicate they may pose a threat to the transporting officer or to the police vehicle or equipment.
8. The hog-tie method of maximum restraint will not be used. This method of restraint, which positions the prisoner stomach-side down with hands and feet joined in the back, places the prisoner in a physical position that restricts breathing capability and places the subject at risk for positional asphyxia.
9. Persons arrested by DPD officers or placed in their custody will not be left unsupervised at any time.
10. If an arrested person experiences a medical emergency the officers will immediately request a Dallas Fire Rescue ambulance be called to the scene to evaluate the prisoner prior to being transported to a jail facility. (Emergency means any circumstance that calls for immediate action and in which the element of time in transporting the sick, wounded, or injured for medical treatment is essential to the health or life of the person.)
11. Any prisoner exhibiting symptoms of excited delirium, drug-induced psychosis, or a psychotic episode, whether drug-induced or not, is to be transported to a medical facility by Dallas Fire Rescue personnel via ambulance. The officer remains responsible for prisoner safety and will accompany DFR and the subject in the rear of the ambulance. See General Order Section 905.00 for additional symptoms.
12. Placement of Prisoners in Police Vehicles
a. One Officer Transport - One officer can only transport one prisoner. In police vehicles that are not equipped with a prisoner partition the prisoner will be placed in the front passenger seat. At no time will a prisoner ride alone in the back seat of a police vehicle that does not have a prisoner partition system. In police vehicles equipped with a prisoner partition the prisoner will be positioned in the back right seat. The access panel of the partition between the front and rear seats, if equipped, will be secured and locked.
b. Two Officer Transport - Two officers can transport a maximum of three prisoners. In police vehicles that are not equipped with a prisoner partition the second officer will be seated behind the driver with the prisoner(s) seated according to the following configuration:
i. Prisoner #1 - rear passenger seat.
ii. Prisoner #2 - front passenger seat.
iii. Prisoner #3 - rear passenger seat.
In police vehicles equipped with a prisoner partition up to three prisoners may be transported in the rear seat if all three rear seat belts are accessible. Both officers will ride in the front seats of the police vehicle. The access panel of the partition between the front and rear seats, if equipped, will be secured and locked.
c. If more than three persons are arrested or if there is insufficient room in a police vehicle, an additional police vehicle or a paddy wagon will be used.
13. At the time of departure, transporting officers will:
a. Activate the in-car camera system.
b. Mark out to the destination via the in-car computer system.
c. Furnish the dispatcher with the destination location, number of persons being transported, and the odometer reading.
Upon arrival at their destination, transporting officers will:
a. Confirm their arrival via the in-car computer system and may turn off the in-car camera system.
b. Furnish the dispatcher with the arrival location and odometer reading.
c. Ensure the in-car video has been properly categorized and tagged with the corresponding incident/case number in accordance with Department policy.
14. Transporting officers may be instructed to pick up additional prisoners while en route to the jail. If any of the following are applicable, the officer(s) will notify the dispatcher and will not pick up additional prisoners in the following situations:
a. If the transporting officer is alone.
b. If they are already transporting the maximum allowable prisoners, a female or juvenile, or an unruly prisoner.
15. Officers will not handle another police incident while transporting a prisoner unless it is of such magnitude as to place life or property in jeopardy.
B. Transporting Female Prisoners - In addition to the general guidelines regarding prisoner transport, the following provisions apply for female prisoners:
1. If it can be done safely and if all standard safety measures are observed, a lone female officer may transport one female prisoner. The seating configuration outline in 313.13, A12 must be used.
2. A lone male officer may transport a lone female prisoner if the following measures are observed.
a. The police vehicle used must be equipped with a prisoner partition, and the in-car camera system in the rear passenger area must be activated.
b. The officer must be wearing a functional body worn camera.
c. The female prisoner must be seat belted into the rear passenger seat.
d. The entire transport must be captured on the in-car camera and tagged for retention.
e. If the officer must stop and exit the vehicle before arriving at their destination for any reason, their body worn camera must be activated and the video tagged for retention.
3. Two officers (regardless of their gender) may transport one to three female prisoners. In police vehicles equipped with a prisoner partition both officers will ride in the front seats. The seating configuration outlined in 313.13, A12 must be used.
4. Incidents Involving the Arrests of Both Female and Male Prisoners or Multiple Female Prisoners
a. Female prisoners may be transported with male prisoners only when their arrests result from the same incident. Refer to the seating configuration outlined in 313.13, A12.
b. Use of Paddy Wagon
i. If the paddy wagon is equipped with a solid rear partition, female prisoners may be transported in the rear of the paddy wagon. At no time will female and male prisoners be transported sharing the same partitioned section.
ii. If the paddy wagon is not equipped with a solid rear partition but is driven by a female, one female prisoner may be transported in the front seat. If the driver is a male or if there are multiple female prisoners, an additional paddy wagon or police vehicle will be used.
C. Transporting Juvenile Prisoners - Additional restrictions apply for juvenile prisoner transport. (Refer to General Order Section 314.16)
D Procedure for Handling Escape of Detainee/Prisoner during Transportation
1. Notify the dispatcher of current location.
2. Broadcast a description of the escapee (race, sex, height, weight, clothing description, any other identifying features).
3. Broadcast reason for detention or arrest.
4. Immediately notify a supervisor.
5. Set up a perimeter utilizing additional elements.
6. Notify helicopter unit and K-9.
7. If the escapee is captured, the arresting officer will document and prepare the proper offense and arrest reports detailing the facts surrounding the incident.
8. If the escapee is not captured, the transporting officer will prepare an offense report titled “Escape” and document the facts surrounding the incident in this report. Additionally, the officer will prepare a "Lost Equipment Report" as outlined in G.O. 805.00 with the loss of any city property during the incident.
9. If the escape occurs while traveling through another jurisdiction, the transporting officer will notify the appropriate jurisdiction providing all relevant information to that jurisdiction.

313.14 Disposition of Vehicles
A. Authority and Service Numbers
1. Officers have the authority to impound vehicles under the following circumstances:
a. Vehicle involved in an collision and is immobile - Use the Collision Report service number.
b. Stolen vehicle - Use the original Dallas PD service number or make a service number if the vehicle was reported by another agency.
c. Vehicle is evidence of a crime - Use service number assigned the crime.
d. Protective custody (e.g. death of the driver and no one available to take custody) - Use service number assigned the death offense report.
e. When a driver is arrested and no alternative to impoundment exists - Use Arrest Report service number.
f. Parking violations (Service number not required for parking ban).
g. Street blockage.
h. Abandoned vehicle .
i. Vehicle so mechanically defective as to be dangerous.
j. Driver or owner gives consent.
2. All impounded vehicles must have a service number entered on the wrecker book. Officers must obtain a service number, and complete an appropriate report, if no number is assigned.
a. In all cases where a vehicle is impounded, an inventory search of the vehicle will be conducted. The search will be made by the impounding officer, at the scene of the impoundment whenever possible. It is the impounding officer’s responsibility to maintain any evidence found and to maintain the chain of evidence. Money ($5.00 or over), firearms, and valuables will not be left in a vehicle to be impounded. The impounding officer will remove the items from the vehicle and place them in the property room in accordance with the Property/Auto Pound Standard Operating Procedures.
b. When inventorying a vehicle, the vehicle and its container are to be inspected and inventoried. A locked container may be inspected only if the officer can do so without damaging the container or breaking a lock. Container shall mean any object capable of holding other objects, including but not limited to: vehicle trunk, glove compartments, consoles, luggage, briefcases, boxes, bags, purses or clothing. If the container cannot be opened and inspected, it should be so noted on the wrecker book.
3. Officers will call in a Found Property Vehicle report for the following impounded vehicles. This report would serve to alert an investigative unit to a potential stolen or suspect vehicle:
a. An unattended vehicle that appears to be stolen but not reported (broken ignition, etc.).
b. A vehicle is evidence of a crime.
c. When a driver is arrested and the vehicle appears to be stolen but not reported (broken ignition, etc.).
4. The Auto Pound is located at 1955 Vilbig.
B. An officer will release a prisoner's vehicle, regardless of the offense committed, to a passenger or third party under the following circumstances:
1. The vehicle is mechanically safe, not stolen or evidence in a crime, and has proof of financial responsibility.
2. The prisoner wishes to release the vehicle to a passenger or third party that is at the scene who is not under arrest, has a valid driver’s license, and is not intoxicated.
C. An officer may, at his/her discretion, give an arrested person the option of leaving the arrestee's vehicle at the scene of the arrest or other location.
1. The option will be given only to prisoners being charged with Class C Misdemeanors.
2. Before offering a prisoner the option, the officer should consider the security of the vehicle, parking regulations in that area, and the possibility of complaints from citizens concerning the vehicle being left there.
3. A vehicle cannot be inventoried if it is not taken to the pound.
4. When a vehicle is left at the scene, the arresting officer will ensure that the vehicle is legally parked and secured.
5. A Release and Hold Harmless Agreement form will be completed in duplicate. It will contain the service number and arrest number, and will be signed by both the officer and prisoner.
The original Release form will be routed to the Records Section for permanent retention. A copy of the Release form will be given to the arrested person.
D. This order will not prohibit officers from releasing a vehicle to a third party upon receiving a verbal request from the arrested person. Officers will use the Release and Hold Harmless Agreement form only when the vehicle is not released to another person.
E. Disposition of Vehicles when an Arrest is Made
1. The vehicle may be released at the scene in accordance with the above listed guidelines.
2. If not released as described above, the vehicle will be transported to the appropriate pound facility.
F. Status of Juvenile Passengers in Prisoner's Vehicle
1. When juveniles are passengers in a prisoner's vehicle and are under the immediate control of the prisoner, the arresting officer will ask the prisoner if he/she wishes to release the juvenile into the custody of another responsible person. If the responsible person is at the scene of arrest or the juvenile can reasonably be taken to the location of the responsible person, the arresting officer will arrange this and specifically document the incident. Under no circumstances will a juvenile be left either at the arrest scene or at another location without responsible supervision.
2. If the above conditions cannot be met, officers who have a Protective Custody child (newborn through age 16) will call Child Welfare investigators to determine what should be done with the child.
G. Status of Adult Passengers in Prisoner's Vehicle - Adult passengers stranded at the arrest scene will be offered transportation to a nearby public facility where a telephone is available and their reasonable safety can be assured.

313.15 Writ of Habeas Corpus
A. Investigating Officer - In order that a judge may set an appropriate amount of bond for a Writ of Habeas Corpus When a high bond is requested, the investigating officer will be prepared to justify the requested bond if required by a judge.
B. Investigating Division or Section
1. The investigating division or section commander will maintain a file of Writ of Habeas Corpus information so that it can be determined when, how, or if the writ was met.
2. The assigned investigating officer will be responsible for response to and follow-up on writs.
3. When a writ for the release of a prisoner is served, the prisoner will be immediately released. If an investigating officer desires an extension, the officer will immediately contact the judge who issued the writ, make such request, and then abide by the judge's order.
4. When a writ calls for a prisoner in custody to be brought before a court for a hearing at a specific time and date, the investigating officer will produce the prisoner at the proper time and place for the hearing.
5. If the prisoner is filed on or released prior to the return date on the writ, the court will be notified by the investigating officer.

313.16 Magistrate Procedures for Adults
A. Magistrating Responsibilities
1. Any police officer, detective, or supervisory officer may take a prisoner immediately before the first available magistrate in any case where such action would be in the best interest of the departmental investigation of a criminal case.
2. The Dallas County Sheriff's Office has agreed to ensure that all prisoners incarcerated in the Lew Sterrett facility are magistrated without unnecessary delay.
3. The investigating officer having responsibility for the prisoner, however, will assure the magistrate process is accomplished.
B. Persons arrested on charges over which the Municipal Courts have jurisdiction will be processed in accordance with the Detention Services Section SOP, which will be available for reference.
C. Prisoners eligible for immediate release need not be taken before a magistrate.

Dallas Police Department General Order

314.00 Arrest Policies - Juveniles

Revised 10/04/2019


314.00 ARREST POLICIES (JUVENILES)
314.01 Authority to Take Juveniles into Custody
A. Officers may take juveniles into custody pursuant to an order of the Juvenile Court, pursuant to the laws of arrest, or when there is probable cause to believe the child has engaged in delinquent conduct or Conduct Indicating a Need for Supervision (CINS).
B. Generally, a juvenile will be taken into custody when he/she has committed a felony or a Class A or Class B misdemeanor (delinquent conduct). The juvenile will be transported to the Youth Operations Unit for processing. In accordance with the Family Code, a juvenile may not be detained in a Juvenile Processing Office for longer than six hours.
C. On rare occasions involving exceptional circumstances, juvenile delinquent conduct offenders may be released in the field when the release is in the best interest of the Department, the child, and/or the State, but only when approved by a Youth Operations Unit supervisor. Before granting approval to release a juvenile, the Youth Operations Unit supervisor will determine if the juvenile has any outstanding warrants. If an outstanding warrant exists, the juvenile will be taken into custody and handled as an arrest.
D. When an officer has detained a juvenile Class C misdemeanor offender, the officer will check with the Youth Operations Unit to determine if a warrant exists. If no warrant exists, the juvenile will be field released as described in General Order Section 314.02, except:
1. In cases of Day Time Curfew violation and runway, the juvenile will not be field released.
2. In the case of public intoxication, the juvenile will be released to a parent or guardian. If no parent or guardian can be found the juvenile will be taken to Parkland Memorial Hospital to obtain a medical release and then transported to Letot at 10505 Denton Drive.

314.02 Field Release
A. Once an officer has detained a juvenile Class C misdemeanor offender for an offense other than Day Time Curfew violation, runaway, or public intoxication, the officer will determine whether to issue:
1. A non-traffic citation, or
2. A Field Interrogation Report (FIR)
B. Non-traffic Citation
1. Juveniles who are 10-16 years of age may be issued a non-traffic citation. (Issuing traffic citations to juveniles is described in General Order Section 302.08.)
2. Depending on the offense, an offense report may be required.
C. Field Interrogation Report (FIR)
1. An FIR is used in lieu of, not in addition to, a non-traffic citation, with the exception of a curfew citation where both will be used.
2. It effectively serves as a “warning citation” to a juvenile for a Class C misdemeanor, and allows appropriate authorities to track the individual’s conduct within the Techshare System.
3. Juveniles who are 7-9 years of age may only be issued an FIR since they are below the age in which a non- traffic citation can be issued.
4. An FIR will not be issued for a contact in which the juvenile did not commit a criminal act. If the officer did not have the initial authority to issue a non-traffic citation, he/she will not issue a FIR as an alternative. In those instances wherein an officer wishes to document non-custodial juvenile contacts under unusual or suspicious circumstances not amounting to criminal conduct, he/she may use a Miscellaneous Incident Report.
D. Completion and Distribution of the FIR
1. The Juvenile Field Interrogation Report (DPD-04579 Rev 6/94) is a form prepared in triplicate by the issuing officer. The three pages are printed on blue, pink, and yellow paper.
2. The issuing officer will make every reasonable effort to secure proper identification prior to completing the FIR. If a child lives in an apartment, the officer will include the apartment number on the address line. All applicable blocks will be completed.
3. When the juvenile is released to a parent, guardian, other responsible adult relative, or a Youth Action Center officer, the FIR will be distributed as follows:
a. Blue and yellow copies – Forwarded to the Youth Operations Unit.
b. Pink copy – Given to the adult to whom the child is released.

314.03 Day Time Curfew
A. Day Time Curfew is that conduct which violates Section 31.33 of the Dallas City Code – Day Time Curfew.
B. Officers will take into custody those juveniles who are absent from school during the hours of 9:00 am until 2:30 pm while school is in session without the knowledge or consent of their parents/guardian.
C. The officers will transport such juveniles to the school the juvenile is enrolled in or to any specifically designated Center during special Day Time Curfew enforcement initiatives, and either:
1. Release the juvenile to the officer in charge at the school, or
2. When a school officer is unavailable, take the juvenile to the principal’s office.
D. The officers will complete a FIR, leaving the pink copy with the school officer or principal’s office.
E. Day Time Curfew Violations from Other Cities
1. If an officer takes into custody a juvenile who is in violation of the Day Time Curfew and is from another city, he or she will contact the police department of that city and arrange for a location where the juvenile can be transferred to that department’s custody. The officer will also complete an FIR.
2. If the officer is unable to make arrangements with the other police department for transfer of custody, the officer will call the parents of the child to arrange for the release of the child into the parents’ custody. The officer will also complete an FIR.
3. If the officer is unable to release the juvenile to either the suburban police department or the parents, the juvenile will be transported to Child Protective Services and an FIR will be completed.

314.04 Critical Missing Child
A. A critical missing child is an individual below the age of 10, or a child who is determined to have a diminished mental capacity or a medical condition, who requires continual supervision by another, and whose whereabouts are unknown.
B. A critical missing child may be one who has been kidnapped or abducted, or who has runaway, or who has wandered off from a location where he/she was supervised by a legal custodian or person designated in loco parentis.
C. An offense/incident report will be generated for a critical missing child. If a criminal offense is believed to be the cause of the child’s missing status, the offense will be titled according to the penal code. If the child’s status is unexplained, or believed to be caused by the child wandering off, the incident will be titled “Critical Missing Child.”
D. In addition to supplementing the offense report when the child is found and taken into custody, an arrest report will also be made for those children aged 7-9. The report must be reviewed and approved by a Youth Operations Unit detective. No arrest report will be made for those below the age of 7.
E. The child will be delivered without unnecessary delay to the parent, managing conservator, guardian, caretaker, or custodian who is entitled to take possession of the child. If this is not possible, the child will be taken to the Child Protective Services.
F. No FIR will be issued for a Critical Missing Child (ages 7-9) since the arrest report serves the purpose of entering the child into the Techshare System. Children below the age of 7 will not be issued an FIR since the information cannot be entered into the Techshare System.
G. Procedures for locating a Critical Missing Child are contained in General Order 304.08, the Patrol SOP, and the Youth Operations Unit SOP.

314.05 Runaway Child
A. A runaway child is an individual at least 10 and below the age of 17, whose conduct involves the voluntary absence from his/her home, without the consent of the parent or guardian, for a substantial length of time or without intent to return.
B. An offense report is generated for any runaway child, 10-16 years of age. In addition to supplementing the offense report when the child is taken into custody and transported to the Letot Center, an arrest report is also required. The arrest report must be reviewed and approved by a Youth Operations Unit detective. The officer will supplement the original Runaway report.
C. When an officer receives credible information regarding the location of a runaway, he/she will respond to the location and will take custody of the child.
D. The child will be delivered without unnecessary delay to the parent, managing conservator, guardian, caretaker, or custodian who is entitled to take possession of the child. If this is not possible, the child will be taken to the Letot Center.
E. No FIR will be issued for a Runaway Child (ages 10-16) since the arrest report serves the purpose of entering the child into the Techshare System. Children below the age of 7 will not be issued an FIR since the information cannot be entered into the Techshare System.

314.06 Missing Child
A. A “missing child” (as differentiated here from a “runaway”) is an individual who is 17 years of age whose whereabouts are unknown to the child’s legal custodian. The circumstances of the absence indicate that the child has voluntarily left the care and control of the legal custodian without the custodian’s consent and with no intent to return.
B. An officer receiving a report of a 17 year old “missing child” will make a “Want to Locate” incident report. The individual will be listed on NCIC as a “missing child.”
C. Upon locating a 17 year old “missing child,” the officer will first contact the Youth Operations Unit to confirm the “Want to Locate” report. Upon confirmation, the officer will notify the legal custodian regarding the child’s whereabouts and will make every effort to reunite the child and the legal custodian. The officer will supplement the original “Want to Locate” report.
D. If the legal custodian cannot be contacted, the officer will take the child to Child Protective Services (CPS). The Youth Operations Unit will advise the officer of the proper facility to which the child should be taken. The officer will supplement the original “Want to Locate” report.

314.07.  Custodial Arrest
A. Except certain DWI and Runaway offenders, any juvenile taken into custody and not field-released will be taken immediately to the Youth Operations Unit without unnecessary delay and without being taken elsewhere, unless directed otherwise by Youth personnel. Officers will take:
1. Injured DWI offenders (Ages 10 through 16) requiring medical attention to Parkland Memorial Hospital for treatment. Refer to G.O. 314.08 for additional information.
2. Juveniles arrested for Runaway and Class C offenses directly to Letot at 10505 Denton Drive. Officers will complete a standardized arrest report in the Techshare system; notifying Youth Operations for approval when completed. Facility representatives may be contacted at (214) 352-8135.
B. After a juvenile is processed at the Youth Operations Unit, the arresting officer will transport the juvenile to the Henry Wade Justice Center, 2600 Lone Star Drive. This facility houses both the juvenile courts and the juvenile detention center. Facility representatives may be contacted at (214) 698-2200.

314.08 Searching of Juvenile Prisoners
A. All juvenile prisoners will be searched at the time of arrest, or as soon as possible after the arrest, and before being transported.
B. Officers will not perform any strip or body cavity searches of any juvenile prisoner. If officers feel a strip or body cavity search is needed, officers should contact the Youth Operations Unit.
C. Purses, luggage, belt packs, hats, gloves, and coat pockets of female prisoners will be searched by the arresting officer at the time of the arrest.
D. Bodily searches of female prisoners will be conducted only by female Dallas Police officers. If a female officer is not available in the arresting officer’s division, the arresting officer will contact Communications to request a female officer from another division or law enforcement agency.
E. Officers transporting prisoners for other officers will search all prisoners before accepting custody. Transporting officers will be present during the search of a female prisoner by a female officer before accepting custody.
F. The transporting officer will be held accountable for any prisoner arriving at any school, detention or police facility with a weapon or contraband.

314.09 Charges
A. 0-6 Years of Age
1. If a child has committed an offense, the offense report will be generated as required per G.O. 210.00. The reporting officer will describe in the narrative that the child was below the age of criminal responsibility, give the child’s age and date of birth, and state the disposition of the child. The child will be released to a parent or guardian. If this is not possible, the child will be taken to Child Welfare.
2. If circumstances dictate that a child be taken into Protective Custody, a Miscellaneous Incident Report will document the reason as well as the disposition of the child. If appropriate, the child will be released to a parent or guardian, otherwise the child will be taken to Child Welfare.
3. If a child has not committed an offense but is in the company of arrested adults, the child will be released to a parent or guardian. If this is not possible, the child will be taken to Child Welfare. The incident will be documented in a Miscellaneous Incident Report.
B. 7-9 Years of Age
1. If a child has committed an offense, the offense report will be generated as required per G.O. 210.00. The reporting officer will describe in the narrative that the child was below the age of criminal responsibility, give the child’s age and date of birth, and state the disposition of the child. The child will be released to a parent or guardian. If this is not possible, the child will be taken to Child Welfare.
2. If circumstances dictate that a child be taken into Protective Custody, a Miscellaneous Incident Report will document the reason as well as the disposition of the child. If appropriate, the child will be released to a parent or guardian, otherwise the child will be taken to Child Welfare.
3. If a child has not committed an offense but is in the company of arrested adults, the child will be released to a parent or guardian. If this is not possible, the child will be taken to Child Welfare. The incident will be documented in a Miscellaneous Incident Report.
C. 10-16 Years of Age
1. If a child has committed an offense, the offense report will be generated as required per G.O. 210.00.
2. Investigative Offenses
a. If a child commits an offense that is a violation of state penal law, which is punishable by imprisonment or confinement in jail, the child upon being taken into custody, will be charged with – [a specific offense]” and an arrest report will be made.
b. Juveniles taken into custody for Juvenile Delinquency offenses will be transported to the Youth Operations Unit for processing.
3. Class C Misdemeanor Offenses and Status Offenses
a. Status offenses are those offenses committed by juveniles which are unique to them based upon their age. The same acts, if committed by an adult, would not be considered a crime. Status offenses include runaway and curfew violations.
b. If a child commits a Class C misdemeanor offense or is involved in one of the CINS incidents categorized below, the child will be entered into the Techshare System.
i. The voluntary absence of a juvenile from his/her home, without the consent of the parent or guardian, for a substantial length of time or without intent to return (i.e., runaway). An arrest report is required when the child is taken into custody.
ii. Conduct that is a violation of the City’s Curfew Ordinance.
iii. Inhalation offenses.
iv. An act that violates a school district’s communicated written standards of conduct for which the child has been expelled under Sec. 21.3011, Texas Education Code.
c. If the officer coming into contact with the child writes the child a non-traffic citation, the non-custodial arrest information will be entered into the Techshare System by Court Services personnel. No FIR will be issued.
d. If the officer coming into contact with the child for a Class C Misdemeanor or status offense elects not to issue a non-traffic citation, he or she will record that contact on an FIR which will be forwarded to the Youth Operations Unit for entry into the Techshare System.

314.10 Oral Statements and Confessions
A. Res Gestae Statements
1. Res gestae statements of delinquent conduct or of Conduct Indicating a Need for Supervision (CINS) are admissible in any subsequent adjudication proceedings and do not require that the juvenile be informed of his/her rights. Before initiating a prosecution report based solely or partly on a res gestae statement, the respective investigating unit detective will determine if the statement was an actual res gestae statement in that it was a spontaneous utterance arising directly out of the crime or arrest.
2. Res gestae statements and the circumstances involved must be included in any report submitted by the arresting or investigating officer.
B. Oral Statements and Confessions
1. When under arrest, for a statement to be admissible in court, the juvenile must be informed of his/her rights by a Magistrate.
2. The Magistrate will advise the juvenile that the juvenile court may waive its jurisdiction and he/she may be tried as an adult if the juvenile is:
a. At least 14 years of age and is alleged to have committed a capital felony, an aggravated controlled substance felony, or a first-degree felony.
b. At least 15 years of age and is alleged to have committed a second or third degree felony or a state jail felony.
3. Oral confessions may be admissible in court provided the juvenile makes a statement of facts or circumstances that are found to be true and that tend to establish guilt. This must be corroborated and may include statements leading to the finding of secreted or stolen property or the instrument the juvenile states was used to commit the offense.
4. Officers taking oral statements must quote the statement in all proper reports. This is necessary since the officer taking the statement may not be subpoenaed to Juvenile Court.
5. Before submitting follow-up reports to the Dallas County Juvenile Department, the respective investigating unit supervisor will ascertain that all oral statements are corroborated by the necessary evidence.
C. IN-CUSTODY Written Statements - Written statements may be taken from juveniles between the ages of 10 and 16. The statement or confession may be submitted as evidence in adjudication proceeding when the following requirements are met:
1. The juvenile must have been taken into custody in accordance with the law and transported to the Dallas PD Juvenile Processing Office (JPO).
2. When a juvenile wants to make a written statement that may implicate him/her in the commission of the stated offense, the assigned detective will request an arraignment and warning for the juvenile before a magistrate. Appropriate warning and arraignment forms are available in the Youth Operations Unit.
3. The respective investigating unit supervisor must have reviewed and approved the reports of the incident prior to filing the case.
D. OUT OF CUSTODY Written Statements – Out of custody written statements are admissible in adjudication proceedings when the following requirements are met:
1. The juvenile must NOT be under arrest.
2. Juvenile must be advised and fully understand that he/she is able to leave at any time during the interview/interrogation.
3. Upon receipt of out of custody written statement, the juvenile cannot be arrested for 24 hours.
E. Custodial Interview and Interrogation
1. Custodial interview and interrogation of juveniles will be conducted at the Dallas PD Juvenile Processing Office (JPO), which is located at Youth Operations, 1400 S. Lamar.
2. The number of officers to be present during the custodial interview and interrogation will be determined by a JPO supervisor.

314.11 Fingerprints and Photographs
A. Youth Operations Unit personnel will be responsible for ensuring that all juveniles (10 years of age or older) referred to the Dallas Police Department First Offender Program or arrested on other than Dallas County holds be photographed and fingerprinted.
B. The fingerprint files of juveniles will be kept separate from the fingerprint files of adult offenders.
C. The Youth Operations Unit will coordinate the destruction of juvenile records to comply with state law.
D. Officers may request that:
1. A juvenile’s fingerprints be taken for immediate comparison with latent prints found at the scene of an offense if the juvenile is a suspect and is in custody. The Youth Operations Unit will coordinate the request.
2. A juvenile’s fingerprints be taken for comparison with latent prints found at the scene of an offense where the juvenile is a suspect but not in custody. The Youth Operations Unit will coordinate the request.
3. A juvenile suspected of an offense, but who is not in custody, be photographed for identification or line-up purposes. The Youth Operations Unit will coordinate the request.

314.12 Driving While Intoxicated
A. If a juvenile (ages 10-16) is operating a motor vehicle and the officer believes him/her to be intoxicated, the officer will:
1. Perform a Field Sobriety Test (Horizontal Gaze Nystagmus, Walk & Turn Test, One Leg Stand, etc…). No breath / blood test will be offered.
2. If the officer determines the juvenile is intoxicated, arrest the juvenile for Driving While Intoxicated and transport him/her to Parkland Memorial Hospital for a medical release. When the juvenile is released from Parkland Memorial Hospital, he/she will be transported to the Youth Operations Unit.
3. Upon arrival to the Youth Operations Unit, arresting officers will complete the necessary reports and ALR forms (DIC 23 and 25). Arresting officers will have the Youth Operations Unit booking detective approve the arrest report on all juveniles arrested for Driving While Intoxicated.
B. If an intoxicated juvenile (ages 10-16) is operating a motor vehicle and is involved in a fatality accident; an accident that the officer believes will result in a fatality; or, an accident in which the juvenile will be charged with Intoxication Assault, he/she will be transported to Parkland Memorial Hospital.
1. A mandatory blood specimen will be taken. Officers requesting a mandatory blood specimen will complete a Statutory Authorization Mandatory Blood Specimen form. When the juvenile is released from Parkland Memorial Hospital, he/she will be transported to the Youth Operations Unit.
2. Upon arrival to the Youth Operations Unit, arresting officers will complete the necessary reports and ALR forms (DIC 23 and 25). Arresting officers will have the Youth Operations Unit booking detective approve the arrest report on all juveniles arrested for Intoxication Assault and Intoxication.

314.13 Drugs and Controlled Substances Arrests
Juveniles arrested for narcotics and dangerous drugs violations will be taken to the Youth Operations Unit. Any related drug evidence will be deposited at the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center or the Property Section in accordance with General Order Section 321.03.

314.14 Arrests at School During School Hours (SCHOOLS WITHOUT THEIR OWN POLICE DEPARTMENT)
A. Offenses Occurring in Officer's Presence - Officers will:
1. Make appropriate arrests for major misdemeanors and felonies occurring in their presence.
2. Allow school officials to handle minor violations and disruptions without official police action unless otherwise requested by school officials.
B. Arrests Made at School -Officers will:
1. Coordinate police activities with the respective investigating unit.
2. Contact the principal or designated school representative before an arrest, when practical, and in all cases before leaving the school premises with the prisoner.
3. Notify the arrested juvenile’s parent or guardian before leaving the school.
4. If a parent or guardian cannot be contacted, advise the desk officer when the juvenile is booked.

314.15 Child Abuse and Neglect
A. Child Abuse
1. A police element receiving a call regarding child abuse will:
a. Determine if Child Welfare has been notified. If not, the officer will do so.
b. Call the Child Abuse Squad and advise that office of the offense.
c. Complete an offense report with the offense listed as being the actual offense committed followed with (Child Abuse).
d. Order a Physical Evidence Squad element to take photographs or to gather any other type of physical evidence that needs to be taken or preserved.
2. Officers will contact a Child Abuse detective or supervisor if there is any question as to whether child abuse has occurred.
B. Child Neglect
1. An officer receiving a call regarding child neglect will follow the same procedure as in abuse cases.
2. Officers who have a Protective Custody child (newborn through age 16) will call Child Welfare investigators at metro (817) 640-6200 or metro (817) 640-4041 to determine what should be done with the child. Officers not having access to a telephone will contact the Child Abuse Squad Youth Operations Unit on Channel 11 for assistance.

314.16 Transporting of Juveniles
A. Juveniles will only be transported in police vehicles, patrol wagons or Youth Operations Unit wagons.
B. The only adult who may be transported with a juvenile is a parent or someone arrested in connection with the same offense.
C. Juveniles over the age of 12 will be transported according to the above guidelines and those contained in General Order Section 313.13 (Transportation and Handling of Prisoners).
D. In order to ensure prevention of front-seat air bag deployment related injuries or deaths, juveniles age 12 and under will be transported in the back seat of police vehicles, whenever possible, using an age appropriate safety restraint. As an additional safety measure, the vehicle windows will also be closed and the doors locked.
1. Juveniles younger than five years of age will be transported using a child passenger safety seat system.
2. Juveniles five years of age or older will be transported using a safety belt.

Dallas Police Department General Order

315.00 Arrests Requiring Special Handling

Revised 10/31/2017


315.00 ARRESTS REQUIRING SPECIAL HANDLING
315.01 Arrests Made by Off-Duty Officers
A. Officers making an arrest will call for an on-duty field element to handle any prisoners when the officers are:
1. Off-duty and not working an off-duty job.
2. Working at an off-duty job providing traffic or crowd control.
3. Working an off-duty security job that is one-day duration or less and is not a recurring job.
B. Officers working a regular off-duty job where the primary responsibility is to provide security and make arrests will:
1. Carry a supply of Offense/Incident Reports, Juvenile Field Interrogation Reports, and citations to the location of the off-duty job.
2. Call in any necessary Arrest Reports and complete any required Offense/Incident Reports.
3. Call the Communications Section to obtain a service number and request an element to transport prisoners.
4. Release prisoners and all required reports to the transporting officers.
5. When a non-traffic citation is issued:
a. Call the Communications Section to obtain a service number and complete an Offense/Incident Report if an offense has been committed.
b. On completion of off-duty employment, request an element to pick up the reports on a mark-out.

315.02 Arrests Made on NCIC, TCIC, and NCTCIC Checks
A. Arrests made on NCIC, TCIC, and NCTCIC (Regional) Hits will be in accordance with Communications Section, Detention Services Section, General Investigations Section, and Records Section Standard Operating Procedures.
B. No arrest or confiscation of property without a warrant will be made solely on an NCIC, TCIC, or NCTCIC hit on a computer or radio check. In all cases, the name of the confirming individual from the originating agency must be included in the report.
C. An NCIC or TCIC hit alone is not probable cause to arrest. A hit indicates a warrant has been issued and the date of the warrant. A hit is only one fact that an officer must add to other facts in arriving at sufficient legal grounds for probable cause to arrest. It is imperative that officers compare sufficient identifiers to verify that the person in custody is the same person named in the warrant.
1. To verify a person’s identity, consider the following possible identifiers:
a. Name.
b. Race.
c. Sex.
d. Date of birth (DOB).
e. Place of birth.
f. Driver’s License number (DL).
g. Social Security number (SSN).
h. Address.
i. Complete physical description to include height, weight, hair, eye color, scars, marks, and tattoos.
2. Every effort must be made to verify an arrested person’s identity prior to incarceration. When there is a doubt that an individual is the wanted subject, he/she will be fingerprinted prior to incarceration.
3. In instances where there is less than substantial evidence to identify the person in custody, a field supervisor must be contacted to make the final determination. An arrest will not be made if the field supervisor determines there are not enough significant identifiers to connect the individual to the warrant.
4. If a field release is made, comply with General Order 313.08 (Release of Erroneously Arrested Persons in the Field).

315.03 Foreign Nationals
A. Definition
1. A person from another country who has been granted permission to legally enter the United States for a specific reason or period of time, with some form of written authorization such as a passport, visa, work authorization permit, or resident alien permit.
2. A person from another country (usually from Canada or Mexico) who, while bearing no written authorization, has been granted permission to legally enter the United States for a short period of time for tourist or business purposes.
B. Due to U.S. obligations under international law, it is imperative that arresting officers understand that the Department may be required to notify a diplomatic or consular officer of the arrestee’s country if the arrestee is a foreign national.
C. Officers making an arrest of a foreign national will consult with the Detention Services Section booking supervisor who will refer to Annex A of the State Department letter dated March 12, 1996 (or any subsequent superseding letter). Annex A lists all countries for which notification is mandatory. Annex B of the same letter lists contact telephone numbers for foreign embassies and consulates in the U.S.
1. If the arrestee is from a country for which notification is mandatory, the booking supervisor will make the notification to the diplomatic or consular officer, listing the date, time, and person contacted in the supervisor’s comment area of the arrest report. The arrestee will be informed when the notification has been made.
2. If the arrestee is a national of any other foreign country, the Vienna Convention on Consular Relations and/or customary international law require that the arrestee be informed without delay of the right to have his/her government notified.
a. If the arrestee requests that notification be made, it must be made without delay. The booking supervisor will list the date, time, and person contacted in the supervisor’s comment area of the arrest report. The arrestee will be informed when the notification has been made.
b. If the arrestee does not request notification to his/her government, that fact will be noted in the arrest report and no notification will be made.
D. Subject to local law and regulations regarding access to detained persons, foreign consular officers have the right to visit their nationals, to converse and correspond with them, and to arrange for their legal representation.
E. Information and guidance may be obtained from the local Special Agent of the U.S. Department of State at (214) 767-0702.

315.04 Immigration
A. Officers will not stop or contact any person for the sole purpose of determining immigration status.
B. Officers may not consider race, color, religion, language, or national origin as the basis to make inquiries as to immigration status.
C. Officers are permitted, but not required, to ask about the immigration status only of those persons who are lawfully detained or arrested. However, officers may not arrest an individual because he or she is undocumented.
D. Individuals presenting a valid Texas driver’s license or similar government-issued identification will be presumed to have lawful presence in the United States.
E. Officers may not ask the immigration status of those who are victims, witnesses, or those who are reporting a crime, unless necessary to investigate the offense, or to provide information regarding federal visas designed for the protection of persons assisting law enforcement, or if the officer has probable cause that the victim or witness has engaged in specific conduct constituting a separate criminal offense.
F. Officers may not prolong the detention of an individual in order to further investigate the individual’s immigration status or to hold them for federal authorities. Rather, at the expiration of the time reasonably required to carry out the purposes of the initial stop, the officer is required to release the individual, regardless of whether the officer suspects or even knows that the individual is undocumented or the individual has answered dishonestly or refuses to answer questions about immigration status.
G. Officers may, but are not required, to volunteer information about a lawfully detained or arrested person’s immigration status with ICE or other law enforcement agencies either after releasing the individual or during the seizure, provided that this communication does not prolong the seizure.
H. Any arrested person who is transported to Lew Sterrett Justice Center may be evaluated by the Dallas County Sheriff’s Office to determine if the person is subject to an immigration detainer request issued by U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (U.S. ICE).

315.05 Military Personnel
A. Military personnel will be treated the same as non-military personnel in most instances.
B. Arrests of military personnel will be handled in accordance with the Detention Services Section S.O.P., which will be available for reference.

315.06 Theft
A. The Records Section will respond to requests from officers for checks on persons arrested.
B. In most instances, when an offender is arrested for Class C misdemeanor theft and can properly identify himself/herself, has no outstanding warrants, and a record check reveals no previous convictions for theft, the arresting officer may issue a non-traffic citation in lieu of taking the offender to jail. This does not prohibit an officer from placing a Class C misdemeanor theft suspect in jail if the officer feels circumstances warrant such action. Offenders will not be issued non-traffic citations for thefts that are Class B or above.
C. Officers enhancing the charge of theft will obtain previous conviction information from the Criminal Documents Team or county records and include the following information on the Arrest Report:
1. Date of offense.
2. Offense type.
3. Date of previous conviction.
4. Court case number and court name.
5. Sentence and fine.

315.07 Prostitution
A. The arresting officer will contact the Records Section to determine if the suspect has any prior convictions for prostitution.
B. If the records in the Records Section reveal that the suspect has no previous convictions for prostitution, the charge will be Prostitution (43.02) Class B Misdemeanor.
C. If the records in the Records Section reveal that the suspect has a previous conviction for a Class B Misdemeanor, Prostitution charge, the suspect will be charged with Prostitution (43.02) Class A Misdemeanor.
D. If the records in the Records Section reveal that the suspect has prior convictions for a Class A misdemeanor Prostitution charge, the suspect will be charged with Prostitution (43.02) Class A Misdemeanor - Enhanced.
E. Officers enhancing the charge of prostitution will obtain previous conviction information from the Criminal Documents Team or county records and include the following information on the Arrest Report:
1. Date of offense.
2. Type of offense.
3. Date previously convicted.
4. Court case number.
5. Time served and fine amount.
6. Criminal court number.

315.08 Controlled Substance or Dangerous Drug Violators
A. Adults arrested for these violations will be taken to the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center to be interviewed, booked, and placed in jail.
B. Juveniles arrested for these violations will be taken to the Youth Operations Unit.
C. Any related drug evidence will be deposited at the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center or the Property Section in accordance with Section 321.03.
D. Officers will not disturb any illegal drug laboratories they discover. Officers will:
1. Secure the area.
2. Notify the Narcotics Division.
3. Call the Fire Department to the scene if the laboratory is in operation.

315.09 Intoxication
A. Intoxication that does not go beyond loud language may or may not result in arrest. The officer may release the person to an adult capable of and willing to assume responsibility for the subject's custody.
B. If the offender is arrested, the officer will complete an Arrest Report.
C. A copy of all reports involving a liquor license holder or incidents on premises licensed by the Texas Alcoholic Beverage Commission will be forwarded to the Vice Section. These Arrest Reports will include:
1. The name of the person in charge of the Texas Alcoholic Beverage Commission licensed premises.
2. Whether the arrest was on view or on call.
3. The number of the liquor or beer license.
D. All persons arrested for public intoxication that have no other charges will be taken to the City Detention Center (CDC), Public Inebriate Program, 1600 Chestnut Street for processing. The only exception to this policy will be when they are seriously injured, seriously ill, or intoxicated to the degree that the condition is life threatening. The CDC intake supervisor will request that the arresting officer call a Dallas Fire Department (DFD) ambulance, and DFD personnel will determine if the person needs to be transported to Parkland Hospital for treatment. If persons arrested for public intoxication are transported to the hospital for treatment, they will be booked for record and the charge released by the CDC supervisor. Persons arrested for public intoxication with no additional charge(s) will NOT be transported to the Lew Sterrett Justice Center. A hold will not be placed on an intoxicated person transported to the hospital unless they were booked in jail prior to the need for hospitalization or have charge(s) other than public intoxication. Any questions regarding these procedures will be directed to a Dallas Police Department supervisor at Lew Sterrett.
E. Certain illnesses and injuries have the same symptoms as intoxication. Officers handling a person suspected of being intoxicated should look for or be mindful of:
1. A lack of alcohol odor.
2. A sweetish acid breath associated with diabetics.
3. Unequal size of the pupils of the eyes associated with a stroke or head injury.
4. Irrational behavior.
5. Any identification card that might indicate the person is suffering from a chronic illness or injury.
6. Information received from any person indicating the possibility of illness or injury not associated with intoxication.

315.10 Hospitalized and Medically Treated Prisoners
A. Any time an arrested person is injured during the offense or arrest process or becomes ill, medical attention will be sought in the field if the condition is a medical emergency, or the prisoner will be immediately brought to the attention of the on-duty medical attendant at the county jail or sent to Parkland Memorial Hospital (PMH) for non-emergencies. Information concerning the injury or illness will be included in the arrest report.
B. The Youth Operations Unit will be notified in cases involving injured juveniles who are in custody.
C. Felony Cases
1. When a prisoner arrested for a felony offense is taken to the hospital for treatment or admittance, a guard from the Patrol Operations Division where the arrest was made will be placed over the prisoner until one of the following occurs:
a. The individual is placed in the custody of another law enforcement agency.
b. The individual is released by the hospital for return to the county jail.
c. The individual is released from any pending charges.
2. However, in instances where the felony is a Property crime and the prisoner is so seriously physically incapacitated by injury to the degree that there is no likelihood of escape, the Watch Commander will retain the discretion whether to post a guard.
D. Class A and B Misdemeanor Cases - It may be necessary to assign a guard for a prisoner arrested for Class A or B misdemeanor offenses. This determination will be made by the on-duty Watch Commander of the Patrol Operations Division that made the arrest. Consideration should be given to whether any of the following apply:
1. The prisoner is also under investigation for a possible felony offense.
2. The prisoner was arrested for a crime of violence and further violence is likely to ensue.
3. The prisoner's mental state and the offense for which arrested (intoxication, under the influence of drugs, DWI, family violence, etc.) are such that they may indicate the likelihood of escape, violence, or public endangerment either at the facility or to the public at large if the arrestee should escape.
E. Class C Misdemeanor Cases
1. Normally, a person committing a Class C misdemeanor, city ordinance violation, or traffic violation can be issued a citation as outlined in Section 313.03.
2. Persons who are injured, however, during a police incident involving a Class C offense, city ordinance violation, or traffic violation may be written a citation or taken into custody.
a. If taken into custody, the prisoner will be examined either by the on-duty nurse at the county jail or taken to Parkland Memorial Hospital. The injury will be noted in the arrest or offense report.
b. If the injury is of a minor nature and the officer intends to only write a citation, the injury will be documented in either an offense report or a Miscellaneous Incident Report. Any declination of treatment or statement that the detainee intends to seek treatment from his/her own physician will also be included.
3. If an injured Class C misdemeanor offender is taken into custody, a guard is ordinarily not required, but Watch Commanders may deem it an appropriate option based on the individual's mental state (intoxication, under the influence of drugs, prone to violence) or the offense committed (e.g., family violence).
F. Responsibilities of Officer Assigned as Guard
1. An officer assigned to guard a prisoner admitted for hospitalization will notify a supervisor in the unit responsible for follow-up investigation if that unit is on-duty. If the unit is not on duty or the case is a direct-file case with no investigative follow-up, the officer will notify his/her immediate supervisor.
2. The officer will notify a Detention Services Section supervisor as soon as a room number is assigned to a prisoner who is admitted.
3. An officer will remain with the prisoner until the arrest warrant and associated paperwork is received by the Dallas County Sheriff's Office, which will then assign a guard to relieve the police officer.
G. Detectives assigned to investigate cases involving hospitalized prisoners will give these cases their first consideration. A case will be filed or the charges against the prisoner released by a supervisor as soon as possible.
H. In those misdemeanor cases where no guard is posted, the officer transporting the prisoner to the hospital will notify the Dallas police officer assigned to Parkland Memorial Hospital (if on-duty) of the prisoner's status. The PMH officer will notify the Communications Section for prisoner transport following the individual's medical release. If the PMH officer is not on duty, the transporting officer will provide the telephone number of the Communications Section or the Detention Services Section to the attending nurse and request the nurse call the Police Department upon medical release.

315.11 Mentally Ill Persons
A. Mentally ill persons will be handled in accordance with Texas Health and Safety Code Title 7 Mental Health and Mental Retardation Chapter 573 Emergency Detention. Officers will make arrests in accordance with section
573.001 Apprehension by Police Officer Without Warrant.
B. Mentally ill persons taken into custody will be processed according to Patrol Operations S.O.P. 1401, which will be available for reference.
C. Recognition Training
1. Sworn personnel at the entry level will receive a documented 24 hour training block on recognizing mental illness and crisis intervention training.
2. In-Service sworn personnel will receive documented training at least every three years. Personnel can receive the training through specialized schools, bi-annual core training, roll call training, or as mandated by TCOLE.

315.12 Hospital Outpatients
Arrested individuals found with identification indicating they are a patient in a local hospital will be handled in accordance with the Detention Services Section S.O.P. that will be available for reference.

315.13 Identification Disk for Retarded Children
A. The Dallas Council for Retarded Children will provide a metal disk for identification purposes.
B. Identification information is available from the Exceptional Persons File by accessing any computer terminal by using a wanted person’s inquiry of name, race, sex, and date of birth.

315.14 Interview and Arrest Procedure for Deaf and Hearing-Impaired Persons
A. A deaf/hearing-impaired person may be arrested on the basis of probable cause in the same manner as a person who is not deaf/hearing impaired. There is no need to supply an interpreter prior to making an arrest based upon probable cause. Once the arrestee has arrived at the Lew Sterrett Justice Center and if the officer has doubt as to whether the arrestee understood the nature of the criminal charges, the officer will advise a Dallas Police jail supervisor. The supervisor will coordinate this information with a Dallas County Sheriff’s Office supervisor, who will in turn contact a certified interpreter.
B. If a police officer needs to interview a suspect who is deaf/hearing impaired to determine whether there is probable cause to make an arrest, a qualified interpreter must be provided.
C. When an interpreter is needed prior to arriving at the jail/detention facility, the request will be made by contacting the Communications Section.
D. The officer must secure the services of a qualified interpreter in order to communicate accurately the warnings to the arrestee prior to any interrogation per Article 38.22, Code of Criminal Procedure.
E. In order for an oral (sign language-interpreted) statement to be admissible as evidence in any criminal proceeding when no written statement is obtained, an electronic visual recording of the warnings and the orally-interpreted statement must be made in accordance with Article 38.22 of the C.C.P. The recording must be treated as evidence and handled accordingly.
F. If at any time an arrestee requests an interpreter, one will be made available.
G. If an individual who is not deaf/hearing impaired would have been issued a citation without being questioned by the investigating officer, then a suspect who is deaf/hearing impaired in the same situation does not need to be provided with a qualified interpreter.
H. If an investigating officer is unable to communicate effectively with a victim or critical witness by using a note pad or some other means of communication other than a qualified interpreter, then the investigating officer must provide the victim or critical witness with a qualified interpreter.
I. All identifying information on the interpreter must be included in the report. All written questions and responses between and among police officers and persons who are deaf/hearing impaired must be treated as evidence and handled accordingly.

315.15 Arrests for Failure to Identify
A. Supervisors who approve arrest reports will review those instances wherein the arrestee is charged at the time of arrest with both Failure to Identify and Hold for the Texas Department of Criminal Justice (Institutional Division) or a hold for another agency on a felony warrant.
B. If there is a felony warrant hold on the arrestee, the supervisor will determine if the warrant is from an agency within Dallas County or outside of Dallas County.
1. If the agency is from within Dallas County, the arrestee will be booked and held on both the Failure to Identify
and the felony warrant charges.
2. If the agency is from outside of Dallas County, the arrestee will be held on the felony warrant charge but will be booked for record only on the Failure to Identify charge and that charge immediately released.
C. If there is a misdemeanor warrant from any Texas county, the arrestee will be booked and held on both the Failure to Identify and the misdemeanor warrant charges.
D. If the arrestee is wanted on a Hold for TDC, the person will be booked on both the hold and the Failure to Identify
charges but the Failure to Identify charge will be for record only and that charge will be immediately released.
E. No legally detained person will be transported against his or her will to a police or detention facility for investigative purposes, whether for interrogation or for fingerprinting, based on a “Terry Stop.”

315.16 Arrests by Out-of-Town Peace Officers
A. When called to a location where an off-duty Texas peace officer from another agency with jurisdiction in the Dallas city limits has made an arrest in the city, DPD officers will take the prisoner into custody and transport him/her to the proper jail facility.
B. When called to a location where an off-duty Texas peace officer who is outside of his/her home jurisdiction has made an arrest within the Dallas city limits, DPD officers will take custody of the prisoner and transport him/her to the proper jail facility if the peace officer is one of the following:
1. Sheriff or a Sheriff's Deputy.
2. Constable or a Deputy Constable.
3. Marshall or Police Officer of an incorporated city, town, or village.
4. Ranger or Officer commissioned by the Public Safety Commission and the Director of DPS.
C. When outside their jurisdiction, only officers who are Rangers or commissioned by the Public Safety Commission and the Director of DPS may make arrests for a violation of the Uniform Act Regulating Traffic on Highways (Art 6701d, VTCS).
D. When completing the offense or arrest report for situations outlined in Subsections A, B, or C above, the reporting DPD officer will code the arresting officer as 9999 and identify the out-of-town officer in the narrative portion. The DPD officer will be listed as the transporting officer.
E. When called to a location where any other off-duty Texas peace officer (not included in Subsections A, B, or C above) has made an arrest for a felony, theft, or breach of the peace within the Dallas city limits, DPD officers will take the prisoner into custody and transport him/her to the proper jail facility. When completing the offense or arrest report, the reporting DPD officer will be listed as the arresting and transporting officer and the out-of-town officer identified in the narrative as a witness to the offense.

315.17 Handgun License Violations
A. The Texas License to Carry Handgun Law gives officers the authority to disarm a license holder at any time when they reasonably believe it is necessary for the protection of any person. Officers will return a license holder’s gun at the scene when they determine all of the following about the license holder:
1. Is not a threat to anyone (including the officer, the license holder, or other individuals).
2. Has not violated any provisions of the Texas License to Carry Handgun Law.
3. Is not under arrest for any other violation.
B. Suspended, Revoked, or Expired Handgun Licenses
1. When a Wanted Person check on an arrested person reveals the subject is licensed to carry a handgun but the license is suspended, revoked, or expired, the officer will:
a. Determine if the subject has a weapon on or about his/her person and if the handgun is carried in a manner that requires a valid handgun license.
b. Charge the subject with Unlawful Carrying Weapons (46.02 PC), if the subject is carrying the handgun in a manner that requires a valid handgun license, and place the handgun in the Property Room.
2. When a subject presents a handgun license as identification, the officer will determine if the person has a weapon on or about their person and perform a Wanted Person check. If the Wanted Person check reveals the license is suspended, revoked, or expired, and
a. The subject is not carrying the handgun in a manner requiring a license and is not arrested for any other violation, the officer will release the weapon and license to the license holder.
b. The subject is carrying a handgun in a manner that requires a license, the officer will charge the subject with Unlawful Carrying Weapons (46.02), seize the handgun license, and place the weapon in the Property Room.
3. Disposition of Seized Handgun Licenses (Revoked, Suspended, or Expired)
a. The seizing officer will ensure a letter is prepared for the signature of the Unit/Watch, Section or Division Commander advising the Department of Public Safety of the reason for the license seizure.
b. The officer’s immediate supervisor will ensure that the letter and license are sent to:
Texas Department of Public Safety Handgun Licensing Unit
P.O. Box 4143
Austin, Texas 78765-4143.
C. When a handgun licensee is carrying a handgun on or about their person and fails or refuses to display their handgun license upon demand for identification, the officer will do the following:
1. The subject may be arrested for violation of Chapter 46 of the Texas Penal Code in certain circumstances. The subject may only be charged with failure to display a handgun license under V.T.C.A. Government Code 3411.205 Class B Misdemeanor if they are actually carrying a handgun, fails or refuses to display their handgun license, and has had their license suspended for failure to display their license under V.T.C.A. Government Code 3411.205.
2. Seize the handgun license and weapon and place the weapon in the Property Room regardless of whether the suspect is arrested.
3. Submit the proper affidavit for the revocation/suspension of the handgun license. (Refer to 327.00 – Affidavits for Suspension or Revocation of License to Carry Handgun.)
D. Arrest Report Requirements
1. In their arrest reports, officers will include the handgun license number, expiration date, action type for which the license was issued (SA - Semi-Automatic or Revolver, NSA - Revolver only), and any specific statements or gestures of the subject that revealed a weapon was carried and its location.
2. Officers will deliver the TCIC Handgun File printout to the Jail supervisor at the time the arrest report is reviewed when a valid handgun license for the action type or category carried is a defense to prosecution. The printout should indicate if the license was suspended, revoked, or expired and the valid action type or category.

315.18 Underage Alcohol Consumption Laws
A. Driving Under the Influence of Alcohol by a Minor - A minor (under 21 years of age) commits an offense if he/she operates a motor vehicle in a public place while having any detectable amount of alcohol in his/her system.
1. Minors (ages of 17 - 20)
a. If the officer determines the minor is intoxicated, the minor will be transported to Lew Sterrett and offered a breath/blood test. If the minor refuses, the officer will follow the normal process for a DWI arrest refusal.
b. If the minor agrees to take the breath/blood test and the result is below .08, the minor will be arrested for Driving Under the Influence of Alcohol (Class C) and taken to Detox for processing. If the officer determines the minor is a danger to himself/herself or others, the charge of Public Intoxication will be added so the minor can be required to remain in Detox for a minimum of four hours before release.
c. On all arrests for Driving Under the Influence of Alcohol by a Minor (Class C), the officer will:
i. Complete ALR forms (DIC 23 and 25).
ii. Obtain a photocopy of the breath test record and the criminal complaint.
iii. Obtain a driver’s license check to determine if prior convictions exist for this offense.
(1) Two or more prior convictions for this offense will cause the charge to be enhanced to a Class B misdemeanor and the subject will be taken to Lew Sterrett for processing.
(2) If the information is unavailable due to computer down time, this will be noted in the arrest report.
d. If the officer detects any amount of alcohol on the minor’s breath and through observation determines the minor is not intoxicated and not a danger to himself/herself or others, the officer will do one of the following:
i. Issue a citation for Driving Under the Influence of Alcohol by a Minor and release the subject to a responsible adult or parent who has no detectable amount of alcohol in their system. The officer will complete ALR forms (23 and 25) and submit them, along with the citation, to Court Services. (Note: ALR form #23 must be notarized before submission to Court Services.) The officer will also complete an MIR that contains the name, address, and phone number of the responsible person to whom the minor was field released.
ii. If the officer is unable to locate a parent or responsible adult as specified in 1.d.(1), the officer will arrest the minor for Driving Under the Influence of Alcohol by a Minor and transport the subject to Detox. The officer will complete and submit all ALR forms while at Detox. Instead of calling in the arrest report, the officer will complete a handwritten DUI arrest report at Detox. The completed ALR forms will remain at Detox.
2. Juveniles (10 - 16 Years of Age)
a. If the officer detects any alcohol on the juvenile’s breath and determines the subject is intoxicated by performing a Field Sobriety Test, the minor will be processed according to General Order 314.08.iety Test, the minor will be processed according to General Order 314.08.
b. If the officer detects any amount of alcohol on the minor’s breath and through observation determines the minor is not intoxicated and not a danger to himself/herself or others, the officer will:
i. Issue a citation to the juvenile for Driving Under the Influence of Alcohol by a Minor.
ii. Complete ALR forms (DIC 23 and 25).
iii. Attach the citation and ALR forms together and submit them to Court Services.
iv. Release the juvenile to a parent or a responsible adult.
v. If this release cannot be accomplished, contact the Youth Operations Unit by telephone for additional release instructions. Officers will make every effort to contact a parent or responsible adult before calling the Youth Operations Unit.
B. Non-Driving Related Offenses
1. Non-Driving alcohol related offenses include the following and do not require the completion of the ALR forms:
a. Minor in Possession of Alcohol.
b. Consumption of Alcohol by a Minor.
c. Attempt to Purchase Alcohol by a Minor.
d. Actual Purchase of Alcohol by a Minor.
e. Misrepresentation of Age by a Minor.
2. Minors (17 - 20 Years of Age) - Officers may issue a citation or arrest a minor for any of the listed non-driving offenses.
3. Juveniles (10 - 16 Years of Age) - Officers must follow the listed procedure when charging a juvenile:
a. Issue a citation to the juvenile for violation of any of the listed offenses.
b. Release the juvenile to a parent or a responsible adult.
c. If the release cannot be accomplished, contact the Youth Operations Unit by telephone for additional release instructions.
d. Send the citation to Court Services.

315.19 Unusual Security Risks
A. Definition
1. Any person that has directly threatened to injure or kill a law enforcement or correctional officer.
2. Any person that has injured or caused the death of a law enforcement or correctional officer.
3. Any person that has attempted or threatened to escape police custody.
4. Any prisoner arrested for a hate crime or who has demonstrated or espoused violence toward any person based on their race, gender, ethnicity or sexual orientation.
5. A prisoner that an officer has reason to believe through intelligence, tattoos, statements, etc., is a member of a dangerous, high profile or subversive organization that may react violently to the arrest of one of its members.
6. Any other statement or actions by a prisoner which cause the arresting officer to believe the prisoner could create or incite a dangerous disruption at a detention facility.
B. Officers that come in contact with a prisoner that fits the definition for an unusual security risk will do the following:
1. Make sure that the prisoner is transported according to General Order 313.11.
2. Officers will verbally notify the detention facility accepting custody of the prisoner of their status as an unusual security risk. Officers will describe the facts and circumstances that cause the prisoner to be an unusual security risk.
3. After officers have secured the prisoner in the proper detention facility they will complete necessary reports and will include documentation of the facts and circumstances that made the prisoner an unusual security risk in their report.
4. Officers will also document in their report that the receiving detention facility was verbally notified of the prisoner’s unusual security risk.

Dallas Police Department General Order

316.00 Arrests Involving Controlled Substances

Revised 01/30/2007

316.00 Arrests Involving Controlled Substances or Dangerous Drugs
316.01 Definitions:
A. “Presumptive Field Test” means the preliminary identification of a substance as a controlled substance or a dangerous drug by means of a reagent test or by visual/physical comparison for the purpose of determining if a criminal offense has been committed.
B. “Controlled Substance” means a substance, including a drug or an immediate precursor, listed in Schedules I through V or Penalty Groups 1 through 4 of Title 6, Subtitle C, Chapter 481, Subchapter B and D, of the Texas Health and Safety Code.
C. “Dangerous Drug” means a device or drug that is unsafe for self-medication and is not included in Schedule I through V or Penalty Groups 1 through 4 of Title 6, Subtitle C, Chapter 481, Subchapter B and D, of the Texas Health and Safety Code.
D. “Field Test Kit” means a reagent test kit designed to detect for the presence of a controlled substance.
E. “Inconclusive” means the results of a presumptive field test that indicates no definitive result that the sample contains the presence of a controlled substance or dangerous drug for which the sample was tested.
F. “Trained Member,” as used in this procedure, means an employee of the Dallas Police Department who has successfully completed a course of instruction in the identification of controlled substances and dangerous drugs by means of a reagent test.
G. “Visual/Physical Comparison,” as used in this procedure, means the preliminary identification of a controlled substance or dangerous drug using an officer’s best judgment based on their training and experience. In the case of a suspected controlled substance or dangerous drug that is in pill, capsule or tablet form, officers may use the Physician’s Desk Reference (PDR), consult with a pharmacist, or contact the North Texas Poison Center at Parkland Memorial Hospital Poison Center Hotline at 1-800-222-1222.

316.02 Arrests Involving Suspected Violations of the Texas Health and Safety Code
A. All arrests involving suspected violations of the Texas Health and Safety Code will be based upon articulated probable cause.
B. There are basically two different arrest situations for individuals suspected of violating the Texas Health and Safety Code who are in possession of either a controlled substance or dangerous drugs.
1. “Narcotics Only” where no other charges are to be filed or where no other probable cause exists except for the possession of a suspected controlled substance or dangerous drugs.
2. “Narcotics Add Charge” in which an individual is arrested based upon probable cause other than the possession of a suspected controlled substance or dangerous drugs and the Narcotics Charge arises incident to the person’s arrest for charges based on other pre-existing probable cause.
C. “Narcotics Only” Arrests
An individual may be detained based upon reasonable belief that he may have violated the law or be detained in the course of an ongoing investigation.
1. Officers will keep all current applicable laws and policies regarding arrest, search and seizure in the forefront of any “Narcotics Only” arrest. If there are any questions or concerns regarding current case law on search and seizure, officers will contact a supervisor for guidance.
2. Arresting officers will always request a supervisor to the location where testing of a suspected controlled substance or dangerous drug will result in a “Narcotics Only” possession charge. A trained supervisor will conduct the presumptive field test. If the only supervisor available is not trained, he/she will witness the test conducted by another trained member who will be called to the scene.
3. In the event that a patrol officer comes in contact with a suspect possessing a large quantity of a controlled substance or dangerous drugs an on-duty field supervisor should be contacted. The on-duty field supervisor will then contact an on-call Narcotics Division supervisor for further instruction or to determine if a Narcotics Division response is required at the scene.
4. A trained member of the department will conduct the “Presumptive Field Test” according to standards established in departmental Standard Operating Procedures.
5. Positive Presumptive Field Test
a. If the results of a Presumptive Field Test indicate the presence of a controlled substance, adult suspects will be arrested and transported to the Lew Sterrett Justice Center.
b. If the individual is a juvenile, he/she will be transported to the Youth Operations Unit.
c. All related evidence, including the Presumptive Field Test checklist, will be processed at either the Lew Sterrett Justice Center, where it will be placed into the Drug Evidence lock box, or will be transported to the Property Section for disposition.
d. The appropriate criminal charges will be filed against the arrestee.
6. Inconclusive Presumptive Field Test
a. If the results of a Presumptive Field Test are inconclusive, the substance in question will be seized and will be placed into evidence at either the Lew Sterrett Justice Center or the Property Section.
b. The Presumptive Field Test checklist will be included with the evidence.
c. Officers will complete a “Found Property” offense report and will list all information concerning the suspect, the circumstances where the incident occurred, and the property tag information.
d. Officers will indicate in the “Comments” section of the Drug Evidence Tag whether the substance should be sent to the lab for further testing.
7. Officers will make a visual/physical comparison as a means of identifying a suspected controlled dangerous drug.
8. In order to accurately identify a dangerous drug or controlled substance that is in pill, tablet or capsule form, officers may use the Physician’s Desk Reference (PDR) located in the report writing area of the Lew Sterrett Justice Center, consult with a pharmacist, or contact the North Texas Poison Center at Parkland Memorial Hospital Poison Center Hotline at 1-800-222-1222.
9. Officers should note in the officer’s comment section of the arrest report the method used to make an identification.
D. “Narcotics Add Charge” Arrests
1. When an individual is arrested on other charges and a controlled substance or dangerous drugs are found incident to the arrest, officers will arrest the individual and may add violations of the Texas Health and Safety Code as additional charges.
2. Adult individuals who are being arrested for charges other than narcotics will be transported to the Lew Sterrett Justice Center for booking and evidence processing.
3. Juveniles who are being arrested for charges other than narcotics will be transported to the Youth Operations Unit for booking.
4. In the case of an adult prisoner, officers will book the individual according to the standing policies in effect at the Lew Sterrett Justice Center.
5. In the case of a juvenile prisoner, officers will book the individual according to the standing policies in effect at the Youth Operations Unit.
6. After booking, arresting officers will take suspected controlled substances or dangerous drugs to the Field Testing area of the jail or Youth Operations, where a trained member of the department will conduct the “Presumptive Field Test” according to standards established in the Narcotics Division Standard Operating Procedures.
7. Positive Presumptive Field Test.
a. If the results of a Presumptive Field Test are positive to indicate the presence of a controlled substance, the appropriate criminal charge will be filed.
b. All related evidence, including the Presumptive Field Test checklist will be processed at either the Lew Sterrett Justice Center, where it will be placed into the Drug Evidence lock box, or transported to the Property Section. No evidence will be left at the Youth Operations Unit.
c. Officers will note in the arrest report the results of all Presumptive Field Tests.
8. Inconclusive Presumptive Field Test
a. If the results of the Presumptive Field Test are inconclusive, the arresting officer will complete a “Found Property” Offense Report.
b. The Presumptive Field Test checklist and the substance will be placed into the Drug Evidence lock box, or transported to the Property Section for disposition. No evidence will be left at the Youth Operations Unit.
c. Officers will note in the arrest report the results of all Presumptive Field Tests, and in the case of an inconclusive test, will reference the “Found Property” Offense Service Number and detail the circumstances surrounding the seizure of the substance from the arrestee.
d. Officers will indicate in the “Comments” section of the Drug Evidence Tag whether the substance should be sent to the lab for further testing.

316.03 Stocking of Reagent Field Test Kits
A. The Narcotics Division will be responsible for maintaining an adequate supply of field testing kits and for the distribution of these supplies to all other departmental units.
B. The Quartermaster Unit of the Equipment and Procurement Section will maintain a Price Agreement for the purchase of approved field testing supplies and will acquire them upon request by the Commander of the Narcotics Division.
C. Other departmental units can obtain a supply of kits by routing a request directly to the Commander of the Narcotics Division.

Dallas Police Department General Order

317.00 Officer Involved Shootings or Other Critical Incidents Resulting in Serious Injury or Death

Revised 02/14/2025


317.00 INVESTIGATIONS OF OFFICER INVOLVED SHOOTINGS OR OTHER CRITICAL INCIDENTS RESULTING IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
A. Purpose: When a City of Dallas employee becomes involved in an incident in which either the employee or another person is seriously injured or killed, or where a death or serious injury occurs to a person in police custody, two different investigations will be conducted. A criminal investigation will be conducted by the investigative unit having responsibility for the offense and an administrative investigation will be conducted by the Internal Affairs Division. Investigations will be conducted as outlined in the sections that follow.
B. Definitions:
1. Involved Employee: A sworn or professional staff member of the Dallas Police Department, Dallas Security Officer, Dallas City Marshal, Dallas Arson Investigator, or any other City of Dallas employee that uses force while acting within the scope of employment that results in serious injury or death.
2.     Witness Employee: A sworn or professional staff member of the Dallas Police Department, Dallas Security Officer, Dallas City Marshal, Dallas Arson Investigator, or any other City of Dallas employee that, while acting within the scope of employment, witnesses a critical incident involving an Involved Employee, or is present at the incident location during the event. The following list provides examples to evaluate a Witness Employee’s involvement; however, it is not exhaustive and may vary depending on the specifics of each case:
a. Administering First Aid
b. Witness to actions immediately preceding or following the incident that may be pertinent to the investigation
c. Witness to statements made prior to or following the incident that may be relevant to the investigation
3. Serious injury: Bodily injury that creates a substantial risk of death or that causes death, serious permanent disfigurement, or protracted loss or impairment of the function of any bodily member or organ.
4. Companion officer: An officer chosen by the involved employee to offer a supportive role, who is not involved in the incident.
5. Assigned Investigative Unit: depending on the incident, the unit that assumes full investigative responsibility for the criminal investigation.
6. DPD Critical Incident: A shooting or use of force incident involving a sworn member of the Dallas Police Department that results in serious bodily injury (as defined in Chapter 37 of the Dallas City Code), or death.

317.01 Assigned Investigative Unit
A. The Special Investigations Unit (SIU) of the Criminal Investigations Group will be the assigned investigative unit any time an officer discharges their firearm (except during firearms qualifications and training).
1. The Special Investigations Unit will conduct a criminal investigation and produce a shooting summary when, in the City of Dallas, an involved employee is:
a. Seriously injured or killed in the performance of police-related duties.
b. Is fired upon but not injured.
c. Any other person is seriously injured or killed as a result of a firearms discharge or use of any physical force by an involved employee acting in the performance of police-related duties or within the scope of employment while on or off duty.
d. A person is seriously injured or dies while in the custody of Dallas police officers and city marshals except as outlined below in Section B.
e. An investigation will be done when a person is seriously injured or killed as a result of a firearms discharge or use of physical force by any local, state or federal law enforcement agent when working with Dallas Police employees, except those incidents occurring within jail facilities.
2. The Special Investigations Unit will not assume primary investigative responsibility for incidents occurring outside the jurisdiction limits of the City of Dallas. The Special Investigations Unit will offer assistance when requested by the agency having jurisdiction and with approval of the Criminal Investigations Group Commander. In all cases, primary responsibility for filing criminal charges and making presentations to the Grand Jury will remain with the agency having jurisdiction.
3. The Special Investigations Unit of the Criminal Investigations Group will respond to all firearm discharges. If there is no criminal culpability determined, the incident does not result in physical injury or property damage, the investigation will be referred to the Internal Affairs Division for follow-up.
B. The Traffic Unit will be the assigned investigative unit when, in the City of Dallas, any person is seriously injured or killed as a result of a motor vehicle accident with an involved employee acting within the scope of employment while on or off duty.

317.02 Initial Response
A. Involved Employee and Witness Employee responsibilities:
1. Immediately notify the dispatcher if involved in any of the above incidents or upon becoming aware of an incident involving another law enforcement agency within the City of Dallas.
2. Immediately care for any injured persons.
3. Request necessary assistance.
4. Secure the scene
5. Separate witnesses.
6. Do not discuss the incident beyond that necessary to secure the scene prior to the arrival of the first patrol supervisor.
7. Relate an account of the incident only to the first arriving supervisor to ensure public safety and scene containment.
8. If not injured, and extenuating circumstances do not exist, stay at the scene until discharged by the assigned investigative unit.
9. Participate in walk-through.
10. Respond to the investigative offices for a debriefing interview and statement.
B. Companion Employee responsibilities:
1. Respond to the scene; the investigation may begin before arrival.
2. Serve in a supportive role during the subsequent events.
3. Provide as much support and concern for the employee as possible.
4. Refrain from discussing the details of the incident.
5. Assist involved employee make transportation or other arrangements.
6. May later be called to testify.
C. Dispatcher responsibilities:
1. Immediately send a patrol supervisor to the scene and begin notification of the appropriate divisions and personnel according to the Communications Group S.O.P.
2. Fulfill involved employee’s requests for necessary assistance.
D. The first Patrol Supervisor at the scene (not involved in the incident) shall be responsible for the following responsibilities:
1. Immediately respond to the scene.
2. Ensure the scene is secured to include assuring necessary assistance is enroute and restricting access to the incident scene using tape or other methods.
3. Remove and restrict unauthorized personnel from scene.
4. Separate involved employees and witnesses and instruct them not to discuss the incident prior to arrival of detectives.
5. Attempt to obtain an account of the incident from involved employees and provide the investigative supervisor with the notes taken at the scene and subsequently remove the involved employee a short distance from the scene.
6.     Once outside the scene, collect the body cameras from the involved employees and witness officers. employees. a. Confirm that each body camera has ceased recording. If any camera is still recording, promptly end the recording. b. “Power Off” each body camera, ensuring no further recordings can occur on the device. c. Maintain secure custody of the body cameras until a representative from the Body Camera / Video Integration and Technology Team arrives on scene and takes possession of the devices.
7. Telephone the Communications Division and provide a brief account of the incident.
8. Ensure the following division personnel are advised of the incident and request the following resources to respond to the scene immediately:
a. Special Investigations Unit (who will be responsible for the notification of the Dallas County District Attorney’s Office)
b. Crime Scene Response Unit
c. Internal Affairs Division
d. Public Information Office
e. Body Camera / Video Integration and Technology Team
9. Assign an employee to record the names of all employees at the scene including all additional employees arriving to assist in securing the scene, investigate the incident, or provide support for involved employees. A single-entry point into the restricted area should be established, if possible, and notes will be made of those employees who entered the restricted areas.
10. Stay at the scene until the scene is secured, all physical evidence is collected, and all personnel are removed, or until relieved by assigned investigative unit.
11. Refer all media inquiries to the assigned investigative unit.
12. Upon the arrival of the assigned investigative unit, the patrol supervisor shall respond to the needs of the investigating officer or supervisor by continuing to secure the incident scene and keeping unauthorized persons out.
13. Respond to the assigned investigative unit offices for a debriefing interview and statement.
E. Cover Officer responsibilities
1. Do not go to the scene of the incident without the approval of the dispatcher or supervisor who is assigned. Only personnel necessary to the criminal or administrative investigation, securing of the scene, and the involved employee's chain-of-command should respond to the scene.
2. Check en route and Code-6 with the dispatcher of the patrol channel involved.
3. Do not leave the scene without notifying the assigned supervisor of their name and badge number.
4. Make notes on significant observations at the scene for later personal reference.
5. Do not make evaluative or judgmental comments about the employee's actions or justification to members of the media.
F. Crime Scene Response Section responsibilities
1. Upon arrival, assume control and responsibility of the crime scene area.
2. Coordinate all functions or requests related to the crime scene area.
3. Ensure that only Crime Scene Response Section personnel and essential investigative personnel are admitted to the restricted area until the Crime Scene Response Section investigation is deemed complete.
4. Perform crime scene investigation.
5. Participate in the walk-through when appropriate.
G. Assigned Investigative Unit responsibilities
1. The ranking supervisor from the investigating division will be in command of the criminal investigation.
2. Upon arrival at the scene, be briefed by the field supervisor.
3. Coordinate media inquiries between the first patrol supervisor and the Public Information Office.
4. Perform walk-through.
5. Perform Interview at investigative office
H. Public Information Office responsibilities
1. Send a representative who will be responsible for coordinating media inquiries.
2. Coordinate with the assigned investigative unit and prepare a summary of the facts of the case for issuance to the news media.
3. Issue a summary to the media when the results of the departmental investigation are completed.
I. Other Responding Personnel
1. A member of the involved employee's chain-of-command should respond to the scene to offer support and assistance but shall not discuss the details of the incident.
2. The involved employee's supervisor or other personnel shall not enter restricted areas or discuss the incident with involved employees prior to completion of the debriefing interview and taking of statements in the investigating offices.
3. A member of the involved employee’s chain of command shall initiate a request for control number.

317.03 Walk-Through
A. After the completion of the Crime Scene Response Section investigation or when approved by the Crime Scene Response Section supervisor, the assigned investigative unit detective and Internal Affairs detective will conduct a walk-through of the incident with involved employee and witness employee(s). To prevent possible contamination of the crime scene, the walk-through should be led by Crime Scene Response Section personnel. The portion of the walk- through that is conducted in the restricted areas of the scene shall be limited to:
1. The assigned investigative unit.
2. The involved employee (1).
3. The involved employee’s attorney (1).
4. The Internal Affairs detective (1).
5. The Crime Scene Response Section personnel (1).
6. Any other personnel deemed necessary to the investigation by the assigned investigative unit.
B. Prior to providing a statement to the assigned investigative unit, a walkthrough will be conducted with the above personnel to obtain preliminary information. Immediately after the walk-through the involved employee(s), witness employee(s), and the first responding patrol supervisor will report to the assigned investigative unit office where an interview will be conducted.
C. A separate, additional walk-through will be conducted with the District Attorney’s Office that does not include any involved employees or witnesses.

317.04 Interview and Investigative Procedures
A. Immediately following the walk through and upon arriving at the assigned investigative unit office, involved employee(s), witness employee(s) and the first responding patrol supervisor will be requested to provide a written statement.
1. All body worn camera or video evidence will be made available to the involved employee(s) and legal counsel prior to the submission of any written statement.
2. Witness employee(s) will also be afforded the opportunity to review video, however they are not afforded legal counsel.
B. After the conclusion of the preliminary investigation at the investigative office, the involved employee(s) and witness employee(s) will be afforded a Critical Incident Recovery Period of a minimum of five (5) administrative days. Additional Administrative Leave may be granted by recognized authority. During the Critical Incident Recovery period, the involved employee(s) or witness employee(s) may contact the lead detective to provide supplemental information to the original statement. Likewise, the lead detective could also develop additional questions thereby requiring a supplemental statement from the involved or witness employees. Legal counsel may be present during the subsequent interview of involved employee(s). The investigating supervisor will provide involved and witness employee(s) with a private place to prepare all written statements.
C. The investigating detective shall request employees to submit a voluntary blood specimen in a police shooting in which an individual is killed or injured.
D. The assigned investigative unit commander is responsible for preparing a preliminary executive summary to the command staff before the end of their tour of duty. Additional summaries will be created for distribution to the rank and file of the police department and the public thru the Public Information Office.
E. The assigned investigative unit is responsible for keeping the involved employee's Bureau, Group, or Unit Commander informed on the condition of critically injured victims and the status of the Grand Jury hearing. The assigned investigative unit will assure that the involved employee is fully informed on the status of the case.

317.05 Post Incident Management
A. Prior to leaving the scene or before being relieved from the current shift, involved employees will be given peer support contact information as well as Medical Officer On Call contact information.
B.     Within Seven days following a critical incident, involved employees will attend a mandatory screening by Psychological Services. This screening will provide employees with basic education and coping skills, which may include available treatment options. This contact will take place prior to the employee’s participation in reality-based training.
C. After completion of the screening, employees will report to the quartermaster for weapon reissue and to the firearms training center for requalification (if applicable). 
D. Psychological Services will meet with involved employees prior to attending reality-based training.
E. Return to full duty
1. Until an employee is cleared to return to full duty, the Chief of Police (or designee) will assign additional administrative leave or a restricted duty work assignment appropriate to the involved employee’s capabilities.
2. An involved employee’s return to full duty will be determined by the Chief of Police after an administrative review and consultation with involved employee’s Assistant Chief. 

317.06 Administrative Investigation
A. The Internal Affairs Division will be called to the scene of any discharge of a firearm by a Dallas police officer. At the point when the assigned investigative unit determines that existing evidence presently indicates a likelihood of no criminal culpability by the involved employee who did, or may have caused, serious injury or death of another person, such employee will be instructed to report to the Internal Affairs Division at a time to be determined by the Internal Affairs detective.
B. In the case where the Special Investigations Unit of the Investigations Division does not assume responsibility for the investigation, the Internal Affairs Division will conduct an administrative investigation and produce a shooting summary. Internal Affairs must receive a Request for Control Number signed by an involved employee’s assistant chief. The Internal Affairs Division will conduct an administrative investigation in any of the cases listed in Section 317.01A.1.a, c, and e, which occur inside or outside the Dallas city limits.
C. Officers accidentally discharging a firearm that does not result in physical injury, or property damage, will be placed on Restricted Duty and given a modified work assignment at the direction of their Assistant Chief. Officers will then be required to attend and pass an 8-hour remedial firearms training class provided by the Firearms Training Center before performing any armed police related duty. The Firearms Training Center will make it a priority to provide this training to the officer in a timely manner. The Firearms Training Center will provide a memorandum to the respective Assistant Chief of Police stating the officer has successfully completed the training.
D. In cases where only an administrative investigation is conducted, the ranking Internal Affairs Division detective will be in charge of the overall investigation.
E. In addition to the involved officer being placed on Restricted Duty, witness officers to a death-in-custody incident or a shooting that leads to death or any incident that results in serious physical injury of an individual may be placed by his or her Division Commander on administrative hours of 8:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. If placed on those hours, they will work that schedule until the conclusion of the internal investigation or until released by Internal Affairs to return to regular duty hours. The purpose of the administrative hours schedule is to facilitate the completion of the internal investigation.
F. While on Restricted Duty or administrative hours, all leave time previously approved for involved or witness officers must be coordinated with the Internal Affairs Division detective and his or her supervisor.
G. When the involved officer and any witness officers subsequently report to the Internal Affairs Division, the investigating detective will issue an Administrative Warning and separate interviews will be conducted. These interviews may be audio recorded, and if so, two tapes will be made with one being provided to the officer at the conclusion of the interview. A transcript of the interview will serve as the officer's Internal Statement. In such cases, the officer will be required to report at a later date to review and sign a copy of the transcript. The officer will be provided a copy of the transcript. The officer may also be subsequently required to submit a detailed written Internal Statement of the event.
H. The Internal Affairs Division will determine if the use of force was justified by the orders of this Department. The findings of the investigation will be summarized in a Special Report to the Chief of Police.
I. Upon completion of the Internal Affairs investigation, the report will be forwarded to the officer's Organizational Commander for chain-of-command review. A copy will also be forwarded to the Firearms Discharge Review Chairman.

317.07 Firearms Discharge Review Team (FDRT)
A. The Firearms Discharge Review Team is established to review and provide an initial evaluation, based on facts known at the time, of incidents of intentional and accidental firearm discharge by any member of the Dallas Police Department. They will also review other incidents as requested by the Chief of Police. The main purpose will be to prevent similar situations from occurring in the future. Incidents occurring while members are acting within the scope of their employment with the City of Dallas, either on or off duty will be subject to review.
B. The objective of the Firearms Discharge Review is to brief the Chief of Police and the Director of the Office of Community Police Oversight (OCPO) concerning firearms discharge or other incidents as ordered by the Chief of Police based on the following:
1. Adequacy of policy.
2. Adequacy of training.
3. Adequacy of equipment.
4. Adequacy of supervision.
C. The Firearms Discharge Review Team
1. Will be comprised of the following members:
a. A major designated by the Chief of Police to serve as the FDRT chairperson.
b. A lieutenant from the Special Investigations Unit.
c. A lieutenant from the Internal Affairs Division.
d. A lieutenant from the In-Service Training staff, and the Departmental Range Master.
e. If the above members are not available, substitutions will be made by the respective Division Commanders.
2. Will meet to discuss the incident when called by the FDRT chairperson.
3. Will only be concerned with adequacy of issues listed in 371.06 (B) and not procedural violations.
4. Will be prepared to brief the Chief of Police and the Director of the Office of Community Police Oversight within 72-hours of the incident.
5. Will provide a final review after all criminal and administrative investigations of the incident are completed.

317.08 DPD Critical Incident Monitoring by Director of Office of Community Police Oversight
A. The Chief of Police shall provide the Community Police Oversight Board and the Director of the Office of Community Police Oversight timely notification of all DPD critical incidents.
B. The Director of the Office of Community Police Oversight may monitor the criminal investigation of any DPD Critical Incident.
1. The Director may attend or observe any portion of the on-scene investigation.
2. The Director may participate in preliminary briefings relating to the DPD critical incident.
3. The Director may observe witness interviews (from a separate room).
4. The Director may review documentary and physical evidence, including relevant police data, of any criminal investigation of a DPD Critical Incident.
5. The Director may meet with the Chief of Police throughout the criminal investigation to ask questions and discuss any areas of concern identified while monitoring the investigation.
6. Before the conclusion of a criminal investigation of a DPD Critical Incident, the Director may meet with the Chief of Police to hear preliminary findings and provide feedback about the investigatory process. The Director may provide the Chief of Police with a recommendation on the outcome of the criminal investigation.
7. The Media Relations Unit will provide the Director with a copy of any publicly released video recording related to a DPD Critical Incident.

Dallas Police Department General Order

318.00 Booking Procedures

Revised 02/17/2017


318.00 BOOKING PROCEDURES
318.01 Booking Procedures for Adults
A. All prisoners, with the exception of juveniles, seriously injured persons, and arrests where Public Intoxication and/or Class C warrants issued out of Dallas or other jurisdictions is/are the only charge(s), will be taken to the Lew Sterrett Justice Center for processing. Booking procedures for the three exceptional categories are:
1. Juveniles will be taken to the Youth Operations Unit.
2. Attending paramedics of the Dallas Fire Department's Emergency Medical Services Division will determine to which medical facility a critical care (i.e. seriously injured or ill) prisoner should be transported.
3. Arrests where Public Intoxication and/or Class C warrants issued out of Dallas or other jurisdictions must be processed through the Public Inebriate Detention Center.
B. All other adult charges, including Holds for Dallas Sheriff’s officer, will be processed at the Lew Sterrett Justice Center.
C. All reports and paperwork involving an arrested person taken to the Lew Sterrett Justice Center or the City Detention Center must be approved by a supervisor and completed before the officer(s) can leave the facility.

318.02 Establishing Age as an Adult or Juvenile
A. When a person who appears to be a juvenile is taken into custody but has no identification and claims to be seventeen or older, the officer will:
1. Take the person to the Youth Operations Unit or contact them by telephone.
2. Request a record check to ascertain the person's age.
a. If the arrestee has a Techshare picture, the arresting officer will view this picture and state in the officer comments section of the arrest report that the person pictured is the arrestee.
b. If the arrestee has Techshare fingerprints, the arresting officer will have the arrestee LiveScan’d and state in the officer comments section of the arrest report that the fingerprints are the arrestee’s.
c. If Youth Operations Unit records do not establish age, the Youth Operations Unit will assist the arresting officer in using other available sources to ascertain age. List any source that establishes age in the officer comments section of the arrest report.
3. If age is not verified:
a. Inform the reviewing supervisor that the arrestee claims adulthood but does not have identification and Youth Operations files cannot establish age nor has LiveScan or another source established age.
b. Include the above information in the arrest report along with the name and badge number of the Youth Operations Unit detective who performed the record check and the arrestee's Techshare number if one exists.
B. The reviewing supervisor will ensure that the required information is included in the arrest report before it is approved.

318.03 Citizen Information Regarding Juvenile Booked as an Adult
A. When a citizen informs departmental personnel that a juvenile has been booked as an adult, the citizen will be directed to a Detention Services supervisor.
B. The supervisor will verify the subject in question is being held in the jail. The supervisor will attempt to ascertain the correct age from any means available within the youth criminal justice system. If the supervisor is able to establish the fact the subject is a juvenile, he/she will notify the Youth Operations Unit along with the arresting officers (if available) or the division the juvenile was arrested. The division will be responsible for transporting and completion of the juvenile arrest report in Techshare.
C. When the status of the subject is questionable, processing will be handled in accordance with the Detention Services Section S.O.P. that will be available for reference.
D. The Detention Services supervisor will request that the on-duty magistrate at the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center conduct a hearing and rule as to whether the prisoner is an adult or a juvenile. If the judge rules the suspect is a juvenile, the supervisor will contact the Youth Operations Unit along with the arresting officers (if available) or the division the juvenile was arrested. The division will be responsible for transporting and completion of the juvenile arrest report in Techshare. If the magistrate rules the subject is an adult, the subject will be returned to jail.
E. When it is determined that a juvenile has been placed in the Dallas County Jail as an adult, a Detention Services supervisor will be notified and will be responsible for correcting the juvenile's Arrest Report according to the Detention Services Section S.O.P.
F. All legal forms and documents necessary for the court hearing will be handled in accordance with the Detention Services Section S.O.P.

318.04 Booking Procedures for Juveniles
A. Procedures for charging juveniles with offenses and routine booking procedures are contained in Section 314.00.
B. All reports and paperwork involving an arrested juvenile taken to any detention center must be approved by a Youth Operations Unit detective and completed before the officer(s) can leave the facility.

Dallas Police Department General Order

319.00 Voluntary Surrender of Wanted Persons

Revised 01/30/2017


319.00 VOLUNTARY SURRENDER OF WANTED PERSONS
A. When a criminal suspect in either a misdemeanor or felony case voluntarily surrenders himself or herself to the Dallas Police Department, a warrant of arrest is not necessary.
B. Prior to booking the suspect into a jail facility, the officer will obtain the service number of the incident or verify the need to hold the suspect for another agency.
C. The suspect will be booked into jail for the charge for which the individual is wanted and a reference made on the Arrest Report to the verification of the need to hold the suspect.
D. The agency where the offense occurred (other than Dallas) should be advised to send a teletype to the Dallas County Sheriff's Office - Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center, verifying the need to hold the suspect.

Dallas Police Department General Order

320.00 Criminal Case Filing Procedures

Revised 03/27/2019


320.00 CRIMINAL CASE FILING PROCEDURES
320.01 General Provisions
A. All officers processing (filing) criminal cases and/or obtaining arrest warrants will adhere to the guidelines set forth in the Legal Services Unit RMS Investigative SOP and the Legal Services Unit RMS Procedure Manual.
B. Any officer of the Department, upon approval by a supervisor, may obtain an arrest warrant.
C. All arrest warrants will be obtained by following the procedures established in the Criminal Case Filing Manual distributed by the Legal Services Section.
D. The officer originating a probable cause affidavit for an arrest warrant (either personally processing the documents or preparing the documents for another officer to process) will be responsible for checking all departmental records which might reflect a change in status of the case and/or the suspect for whom a warrant is being sought.
E. This procedure does not apply to lunacy warrants.

320.02 Reduction of Cases Filed in Misdemeanor County Courts
Officers will not file the following:
A. Carrying a Prohibited Weapon if Armed Robbery is filed from the same incident.
B. Resisting Arrest when Assault on a Police Officer is filed.

320.03 Criminal Trespass Offenses
A. These cases will be filed in County Criminal Courts only.
B. Misdemeanor citations may be issued in appropriate cases in lieu of custodial arrest. If a citation is issued, the complainant's name and the facts of the offense must be detailed on the back of the citation.
C. This offense will be filed as a Class B except in either of the following situations when it will be filed as Class A:
1. The offense is committed in a habitation or a shelter center.
2. The actor carries a deadly weapon during the commission of this offense.

320.04 Cases Filed With the Municipal Court
A. Only Class C misdemeanors (as defined in the Penal Code) and Class C "type" misdemeanors (i.e., traffic and City Ordinance violations) will be filed with the Municipal Court. Any exception must be documented and is subject to acceptance by the Municipal Court.
B. Cases may be filed with the Municipal Court:
1. When the full (first and last) name of the suspect is known.
2. When the address of the suspect is unknown, but only if enough information is provided (name, race, sex, date of birth) so that the suspect can be entered on the NCTCIC computer system. An exception is that a name and address are necessary to file assault cases.
3. When they involve a juvenile (Ages 10-16) charged with a traffic violation other than DWI. All non-traffic and DWI offenses involving juveniles will be filed with the Dallas County Juvenile Court through the Youth Operations Unit.

320.05 Referring Complainants to the City Prosecutor's Office
A. A complainant will be instructed to file his/her own Class C misdemeanor with the City Prosecutor's office when any of the following apply:
1. The complainant is intoxicated to the degree that he/she is not in control of his/her faculties.
2. The complainant is obviously mentally deranged.
3. The officer has reason to believe that the offense did not actually occur.
B. When referring citizens to the City Prosecutor's office to file their own case, officers will advise citizens of the City Prosecutor's office location (Room 206, 2014 Main Street, hours - 8:30 a.m. - 4:30 p.m.).
C. Under no circumstance will an officer inform the complainant as to the Municipal Court's anticipated action. The officer should only inform the citizen that any questions will be referred to the City Prosecutor's office.

320.06 Cases Filed with the County Prosecutor’s Office via Citation
A. When a citation is issued for M/B offenses allowed in G.O. 313.03, the responsibility of filing the initial paperwork resides with the Patrol Investigative Unit where the citation was turned in.
B. The Investigative Unit will complete the following steps prior to forwarding the paperwork to Legal Services Unit.
1. Ensure that a copy of the offense report is attached to the original citation and that the citation is completely filled out.
2. Attach an unsigned warrant to the affidavit.
3. Prepare a prosecution report.
4. Obtain estimates for any damage incurred by the complainant.
5. Forward the above information with a filing cover sheet that is stamped “CITATION ISSUED” to Legal Services Unit within 10 calendar days of the issue date on the citation.
C. If the offense is direct file, then the Investigative Unit will only complete steps 1 and 5 of the above procedures and forward the packet to the Legal Services Unit for filing. The Legal Services Unit will be responsible for completing steps 2 and 3.
D. If the assigned investigator determines that a citation should not have been issued, then the citation should be voided according to current Patrol SOP and both the complainant and arrestee notified of the actions taken. The original offense report should be supplemented with the final disposition.

Dallas Police Department General Order

321.00 Evidence and Property

Revised 09/27/2022


321.00 EVIDENCE AND PROPERTY
321.01 Processing Procedures
A. The processing of property/evidence collected, recovered, found, seized, or entrusted will be governed as delineated below.
B. All property and evidence will be packaged and labeled in accordance with Department policies and procedures. The proper packaging and labeling method is outlined in the Property Unit Packaging Manual. A copy of the manual will be maintained at each Patrol Division, Lew Sterrett Justice Center, under the Resources tab on the Dallas Police Department Intranet page, the Crime Scene Response Section, and the Property Unit. The Property Unit is responsible for updating packaging requirements with the concurrence of the Crime Scene Response Section.
C. The general policy of the Department is to release property/evidence at the scene of an incident to the complainant/owner whenever practical, except as provided below. The intent of this policy is to avoid unnecessary waste of patrol time by trips to and from property storage facilities; reduce unnecessary inventorying, storage, and disposal of property; provide for adequate control and accountability for property and evidence; and to be more responsive to crime victims by expedient return of their property. In all cases, property/evidence must be properly disposed of, as delineated in this section, by the end of an employee’s tour of duty.
D. In general, the following categories of property/evidence will be released to the owner/complainant in the field upon reasonable identification.
1. Property/evidence related to burglary and theft offenses that belong to the complainant.
2. Recovered motor vehicles will be released to the owner in the field (after fingerprinting, etc., when appropriate). If a vehicle is impounded, the Auto Pound Unit S.O.P., which will be posted at applicable facilities, will be followed.
3. Property/evidence related to Municipal Court offenses (all City cases) will be released to the complainant whenever possible.
4. Property/evidence related to Criminal Mischief or Reckless Damage offenses will be released to the complainant or simply left at the scene.
E. Found property items that meet all of the following criteria, may be left at the scene for the finder to dispose of unless the item is creating a specific hazard and no alternative to impoundment exists:
1. Property has no apparent evidentiary value,
2. Has low or no monetary value,
3. Appears to have been discarded, and
4. There is a low likelihood the item could be returned to an owner.
5. Public Works, Street Operations, or Sanitation Services may be called to make disposal when appropriate.
6. Found property that is drugs, guns, money, contraband, official identification or financial instruments, such as checkbooks and credit cards, will not be left at the scene.
F. When no alternative exists to the general field release policy (i.e. owner/complainant cannot be immediately located) items may be deposited at a storage facility in accordance with this General Order.
G. Documentation of Field Release - When property/evidence is released to an owner/complainant in the field or left at the scene, the action will be fully documented in the applicable Offense Report or Arrest Report if no Offense Report is made.
H. Exceptions to the General Release Policy - The following items are exceptions to the general policy of releasing property/evidence at the scene. These items will be impounded pending court order or released by the assigned detective or field officer, when applicable:
1. Illegal weapons.
2. Narcotics/Drugs.
3. Instruments used in a crime of violence.
4. Items requiring a forensic report.
5. Contraband - anything illegal in itself to possess.
6. Forged or counterfeit instruments.
7. Stolen credit cards and bank debit cards.
8. Firearms.
I. Detective Responsibilities - It is the responsibility of the detective assigned to the Offense or Arrest Report related to the impounded property to make a speedy disposition of the item.
1. Holds will be placed on property/evidence within 30 days of the assignment of the Offense or Arrest Report.
2. On evidentiary items other than narcotics/drugs, any hold must be reviewed and renewed by the assigned detective every six months.
3. When practical, the assigned detective will notify the owner/complainant to reclaim any property within ten days. If contact is made with the owner/complainant, the detective will tactfully emphasize that the property will not be retained due to storage limitations.
4. Field officers will not place holds on property/evidence - this is an investigative responsibility as defined in above section “H.” Field officers perceiving a need to hold property should make a notation to that affect in the applicable Offense or Arrest Report for the assigned detective's consideration. Exceptions to this policy are property found in pawn shops (as outlined in General Order Section 321.02 C), FLID and FSRA vehicles, direct file UCW/CPW, and VHSC (Marijuana only) evidence.
J. Property Unit Ongoing Disposal Procedures
1. The Property Unit manager is authorized to cause ongoing disposal (destruction, auction, etc.) of all items stored in the Property Unit as allowed by time limits and requirements established by State law, City Ordinance and the Property Unit SOP.
2. Property Unit supervisors are authorized to initiate ongoing, immediate disposal of articles where common sense and good judgment indicate no legitimate reason to retain certain items (i.e. rocks, beer cans, old clothes, sticks, broken toys, etc.). Such disposals will be documented.
3. Only units with investigative follow-up responsibility can authorize evidence for final disposition. Arresting officers are responsible for authorizing evidence for final disposition if there is no investigative follow-up for the associated offense.
4. Officers will complete a Property & Evidence Disposition Request Card (POL-00864) for property placed at the Property Unit that is:
a. Protective Custody or Prisoner Personal Property.
b. For Found Property that is illegal to possess, officers will mark the box “Dispose of as Authorized by City Ordinance & State Law.”
K. Found Property is defined as:
1. Any Property where the owner is unknown and there is no reasonable expectation of finding an owner and;
2. There is no link to a criminal offense or expectation of developing intelligence from the item.
L. Protective Custody is defined as:
1. Any item where the owner is known and has not been arrested for a criminal offense or;
2. The owner is known and has been arrested for a criminal offense, but the property does not qualify as a personal article such as clothing, backpack, hygiene items, money or other personal articles and;
a. The item is not evidence in a criminal offense and;
b. The circumstances were beyond the owner’s control where the property cannot be released to or secured by the owner such as golf clubs in an arrestee’s impounded vehicle.
M. The marking of and depositing of property/evidence will be accomplished in accordance with the Property Unit and Crime Scene Response Section SOP’s.

321.02 Property and Evidence Requiring Special Procedures
A. Large Items - The Communications Group will be contacted to arrange for transportation of property/evidence too large or heavy for the officer to transport.
B. Firearms
1. Firearms will be handled with extreme care and caution at all times. Firearms should be cleared prior to submission to the Property Unit. If the weapon cannot be safely cleared, the recovering officer will take the weapon to the Firearms Training Center. Firearms Training Center staff will clear the weapon and the recovering officer will then transport the weapon to the Property Unit for processing. If the Firearms Training Center is closed, the recovering officer will transport the weapon to the Property Unit. The officer will notify Property Unit intake personnel the weapon could not be made safe and is loaded. Property Unit personnel will arrange with the Firearms Training Center to unload the weapon.
2. All recovered firearms, except for those recovered by the Crime Scene Response Section, will be delivered directly to the Property Unit Main Storage Facility located at 1725 Baylor Street. Firearms will not be placed at Lew Sterrett Temporary Property/Evidence Storage Locker. Crime Scene Response Section personnel will process, transport, store and submit for testing firearms in accordance with the Crime Scene Response Section SOP.
3. All firearms placed into the Property Unit will be accompanied by an ATF Firearm Tracking Report Form which will be completed by the officer submitting the weapon.
4. The recovering officer is responsible for checking firearms for stolen prior to submitting to the Property Unit. The recovering officer will document the stolen check was conducted on the property tag.
5. If the firearm is reported stolen by another agency, the recovering officer must make an Out of Town Recovered Stolen Firearm report. If the firearm is reported stolen on a Dallas Police Department offense, then a supplement to the original offense report will be completed by the recovering officer.
a. These reports are in addition to any other required offense or arrest report.
b. All case numbers should be listed on the property tag.
C. Property Found in Pawn Shops
1. Property found in pawnshops will be handled by the Property Recovery Squad.
2. If stolen property is located in a pawn shop by any officer other than a Property Recovery Squad detective, that officer will place a written hold on the item, using form POL-00391A, S/N 753-027-750. The officer will give the second copy of the hold order to the pawnbroker and route the original to the Property Recovery Squad.
D. Film Processing Procedures for Convenience Store Cameras
1. When an officer answers a robbery call at a convenience store, the officer will determine if photographic evidence has been obtained by the store cameras.
2. If photographic evidence has been obtained:
a. It is the responsibility of the store management to remove the video evidence from the camera system and to give the film to the officer.
b. It is the responsibility of the officer to place the video into evidence if the Crime Scene Response Section is not called to the scene. The video will be placed in evidence according to the Patrol Operations S.O.P. The Crime Scene Response Section will not be called to the scene for the sole purpose of picking up the video evidence.
c. The reporting officer will state in the Offense Report if photographic evidence was or was not collected. If the video evidence was located on computer equipment and it was not immediately available, this will also be documented in the report.
d. If called to the robbery scene to process other evidence, the Crime Scene Response Section will collect the video evidence.
e. In all cases, the video evidence will be processed by the Crime Scene Response Section and made immediately available for investigative use.
E. Receipt for Evidence Seized as a Result of a Search Warrant - Evidence confiscated as a result of a search warrant will be itemized on a Receipt of Property Form (POL-00391A S/N 753-027-750) and the owner provided a copy. The original will be forwarded to the Records Section for filing.
F. Currency
1. All money will be taken to the Property Unit. Money is defined as U.S. Currency, Foreign Currency and U.S. Currency believed to be counterfeit.
2. Money, regardless of value, collected by the Crime Scene Response Section with forensic evidentiary value will be processed in accordance with the Crime Scene Response Section S.O.P.
3. Money will not be released in the field, unless the following conditions exist:
a. If the money was taken by theft or robbery, it should be released (if possible) to the owner or complainant when either of the following applies:
i. The money is recovered at or near the scene of the offense and the amount recovered corresponds to the amount reported stolen.
ii. There is other evidence reasonably establishing the identification of the recovered money as that belonging to a specific owner or complainant (e.g. serial numbers on bills, marked money, money was recovered in an identifiable money bag or bank bag taken in the theft, etc.).
b. Before the money is released, the reporting officer should count the money and list denominations and serial numbers of all bills wherever possible in the Offense or Arrest Report. As an alternative, bills may be photocopied, and the photocopies submitted on a Property Tag.
c. If an officer who recovers money has any reservations as to the ownership of the money, he/she may place the money in the Property Unit Main Storage Facility and forward a Property & Evidence Disposition Request card to the Detention Services Section with the requirement that the owner execute a Release and Hold Harmless Agreement prepared by an attorney before the money is returned to the claimant. This procedure will protect both the officer and the Department.
4. Found money turned in to the Police Department by a citizen as abandoned or found will be deposited in the treasury of the municipality in accordance with Texas Code of Criminal Procedures, Chapter 18, Art.17; Dallas City Code Section 2-37.2, Authority to sell; Deposit of cash; Dallas Police General Orders, 321.02 Property and Evidence Requiring Special Procedures, and; the Property Unit’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOP),
500.00 Guidelines for Processing Money, 900.00 Guidelines for Investigating Found Property.
a. Unclaimed abandoned and/or found money will be disposed in accordance with Texas Code of Criminal Procedures, Chapter 18, Art.17; Dallas City Code Section 2-37.2, Authority to sell; Deposit of cash; Dallas Police General Orders, 321.02 Property and Evidence Requiring Special Procedures, and; the Property Unit’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOP), 500.00 Guidelines for Processing Money, 900.00 Guidelines for Investigating Found Property.
b. Unclaimed abandoned and/or found money will remain in an unclaimed status for a period of 60 days and then will be delivered for disposition. The 60-day period begins when the Property Unit receives the abandoned and/or found money.
c. The alleged owner of abandoned and/or found money may request from the City the return of the abandoned and/or found money if they can demonstrate ownership as specified in the statute. An investigation is conducted to determine ownership of the money or to preclude any link to criminal activity.
d. Upon identifying ownership, a notice is sent by certified mail to the last known address. Money not claimed after a 90 period will be disposed of in accordance with Texas Code of Criminal Procedures, Chapter 18, Art.17; Dallas City Code Section 2-37.2, Authority to sell; Deposit of cash; Dallas Police General Orders, 321.02 Property and Evidence Requiring Special Procedures, and; the Property Unit’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOP), 500.00 Guidelines for Processing Money, 900.00 Guidelines for Investigating Found Property.
e. If owner is unknown, and money is more than $500, then a notice shall be published in a paper of general circulation. Money not claimed after a 90 period will be disposed of in accordance with Texas Code of Criminal Procedures, Chapter 18, Art.17; Dallas City Code Section 2-37.2, Authority to sell; Deposit of cash; Dallas Police General Orders, 321.02 Property and Evidence Requiring Special Procedures, and; the Property Unit’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOP), 500.00 Guidelines for Processing Money,
900.00 Guidelines for Investigating Found Property.
f. If owner is unknown, and money is under $500, then advertisement in general circulation is not required. Money will remain unclaimed for a period of 60 days and then will be delivered for disposition. The 60-day period begins when the Property Unit receives the abandoned and/or found money.
g. Upon determination of disposition of the abandoned and/or found money, a memorandum will be submitted by the Property Unit for either the return of the funds to the owner or transfer of funds to the City’s General Fund.
5. Recovered stolen money delivered to the Property Unit will be deposited in the treasury of the municipality in accordance with Texas Code of Criminal Procedures, Chapter 18, Art.17; Dallas City Code Section 2-37.2, Authority to sell; Deposit of cash; Dallas Police General Orders, 321.02 Property and Evidence Requiring Special Procedures, and; the Property Unit’s Standard Operating Procedures (SOP), 500.00 Guidelines for Processing Money, 900.00 Guidelines for Investigating Found Property, in the next scheduled deposit if time between the delivery to the Property Unit and the bank deposit allows. The money, however, may be held for a longer period of time if
a. There is a Hold for evidence,
b. The money is subject to civil seizure if linked to illegal narcotics activity,
c. The unit with investigative follow-up requests the money be held to allow speedy return to an identified owner, or
d. The unit with investigative follow-up determines the physical money has evidentiary value that would be destroyed if deposited.
6. Money placed in the Property Unit as evidence will be held pending court order or release of the detective's
Hold.
7. The money that is of collector quality will not be deposited. Once all legal holding requirements are met, it shall be delivered to the Director of Purchasing for sale as other personal property.
G. Alcoholic Beverage Containers
1. When an officer arrests or issues a citation to a person for public intoxication, or for any other alcohol-related Class C misdemeanor or city ordinance violation, he/she will seize any alcoholic beverage in the possession of the person at the time of the arrest or citation.
2. Alcoholic beverage containers seized in accordance with the preceding paragraph will be disposed of as follows:
a. If the person arrested or cited is under 21 years of age, each container, whether opened or unopened, will be poured out and the container properly discarded.
b. If the person arrested or cited is 21 years of age or older, any open container will be poured out and the container properly discarded.
c. If the person is arrested and is 21 years of age or older, any unopened container will be released, with the consent of the person taken into custody, to a third party who is 21 years of age or older; or stored by the police department as prisoner's personal property pending the release of the person in custody.
3. If 24 or more unopened containers of alcoholic beverages are seized from any person who is arrested or cited for any alcohol-related Class C misdemeanor or city ordinance violation, each unopened container will be stored at the Property Unit Main Storage Facility by the Police Department pending a hearing to be held by the municipal court following disposition of the charge for which the person was arrested. The court may order one of the following:
a. The return of the containers of alcoholic beverages to the person from whom they were seized, if the person is 21 years of age or older.
b. The destruction of the alcoholic beverages by the Police Department.
c. Such other disposition as the court deems necessary.
4. DWI Arrests
a. Unless a DWI arrest is related to a felony grade assault/homicide case, no alcoholic beverage containers (with or without contents) will be placed in the Property Room.
b. Items left in the suspect’s vehicle will be listed in the Arrest Report and on the impound ticket. Personal property found in vehicles will be processed according to the Auto Pound Unit Standard Operating Procedure.
5. Large quantities of alcoholic beverages possessed or transported in violation of the Alcoholic Beverage Code and seized as evidence will be placed in the Property Unit Main Storage Facility and disposed of according to the instructions of the court having jurisdiction.
6. Disposition of all opened and unopened containers must be documented in an offense report, arrest report, book-in sheet, or reverse side of an original citation.
H. Prisoner's Personal Property - The handling of prisoner's personal property will be in accordance with the Detention Services S.O.P., which will be posted at applicable locations.
I. Perishable Property
1. Officers who arrest individuals with small amounts of perishable items in their personal possession, which is not evidence, will dispose of the perishable item in one of the following manners:
a. Permit the arrested person to release the perishable property (not evidence) to a responsible third party at the scene.
b. Leave the perishable item in the arrested person’s vehicle if applicable.
c. If no other alternatives exist, the perishable item should be properly discarded in the field.
2. Items of this nature should not be submitted to the Property Unit or taken to Lew Sterrett. Examples of perishable items include but are not limited to the following: sandwiches, chips, and open beverage containers.
J. Return of Driver License and Other Identification - Drivers licenses, other identification and insurance cards unintentionally retained by an officer as the result of a traffic stop, auto accident, or arrest will be returned to the owner as soon as possible.
1. If the owner of the item resides within the city limits of Dallas, the item will be hand-carried to the owner.
2. If the owner resides outside the city of Dallas, the item will be sent to the individual through registered mail by the officer who unintentionally retained the item.
K. Handling Out-of-Town Found or Recovered Stolen Property
1. The Property Unit will notify the unit with investigative follow-up responsibility when property is determined to be stolen property after it has been submitted to the Property Unit Storage Facility.
2. The Property Unit will coordinate the return of stolen recovered firearms. Once the firearm is received, the Property Unit will notify the unit with investigative follow-up responsibility. That unit will have responsibility for supplementing the original offense report and authorizing the final disposition when appropriate.
3. The Property Unit will coordinate the return of found firearms determined to be stolen out of other jurisdictions to the agency with investigative responsibility. Out of town stolen firearms used in a Dallas offense will only be returned to another agency after authorization has been received from the unit with follow-up investigative responsibility.
L. Wet Items Contaminated with Biological Material
1. Wet items contaminated with biological material pose a potential health risk when improperly handled. All precautions outlined in General Order 438 should be taken when handling potentially contaminated items and disposing of equipment used during the collection.
2. Wet biologically contaminated evidence and property will be delivered to the Crime Scene Response Section by the seizing officer or Crime Scene Response Section personnel so that it can be properly dried.
3. Wet biologically contaminated property or evidence will not be placed at the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center or Property Unit.
4. Clothing collected from sexual assault victims who are examined at Parkland Memorial Hospital (PMH) may be deposited in the temporary evidence drop box located at PMH once properly packaged.

321.03 Impounding Vehicles as Evidence
A. The authority of placing a HOLD on vehicles resides with the investigative unit responsible for the follow-up investigation of the offense related to the vehicle. A HOLD should be placed on a vehicle only when being held as evidence in a criminal case.
B. Field Officer Responsibilities
1. Before placing a HOLD on an impounded vehicle, officers will consult with a member of the appropriate investigative unit.
2. Officers must obtain express permission to place a HOLD on the vehicle from the member of the investigative unit with whom they speak.
3. Officers will fill out an IVR/Wrecker Sheet completely and correctly with special emphasis on the following:
a. The approving sergeant’s or detective’s badge number and unit must be placed in the HOLD/DIV box
b. A Case Number for the related offense must be placed in the designated box
c. Information that explains the need for the HOLD must be written in the designated box, located directly under the damage diagram
C. Investigative Unit Responsibilities
1. When a HOLD is authorized, the sergeant or detective that authorizes that HOLD will call the Auto Pound booth, 214-670-7761, provide the case number, their badge number, and specific information on why the HOLD is being authorized. Auto Pound personnel will then enter this information in Impound Manager when the vehicle arrives.
2. Sergeants of investigative units shall review the Auto Pound Holds list for their unit regularly and provide detectives with a list of vehicles on HOLD under that detective’s badge.
3. Detectives shall regularly review the Auto Pound Holds list and release any HOLDs for which they are responsible that are not essential.
4. Detectives shall document the necessity for any HOLDs for which they are responsible every month, by adding comments detailing the status of the related case in Impound Manager.
5. If a case has not resulted in the filing of charges with the District Attorney, HOLDs on vehicles must be released by the assigned detective after:
a. 30 days when the offense is a misdemeanor and a property related crime
b. 45 days when the offense is a felony and a property related crime
c. 45 days when the offense is a misdemeanor and a crime against a person
d. 90 days when the offense is a felony and a crime against a person, unless the offense is a homicide
e. 120 days when the offense is a homicide
6. Sergeants of investigative units will submit a monthly report detailing the number of HOLDs their unit has placed on vehicles and number of HOLDs they released. The same report will detail the need for all HOLDs over 30 days, including the status of the related case.

321.04 Transporting Property/Evidence to Court
A. Property Unit personnel will be responsible for releasing evidence to officers when requested by court.
B. Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt will be given to officers when evidence is checked out for court.
C. If the evidence is retained by the court, the appropriate section of the Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt must be completed by the proper court officer. The form must be returned to the Property Unit the same day the evidence was checked out.
D. If the evidence is not retained by the court, it will be returned to the Property Unit with the Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt the same day it was checked out.
E. In all cases, the Police Department Property Unit Receipt must be returned to the Property Unit on the same day in which evidence is checked out for court.
F. If multiple items are requested by the court and only some of the items are retained. The Police Department Property Unit Receipt should indicate which items were retained. All Police Department Property Unit Receipts and any items not retained by the court will be returned on the same day the items were checked out.

321.05 Processing of Narcotics/Drug Evidence and Narcotics/Drug Found Property
A. Deposit Procedure
1. Drug evidence may be deposited at the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center drug lock box or the Property Unit only.
2. Drug evidence too bulky to be placed in a heat-sealed plastic bag will be delivered to the Property Unit.
3. All items of drug evidence will be logged on the drug evidence log sheet.
4. A complete description of all items contained in the drug evidence bag will be listed on the drug evidence tag.
5. Officers will place the evidence in a heat-sealed plastic bag and place in the drug lock box.
B. Release of Drug Evidence for Court
1. A Drug Evidence Team clerk will be responsible for releasing drug evidence for court and weighing the drugs before release. The weighing will be done in the presence of the officer and the total weight (including container or evidence bag) will be recorded on the bottom of form. The officer and the clerk will initial to confirm the weight entered on the Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt.
2. Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt will be given to officers when drug evidence is checked out for court.
3. If drug evidence is retained by the court, the appropriate section of the Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt must be completed by the proper court officer. The form must be returned to the Property Unit the same day the items were checked out.
4. Drug evidence not retained by the court must be returned to the Property Unit the same day it was checked out with the Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt.
5. Evidence returned to the Property Unit from court must be weighed by the officer, and the total weight of the evidence (including container or drug evidence bag) recorded on the bottom of the Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt. The officer and the clerk will initial to confirm the weight entered on the Dallas Police Department Property Unit Receipt.
6. Evidence will be returned to the Drug Evidence Team or placed in the lock box at the Property Unit when the Drug Evidence Team is not available.
7. In all cases, the Police Department Property Unit Receipt must be returned to the Property Unit on the same day in which evidence is checked out for court.
8. Officers will not accept drug evidence from any court if the package has been opened and not resealed.
a. Officers will request the court employee seal the evidence package, then initial and date across the seal.
b. Upon arrival at the Property Unit, officers will notify a Property Unit clerk that the evidence has been opened and resealed by the Court prior to acceptance.
c. Property Unit clerks will make a note and notify the Drug Team Supervisor.
d. Officers should contact a Property Unit Supervisor immediately if the court employee refuses to seal the evidence package.

321.06 Property and Evidence Placed at the Lew Sterrett Property/Evidence Temporary Storage Locker
A. The following property/evidence will not be placed in the temporary property storage locker at the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center and should be delivered to the Property Unit Main Storage Facility:
1. Firearms and other weapons.
2. Jewelry.
3. Property/evidence contaminated with a biohazard or other substance making it dangerous to handle.
4. Liquids not in its original container with an unbroken seal.
5. Bicycles.
6. Money.
7. Gas powered equipment – Officers may be required to transport gas powered equipment to the Auto Pound after it has been logged in and evaluated by Property Unit personnel.
B. Evidence stored at and removed from the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center (DWI blood samples, general evidence that will fit in a #7 envelope, and narcotics/drugs in sealed plastic bags) will be accomplished in accordance with the Detention Services S.O.P., the Property Unit S.O.P.s, and current procedures. These procedures are posted at the deposit sites and in the various logbooks at the Lew Sterrett Criminal Justice Center.
C. Items placed at Lew Sterrett temporary storage locker must be properly packaged as outlined by the Property/Evidence Packaging Manual. A manual will be maintained at the temporary storage locker.

321.07 Conversion of Property
Texas State Law allows a municipality to use unclaimed property which has come into its possession after certain requirements have been met. This process is known as conversion and is utilized by the Police Department to convert unclaimed property to Departmental use. The following are the procedures for property conversion:
A. An organization unit requesting the conversion of property will submit a memo, signed by deputy chief or higher, to the Property Unit Commander. The memo should include the following information:
1. A brief description of the item(s) needed. The description does not have to be specific but should be descriptive enough to help Property Unit staff to identify items for potential conversion.
2. The Departmental purpose for which the item(s) will be used. If multiple unrelated items are requested, a separate justification is needed for each unrelated item.
B. The Property Unit will keep a list of requests and will notify the requesting unit once an item becomes available. If similar property is requested by multiple units, then a waiting list will be maintained based on the date the request memo is received. However, if an overriding Departmental need exist; the order of requests may be disregarded.
C. The Property Unit will be responsible for forwarding all requests and a list of the requested items to the City Purchasing Agent for final approval. Once the Department receives approval, the requesting Division will be notified by the Property Unit. This notification is a requirement of City Ordinance Section 2-37.3.
D. Once property has been converted, the requesting unit will be allowed to take possession. The Property Unit will forward a memo to the Quartermaster Unit notifying them of the item’s conversion to Department use and which organizational unit took possession.
E. Once property has been converted, it should not be returned to the Property Unit once it is no longer needed. It is the responsibility of organizational unit with possession of the item to dispose of it in accordance with current Department and City policy.

Dallas Police Department General Order

322.00 Citizens Riding Observation

Revised 05/31/2024

322.00 CITIZENS RIDING OBSERVATION
322.01 Authorization for Riding
A. Watch Commanders may authorize the following persons to ride observation:
1. Citizens.
2. Other law enforcement officers.
3. City of Dallas employees who are riding as part of their training (e.g., Police Dispatchers and P.T.O.s).
4. Cadets, Explorers, and Interns.
5. Assistant City Attorneys.
6. Members of the Citizens Review Board.
B. Conditions, Qualifications, and Exceptions
1. Observers may be assigned to ride with either a one-officer or two-officer element.
2. Citizens will generally be permitted to ride observation only once in a twelve-month period. Citizens will be required to submit their request to ride at least seven days in advance of the desired date.
3. Watch Commanders may restrict the number of civilian observers riding during a given shift.
4. Special consideration should be given to those persons currently being processed as police applicants and those interested in a law enforcement career.
5. Civilians under the age of 18 will not be authorized to ride observation unless participating in a recognized program such as the Cadets, Explorers, or Interns. In addition to approval by a Captain or above, the participant’s parent or legal guardian must also sign a waiver indicating their approval.
6. With Watch Commander approval, other law enforcement officers, City of Dallas employees, Cadets, Explorers, interns, Assistant City Attorneys, members of the Citizens Review Board, and members of the Dallas Citizen Police Academy Alumni Association may ride more than once in a twelve-month period.
7. No officer will be required to have an observer unless directed by a commander (rank of Captain or above).
C. Special Circumstances
1. Observers conducting a survey or study must be authorized by a Captain or above.
2. A citizen who wishes to ride more than once in a twelve-month period must be authorized by a Captain or above.
3. Requests from political office incumbents and candidates will be referred to the respective Assistant Chief/Executive Assistant Director for approval and coordination.
4. Members of the News Media
a. The limitation on the number of times a citizen can ride observation will not apply to members of the news media.
b. Requests from the news media to ride observation must be approved by a Captain or above. Prior to authorization being granted, the approving authority will cause the Media Relations Unit to be consulted. If the request is made outside of normal business hours, the duty officer of the Media Relations Unit will be contacted. If the Media Relations Unit duty officer is unavailable, the Bureau Commander will be contacted.
5. Captains and above have the discretion to authorize exceptions to the requirements of this policy when special circumstances indicate the approval would be in the best interests of the Dallas Police Department.

322.02 Procedures
A. If deemed appropriate by the approving authority, the following checks may be conducted on individuals wishing to ride observation prior to approval being granted:
1. A criminal history check coordinated with the Records Section.
2. An NCIC/TCIC/Regional check to determine if any warrants are outstanding.
3. A driver's license check.
B. Waiver of Liability
1. A Waiver of Liability (Form 70-43R) must be completed by any person authorized to ride observation each time such a ride occurs. The date, watch, name of the officer with whom the person rides, and approving commander's signature will be noted on the form. The form will be maintained at the division in accordance with the Records Retention and Disposition Schedule.
2. Participants in continuing department-sponsored programs will not be required to prepare a new Waiver of Liability form except when the status of data required on the form changes, such as reaching the majority age of 18 years. A Waiver of Liability form will be completed annually at the beginning of the year for participants in such continuing programs.
C. A copy of all Waiver of Liability forms will be routed to the Patrol Bureau. A centralized log or database will be maintained to track the number and location of observation rides throughout the Department. The person acting as the approving authority on citizen observer requests may coordinate with the Patrol Bureau prior to granting approval.
D. Any commander (rank of Captain or above) may prohibit an individual from riding observation. Such prohibition will be documented by memorandum and routed to the Patrol Bureau for log entry and subsequent distribution to divisions within the Patrol Bureau.
E. Each division within the Patrol Bureau will maintain a log of observers previously approved to ride within that division. The log will also contain any memos distributed by the Patrol Bureau, prohibiting specific individuals from riding. This log may be consulted before approval is granted to a request.

322.03 Responsibility of Citizens and Authority of Supervisors
A. Persons riding observation in police vehicles:
1. Will not enter any house, building or other property, public or private, from which the general public would be excluded because of a police incident (e.g., a crime scene), or when the owner of the premises indicates that they cannot enter.
2. Will not enter into any investigation or converse with any witness or prisoner concerning a police incident or investigation.
3. Will not operate or use any police equipment or vehicle or anything in police custody, except in a case of emergency an officer may ask assistance as authorized by law.
B. Will abide by the following dress code:
1. Attire will be business casual or business formal.
2. Persons riding observation will not wear any item of clothing that represents them to be Dallas Police Officers.
3. Law enforcement officers from other jurisdictions may wear their Department approved uniform if they are riding on behalf of their Department while on-duty. Off-duty law enforcement officers from other jurisdictions may wear a generic police jacket or shirt.
4. Persons riding observation will not carry any type of weapon or firearm. This includes persons with a License to Carry Handgun. Officers from other law enforcement agencies may carry a weapon if they are in uniform or a weapon if it is completely concealed from view. If a law enforcement officer from another jurisdiction is armed, they must wear an article of clothing identifying themselves as a police officer.
C. Any interference with police duties or willful noncompliance with instructions, rules, or regulations on the part of observers will terminate the riding observation privilege.
D. Any supervisor, at their discretion, may cause or permit termination of the privilege to ride observation regardless of the origin of the assignment authority when the effectiveness of police operations is deterred.
E. No officer or supervisor's spouse will be allowed to ride observation with him/her. An officer's spouse must ride with a supervisor when riding observation and will be subject to the guidelines of this order.

322.04 Conduct While Riding Observation
A. The assigned officer(s) to the observer will have the responsibility to ensure that the observer obeys all rules and regulations pertaining to their observation.
B. If at any time the observer fails to safely conduct themselves or refuses to abide by the set regulations, the observer will be taken back to the Patrol Station and a supervisor informed.
C. Observers must remain in the police vehicle until the scene is secure on the following type calls:
1. Any felony in the act call.
2. Accident scene until the appropriate lane closures have been made or cones and flares have been placed.
3. Shooting calls.
4. Cutting calls.
5. Assist officer calls.
6. When the comments on the call sheet indicate the use of a deadly weapon or the possibility of the presence of a deadly weapon.
7. Sexual Assault calls: Observers will not be present during the interview of the complainant either in the field, at the hospital, or any other location.
D. Officers will not allow an observer to enter any active crime scene.
E. Observers will not conduct interviews or ask questions of the complainants, witness, or suspects on calls.

Dallas Police Department General Order

323.00 Press Relations

Revised 01/30/2007


323.00 PRESS RELATIONS
323.01 News Media Requirements and Privileges
A. Members of the media must display appropriate press credentials prior to being admitted to restricted areas.
B. Members of the media may not resist, obstruct, or oppose an officer in the lawful execution of his/her duty. However, the mere presence of a newsperson, the taking of pictures, or the asking of questions does not constitute unlawful interference. Officers will refrain from making judgments on the relevancy of reporters' questions.
C. Officers will not restrict movement of newspersons, unless their actions clearly and directly interfere with police operations or investigations.
D. Members of the media are not exempt from any federal, state, or local law. They will be dealt with in the same manner as any other violator, if arrested.
1. No member of the media shall have any property confiscated or threatened with confiscation without due process of law. This includes cameras, film, notes, etc.
2. Officers who experience extreme difficulties in dealing with individual members of the media at the scenes of incidents should report such circumstances through their chain-of-command to the Media Relations Unit.

323.02 Major Incidents
A. Media representatives who possess employer issued identification, a Department of Public Safety press pass, or other form of valid media identification will be allowed immediate access to the area adjacent to the Department’s Command Post. The ranking officer will determine further access, making every effort to accommodate the media’s need to be as close as possible to the incident. The commanding officer will be especially aware of photographer’s needs in regards to proximity to the incident. On more routine incidents where no Command Post is established, the ranking officer will not unduly restrict the movement of members of the media.
B. In no case will members of the media be denied access to areas where the public is allowed to be present.
C. At the scene of an incident in which the Dallas Fire Department has the primary responsibility, the ranking police officer at the scene will allow media representatives’ access to the Fire Department Command Post unless otherwise notified by the Fire Department. The Fire Department will determine further media access.
D. The ranking officer at the scene of a police incident will provide timely situation briefings to members of the media. This responsibility may be delegated to a knowledgeable member of the ranking officer's staff. In extreme cases, personnel from the Media Relations Unit may be summoned to the scene to conduct the media briefings. If a member of the Media Relations Unit is summoned to the scene, he/she will assume the role of media coordinator and brief the media when requested by the officer in charge.

323.03 Crime Scenes
Media members will be given guided access to crime scenes as soon as determined practical by the ranking investigative officer, except in the following situations:
A. When the crime scene is on private property and the person responsible for the property requests the media to leave.
B. When the presence of media members might adversely affect the preservation of the crime scene or interfere with an investigation.
C. When the presence of the media members would interfere with an operation.

323.04 Release of Information
A. Upon request, the ranking officer at the scene of an incident will, as soon as possible, provide media members with factual information pertaining to any of the following:
1. The facts and circumstances of arrest, including the time and place of arrest, resistance, pursuit, and any use of weapons. The race, sex, age, and occupation of the suspect also may be released but the name and address of the suspect must remain confidential until the suspect has been booked in a jail or formal charges have been filed. For the purposes of this order, the filing of charges is defined as that point when prosecution reports and other necessary paperwork have been forwarded to the Legal Services Section.
2. The identity of the investigating and arresting officer, if such disclosure does not compromise an undercover operation, or unless conditions arising from the incident would expose the officer involved to a higher than normal risk of retaliation.
3. A general description of the evidence seized. Officers will avoid providing specific descriptions of evidence that would tend to hinder or prejudice the investigation.
4. The nature, substance or text of a charge, including a brief description of the offense or incident.
B. Information will not be released pertaining to any of the following:
1. The contents of a statement or even the mere existence of an admission or confession.
2. Personal opinions about the suspect or evidence.
3. Statements concerning anticipated testimony or the truthfulness of witnesses.
4. The results of fingerprint, polygraph, ballistics, or laboratory tests.
5. The names of victims until next of kin have been notified. This applies to both citizens and to Police Officers killed or injured.
6. The fact that a member of the Department possesses, was wearing, or may be wearing a ballistic vest.
C. Requests for information not released at the scene of an investigation will be directed to the supervisor of the officer assigned follow-up investigative responsibility.
D. Only supervisors are authorized to release information not covered by this order.
E. Media access to the working spaces of investigative sections must occasionally be limited during unusual circumstances where security and progress of major cases might be compromised by the presence of the media. This limitation of media access will be the prerogative of the Section Commander or acting commander and will be only for the duration necessary to achieve the specific work objective. During such circumstances, the Section Commander or representative will periodically brief media representatives at another convenient location. During such periods, the commanders of the sections involved will also keep the Media Relations Unit apprised of case progress. That unit can also be used as an information source by media personnel.

323.05 Information from Police Files
A. Departmental employees will not give information from Police Department files to media members except the following:
1. Accident Reports.
2. Page One of Offense Reports.
3. Page One of Arrest Reports.
4. Mug shots where records reflect previous convictions or where defendants have recently been charged.
5. Previous convictions.
B. Media members requesting reports should contact the Records Section for applicable policy.
C. Departmental employees will not give information from Police Department personnel files to media members except the following:
1. Dates of employment of former officers and non-sworn employees.
2. Date of employment, current assignment (unless assigned to the Special Services or Investigations Bureau and an undercover assignment could be jeopardized) and all previous assignments of current employees.
3. All significant biographical information on officers killed or seriously wounded in the line of duty. The determination of such needed information will be made by the Commander of the Personnel and Development Division.
D. Departmental employees will not release to any person the name, home address, or telephone number, or business address or telephone number of any Crime Watch Chairperson.

323.06 Photographs and Interviews
A. Pictures may be taken in or from any area to which media members have been granted access. However, officers may restrict the use of flash, strobes and other high-intensity lighting when such use might hinder a police operation.
B. Officers will not interfere with a photographer taking a picture of a prisoner.
C. Visual reproductions of suspects or witnesses will not be permitted in the working areas of the Dallas Police Department's facilities. Photographs may be taken in the hallways and other areas that are open to the public.
D. Officers will not deny media interviews with hostages who have been released or other crime or disaster victims when the victims have expressed no reluctance to being interviewed. Exceptions may be made by officers when victims are injured, emotionally out of control, or otherwise not capable of making sound decisions.

323.07 Internal Matters
A. Internal personnel investigations involving criminal offenses are classified as Secret and requests for this information will be directed to the Internal Affairs Division or to the Media Relations Unit. The commander of the unit, section, or division in which the investigated personnel are assigned may not, under any circumstances, release this type of information.
B. Requests for information regarding internal personnel investigations that are classified Confidential may be directed to the Internal Affairs Division or to the Media Relations Unit. If a representative of these offices is not available, the commander of the unit, section or division to which the personnel are assigned may release the nature of the allegations, names of officers, complainants involved, and the extent of departmental action taken, if any.
C. In completed personnel investigations, regardless of classification, information may be released regarding the nature of the allegations, names of officers involved, and the extent of departmental action taken, if any.

323.08 News Information Service
A. Reports concerning major crimes, fires (three-alarm or greater), major accidents, serious traffic tie-ups, and other newsworthy events will be transmitted on the News Information Service as soon as possible.
B. The Communications Section Watch Commander will be responsible for transmitting basic facts.

323.09 Routine Newsworthy Matters
Routine newsworthy information should be released directly to the media by the departmental personnel involved.

Dallas Police Department General Order

324.00 Security for Police Facilities

Revised 01/30/2007

324.00 SECURITY FOR POLICE FACILITIES
324.01 General Policy
The Texas Penal Code, Section 30.05, Criminal Trespass, will apply to restricted areas in Police Department facilities. The Penal Code provides that "a person commits an offense if he enters or remains in a building without effective consent and he had notice that entry was forbidden or had received notice to depart but failed to do so. Notice includes (1) oral communication by someone with apparent authority to act for the owner of the building or (2) a sign or signs reasonably likely to come to the attention of intruders indicating that entry is forbidden."

324.02 Restricted Areas
A. A RESTRICTED AREA is a portion of a police facility that is marked by appropriate signs which state that access to the area is limited to employees and/or specified individuals.
B. Any area, including restrooms (except those specifically designated for public use), in a police facility can be marked for use by employees only. Persons other than employees who enter these areas and refuse to leave after being requested to do so can be prosecuted for criminal trespass.
C. Access to hallways and offices in all facilities may be limited by signs that restrict entry to persons conducting official business. Persons who are not present to conduct business in these areas and who refuse to leave after being requested to do so may be prosecuted for criminal trespass.
D. The following persons have access to restricted areas:
1. Any employee of the City engaged in the performance of official duties who complies with procedures set forth in administrative directives and other regulations regarding security.
2. Persons who need to enter the restricted area to conduct business (repairmen, news media, etc.) may be granted temporary access to a specific office or location by the on-duty commander of that area.
3. Persons on authorized visits or tours with departmental escort.
E. Designation of Restricted Areas - The ranking supervisor in control of a departmental facility is responsible for designating restricted areas in that facility. Signs will be posted in areas deemed restricted.

324.03 Procedures
A. All personnel should be constantly alert for suspicious persons and activities in and around departmental facilities and take appropriate action when necessary to maintain security and safety. Appropriate action will depend on the circumstances of each situation. Some individuals, by their actions, indicate they probably do not have legitimate business to conduct at a police facility. If observed in a restricted area, these individuals should be identified and questioned regarding their purpose for being in the area. Individuals should be arrested when they refuse to leave after being instructed to do so or when they are in possession of illegal weapons or contraband.
B. At buildings where police facilities are physically separate from other city facilities, Commanders will take appropriate actions to secure access to their areas. All combinations and codes regulating access to these areas will be changed annually or more frequently, if necessary, in order to maintain security.
C. Non-sworn employees will advise security personnel or sworn personnel when they observe anything that places security in jeopardy.
D. Dallas Security Officers have primary responsibility for security in the Police and Courts Building and Municipal Building Complex, but they have some limitations on their enforcement powers. All employees should cooperate with them in their efforts. Sworn personnel should, when necessary and proper, make arrests for Dallas Security Officers and either transport or arrange transportation of all prisoners.
E. While in restricted areas, all non-sworn employees will wear their departmental or city identification card in a visible location on an outer garment.
F. When not in uniform, all sworn employees may wear either their badge or city identification card on an outer garment. The badge or identification card must be visible while in restricted areas.
G. Visitors will not be required to wear visitor passes while conducting business in multiple use buildings with common access to police and non-police facilities. At police facilities that are physically separate and when deemed necessary for security, Commanders may require visitors to wear passes.
H. The provisions of this order are in effect twenty-four hours a day.

Dallas Police Department General Order

325.00 Open Records Information

Revised 01/08/2019


325.00 OPEN RECORDS INFORMATION
325.01 Release of Criminal History Information
A. Criminal history information will not be released to any person or agency except those involved in criminal justice activities, except as provided below and in Section 323.04.
B. Individuals desiring to review their own criminal records involving felony or misdemeanor charges filed in the county courts will be directed to the Records Division of the Dallas County Sheriff's Office.
C. Individuals desiring to review their own arrest records involving city arrests only will be directed to the Records Section of the Dallas Police Department. There will be a $10 fee for this review.
D. Field officers will, if requested, provide to apartment managers or landlords a Request for Information - Open Records form. This form will assist managers and landlords in obtaining the data listed below regarding the arrest of an individual on the property controlled by the manager or landlord. Note restrictions to the release of information in paragraph E.
1. Arrestee's name, race, sex and age.
2. Location, date and time of arrest.
3. Charge.
4. Arrest number.
5. The apartment number involved (if any).
E. Special attention should be paid to situations involving sexual assault offenses and juvenile suspects. The name and address of the victims of sexual assault offenses are not considered Open Records and will not be released. Juvenile arrest data is not considered Open Records and will not be released.

325.02 Release of Information on Offense/Incident Reports
A. The Offense/Incident Report will be released as follows:
1. Page 1 to any person upon request and payment of any required fees (except sexual offenses).
2. Page 1 to the media via established distribution procedures (except sexual offenses). Additional copies or requests for offenses over 72 hours old will be handled in accordance with paragraph A.1 above.
3. Upon subpoena, any document requested by the subpoena through the Legal Services Section (including sexual offenses).
4. Sexual offenses are restricted to page 1 to the following:
a. The complainant.
b. The suspect.
c. The suspect's attorney.
5. Other police agencies may obtain, without a fee, any Offense Report and its supplements. Other agencies have restricted access to sex offenses on a need to know basis. This will be determined by the on-duty supervisor in the Records Section at the time of the request.
B. Copies of witness statements, confessions, lists of evidence, or laboratory reports will not be released in any case except with the approval of a Division Commander or higher.
C. Release of Offense/Incident Reports will be made by the Records Section. Fees charged will be consistent with the Public Information Act.

325.03 Release of Other Written Records
A. It is the responsibility of the Division Commander or their designee maintaining records other than criminal history to respond to open record requests.
B. In any case where a Division Commander or their designee has any doubt concerning an open records request, he/she should contact a Supervisor in the Open Records Unit or an attorney in the Criminal Law and Police Unit for advice.
C. The Division Commander receiving a request for open records information from the Open Records Unit is responsible for ensuring that responsive information is uploaded into the GovQa Record Management or immediately (hand delivered) to the Open Records Unit if an exemption applies. This immediate processing requirement is due to the 10-day response time mandated by law for an exemption. However, the responsive documents are due to the Open Records Unit within three (3) business days for processing.
D. The Open Records Unit will maintain an Open Records Control Log for all Departmental open records requests. Division Commander or their designee, who process open records requests, will maintain a similar log. The name of requestor, nature of the request, date received, and name of person responsible for processing will be logged in the Open Records Control Log. Upon completion of the open records request, all records will be processed as listed above.
E. The Open Records Unit currently transitioned to a new open records request system (GovQa). When responding to open records requests, all responsive documents will be uploaded into the GovQa Open Records Request System.
1. Exception: the following responsive documents will not be uploaded into the GovQA Records Management System due to the guidelines as outlined in the Public Information Act; however, they will be hand carried to the Open Records Unit: Sexual Assaults Offense Reports and Supplements, Aggravated Sexual Assault Offense Reports, Child Abuse Offense Reports and Supplements, any offense reports containing Juvenile information, where the juvenile is the suspect, pending criminal investigation in which the detective is requesting an 
exemption, Police Shooting, Personnel Records, Internal Affairs Investigation and Public Integrity Investigation. If you have a question, please contact a Supervisor in the Open Records Unit.
2. Each unit, section or division will be responsible for redacting all responsive documents for open records request(s) that does not seek a ruling from the Texas Attorney General’s Office.
3. All responsive documents or reports will be redacted prior to uploading into the GovQa Records Management System as established by the Public Information Act.
4. The Open Records Unit will then process the responsive documents and provide the requestor an invoice for the requested information. Once funds for the invoice have been received, the Open Records Unit will release the responsive documents to the requestor through the GovQa System or by mail.
5. The Open Records Unit will continue to redact all Dash Camera, Body Camera and 911audio footage. However, each unit, section or division will be responsible for ensuring all camera and audio footage are delivered to the Open Records Unit within five business days.

325.04 Court Subpoenas
A. It is the responsibility of the Division Commander maintaining records to respond to all lawful subpoenas for records maintained in their division.
B. The Division Commander should contact the attorney in the Criminal Law and Police Unit office in any case where there is a legal question relative to a subpoena.

325.05 Expunction and Nondisclosure of Adult Criminal Records
A. Expunctions
1. A court-ordered expunction is usually a two-part process:
a. Petition for expunction: The responder copies all related records and delivers them to the Legal Services Unit within ten days. Do not destroy or remove records.
b. Order for expunction: The responder delivers all original and duplicate copies of related records to Legal Services or obliterates all electronically or photographically stored portions of records and expunges indexes within ninety days. Legal Services delivers all the gathered records to the District Court Clerk after reception.
2. Any person may petition the court to expunge records of an arrest. The Criminal Law and Police Unit will challenge such petitions when appropriate and received before due date. Petitions cannot be challenged past due dates. An arrested person is entitled to have all records and files relating to the arrest expunged if they fall within the specific guidelines set forth in the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure, Section 55.01-55.06.
3. Expunction orders include all records or files, or portions of records or files, (encompassing arrest, offense, and accident reports, PES supplements, IAD investigations, investigative notes, indexes, etc.) which document an arrest.
B. Petitions for Expunction
1. Legal Services receives petitions. Time is critical in responding to petitions.
2. Legal Services will determine which organizational levels or other city departments are likely to maintain records subject to the petition and forward the petition with a cover memo.
3. Organizational levels will thoroughly research their records and identify all records that are subject to petition before forwarding any copies to Legal Services. Additionally, Organizational Commanders desiring to challenge petitions will immediately submit a brief memo to the Criminal Law and Police Unit explaining why. Attach the memo to the forwarded documents and return by the requested due date.
4. Organizational Commanders must submit a brief memo to Legal Services describing the content of any unprintable electronic information in lieu of submitting these records in printed form.
5. Organizations possessing property/evidence belonging to petitioners will immediately notify Legal Services in writing of this fact, describing the property.
6. Legal Services will compile the petitioned information and deliver it to the Criminal Law and Police Unit.
C. Order for Expunction
1. Legal Services receives orders.
2. Legal Services will determine which organizational levels or other city departments are likely to maintain records subject to the order and forward the order with a cover memo.
3. Organizational levels with records or files that are impractical to return to the court (printouts, computer files, etc.) will print or copy all records or files pertaining to the expunction to show their existence. Then, erase or obliterate from the record or file everything pertaining to the expunction, and, finally, copy the entire record or file showing the records or files pertaining to the expunction erased or obliterated. Forward the copies to Legal Services.
4. The organizational level will keep the original record or file, with expunged portions erased or obliterated, as its new record or file. Expunged portions of original records or files must not still be legible.
5. Place a notation of expunction at the location of removal or obliteration. The notation will include the name of the person performing the expunction and the removal date. No information that can identify the petitioner (name, date of birth, address, etc.) or the court cause number will be included. If it is impractical to insert a notation at the expungement location, maintain an associate expunction notation file.
6. The person researching records subject to an order for expunction will complete a memo of expunction and forward it, along with any records found, to Legal Services.
D. Order of Nondisclosure
1. Legal Services receives orders of nondisclosure.
2. They prohibit public disclosure of criminal history information.
3. They do not affect the Department’s ability to retain and use our criminal records or investigative files.
4. They do not constitute an order to destroy or obliterate the named records or files.
5. The Department may disclose criminal history record information subject to an order of nondisclosure to: 1) other criminal justice agencies, 2) non-criminal justice agencies authorized by federal or state statute or by executive order to receive criminal history record information, and 3) the person who is the subject of the criminal history record information.
E. Other Compliance Actions Required for Expunction/Nondisclosure Orders
1. Legal Services will maintain a database on each expunction/nondisclosure order under process by referencing the cause number and date received. Legal Services will not maintain any expunction/nondisclosure order information after returning it to the District Court Clerk.
2. Legal Services will destroy acquired records for dismissed or withdrawn expunction/nondisclosure petitions upon receiving a court order notifying Legal Services of such action. Legal Services will copy original court orders, file the copy for one year, and return the original to the issuing court.
3. Organizations subject to expunction/nondisclosure orders will maintain Standard Operating Procedures describing their expunction/nondisclosure process.
4. Any recommended process, record, file, or program designed to track crime information, or which includes reference to criminal suspects, will include a method for expunction/nondisclosure prior to its implementation.
5. Historical, multi-generational, or associated electronic data that is subject to expunction/nondisclosure and overwritten according to accepted electronic information management practices will be due to Legal Services in ninety days. Current data subject to expungement/nondisclosure will be due in thirty days.
6. Legal Services will compile all responses to an expunction/nondisclosure order and deliver them to the District Court Clerk along with a memo stating that the expunction/nondisclosure order is satisfied.
7. Organizational levels will ensure compliance with expunction/ nondisclosure methods set forth in the Texas Code of Criminal Procedure and the Texas Government Code.
8. Refer procedural questions regarding expunctions/nondisclosures to the Legal Services Unit. Refer Legal questions regarding expunctions/nondisclosures to the Criminal Law and Police Unit.
9. Personnel will be mindful of the expungement/nondisclosure process and avoid creating and duplicating records not critical to the mission of the department.

Dallas Police Department General Order

326.00 Interrogatories

Revised 01/30/2007

326.00 INTERROGATORIES, REQUESTS FOR PRODUCTION OF DOCUMENTS, AND DISCOVERY ORDERS
A. The Legal Services Section will provide coordination of Interrogatories, Requests for Production of Documents, and Discovery Orders.
1. Personnel receiving Interrogatories, Requests for Production of Documents, or Discovery Orders from any source other than Legal Services Section will notify the Legal Services Section Commander as soon as possible during administrative hours.
2. If time constraints will not allow coordination through the Legal Services Section during administrative hours, the duty legal officer will be called and all action taken will be documented in a memorandum to the Legal Services Section.
B. The Legal Services Section will provide initial analysis, specific instructions, and distribution to ensure compliance with legal requirements. The requests will then be routed to the appropriate Division Commanders.
C. Division Commanders will:
1. Return the requested information or material promptly to the Legal Services Section.
2. Ensure all material provided is labeled according to the corresponding question it answers.
3. Ensure that the cover memorandum transmitting a requested document back to the Legal Services Section is initialed by all persons reviewing it, including the Division Commander.
D. The Legal Services Section will:
1. Review returned material for compliance.
2. Schedule conferences when necessary to clarify answers.
3. Keep files of cover memoranda on returned information.


Dallas Police Department General Order

327.00 Affidavits for Suspension of License to Carry Handgun

Revised 04/19/2024


327.00 AFFIDAVITS FOR SUSPENSION OF LICENSE TO CARRY HANDGUN
A. The Texas License to Carry Handgun Law requires officers to prepare the state-supplied Suspension Affidavit (LTC- 551) when they believe a reason exists for the suspension of a handgun license. Officers will complete the suspension affidavit when they:
1. Arrest a handgun licensee and believe a suspension factor is applicable.
2. Are assigned investigative responsibility for a case they believe a suspension factor is applicable to the licensee/suspect, and the report does not indicate a suspension affidavit was submitted.
3. Obtain any other information they believe could result in the suspension of a handgun license.
4. If an officer arrests a licensed holder who is carrying a handgun, the officer shall seize the license holder’s handgun and license as evidence and place them in the Baylor Street Property Room. If the license was not seized as evidence due to unavailability, the Department of Public Safety (DPS) shall notify the license holder to surrender the license no later than the 10th day after the license holder receives the notice of suspension from DPS.
B. Suspension Affidavit (LTC-551)
1. A person’s handgun license may be suspended if the license holder:
a. Is charged with a Class A or Class B misdemeanor
b. Is charged with an offense under Penal Code Section 42.01, Disorderly Conduct
c. Is charged with a felony under an information or indictment
d. Commits an act of family violence and is the subject an active protective order under Title 4, Family Code
e. Is arrested for an offense involving family violence
f. Is arrested for an offense under Penal Code Section 42.072, Stalking, and is the subject of an order for emergency protection issued under Code of Criminal Procedure Article 17.292
2. If an officer believes there is cause under Section B.1 to suspend a handgun license, the officer shall prepare a Suspension Affidavit (LTC-551) stating the reason for the suspension of the license and provide all the information available to the officer at the time the form was prepared.
3. Officers will complete a Suspension Affidavit (LTC-551) when they discover the licensee failed to notify DPS of a change of address, name, or status (marriage) no later than 30 days after the change as required by Government Code, Section 411.181.
4. Detectives will also complete a Suspension Affidavit (LTC-551) when filing an at large case for those offenses listed in B.1. against a handgun licensee.
5. If a license holder is carrying a handgun on or about the license holder’s person when a police officer demands identification, the license holder shall display both the license holder’s driver’s license or identification card and the license holder’s handgun license per Government Code, Section 411.205. Note: the penalty for this section was removed during a previous legislative session.
C. Copies of the Suspension Affidavit form are maintained at the Detention Division. A PDF fillable for4m is available on the DPD Intranet, Departmental Units, Jail, and at the DPS website.
D. When an officer believes a reason exists for the suspension of a handgun license, he/she will perform the following:
1. Complete the suspension affidavit form.
2. Attach the officer’s report (offense report, arrest report, a photocopy of the front of any citation), relating to the license holder to the suspension form and send the suspension affidavit and the attachments to the DPS at its Austin headquarters not later than the fifth working day after the date the form was prepared. Any sexual assault victim identifying information is redacted.
3. Request a supervisor within their unit to review the affidavit and attachments prior to notarization of the affidavit.
E. Officers will reference the handgun license number in any arrest report, offense report, or other document related to the licensee.
F. If a case number is not normally generated for the incident, the officer submitting the affidavit will request a case number and prepare a Miscellaneous Incident Report (MIR). Officers will include the case number in the upper right- hand corner of the affidavit.
G. Within five working days, the supervisor will:
1. Review the packet and ensure the submitting officer has the affidavit notarized.
2. Send the original notarized affidavit, along with attachments, to:
Texas Department of Public Safety Regulatory Services Division, MSC 0245
P.O. Box 4087
Austin, Texas 78773-0245
3. Forward a copy of the notarized affidavit to the Records Section for retention. The Supervisor will ensure the case number is written in the upper right corner of the affidavit copy.

Dallas Police Department General Order

329.00 Environmental Management

Revised 05/01/2014

329.00 Environmental Management
329.01 Environmental Management Policy and Procedure for the Dallas Police Department
329.02 Definitions
A. Environmental Maintenance: Environmental pollution at a police facility that can be contained by on-site personnel and equipment with regularly scheduled clean-ups.
B. Environmental Impact: Environmental pollution at a police facility that can be contained by on-site personnel and equipment, but that must be immediately addressed to avoid further damage.
C. Hazardous Spill: Environmental pollution at any location requiring an immediate response by DFD or Storm Water Management personnel and equipment to contain and eradicate.
D. Incident: An environmental impact or hazardous spill.
1. Non-Preventable Incident: Incidents that do not meet any part of the definition of a preventable incident.
2. Preventable Incident: Incident in which an employee:
a. Failed to take reasonable action, which may have avoided or prevented the incident.
b. Failed to respond to directions for mitigating the effects of, or cleaning up, the incident.
c. Violated a City or departmental rule, policy, or procedure, which contributed to the incident.

329.03 Policy
The Dallas Police Department is committed to Pollution Prevention, Environmental Compliance, and Continued Improvement. This will be accomplished by educating employees on the importance of complying with the environmental policies, regulations, and procedures set forth by the City and Department. The Dallas Police Department will strive to conduct its daily operations in an environmentally responsible manner to reduce and mitigate the risks of environmental contamination, and will take corrective action to prevent the reoccurrence of any preventable environmental incident. All employees will be held accountable for their actions and for the environmental compliance of their work area.

329.04 Purpose
A. To increase environmental awareness by instituting and maintaining an orderly and effective pollution prevention program.
B. To eliminate or minimize environmental incidents and assign responsibility in cases where the incident was preventable.

329.05 Organization
A. The Department’s Environmental Manager/Environmental Management Representative (EMR), as well as the Environmental Coordinator, will be assigned to the Environmental Management System (EMS) Unit.
B. Division Commanders will appoint Environmental Site Representatives who will:
1. Assume daily environmental management responsibilities, as set forth by the Office of Environmental Quality and Administrative Directives 3-73 and 3-74, and follow the City of Dallas Environmental Quality Best Management Practices (BMP) as presented to them by the Environmental Management System (EMS) Unit.
2. Prevent environmental pollution by training all division personnel in methods of avoiding, containing, and cleaning up environmental contamination.
3. Properly investigate and report on-site incidents and recommend changes to prevent reoccurrence.
4. Train sufficient division personnel to handle, investigate, and report incidents.
5. Train sufficient division personnel to perform environmental maintenance.
6. Accept responsibility for the environmental compliance of their work areas.
7. Conduct periodic compliance inspections.
8. Acquire and require the use of appropriate equipment.
9. Enforce environmental rules and regulations, correct actual violations, and prevent potential violations.
10. Maintain and submit individual and weekly environmental incident reports.

329.06 Procedures for Environmental Impact Occurrences
A. All police personnel will be aware of the operational condition of city vehicles that are assigned to them and their personal vehicles that are parked on city property. Personnel aware of vehicles causing an environmental impact by leaking fluid will immediately:
1. Take their city vehicle to a service center for repair.
2. Remove their personal vehicle from city property.
3. Report the environmental impact to their Environmental Site Representative, or, in their absence, a supervisor. The Environmental Site Representative or supervisor will ensure that the following guidelines are followed:
a. Immediately apply absorbent to the fluid. For large spills, use Oil Spill Kit, Booms, Socks or Net tubing to protect storm water drains during clean up.
b. Sweep up the absorbent once the spill is contained and place it in barrels marked as storage for such contaminants.

c. Assure that any collection of absorbent containing battery acid is stored separately from any other collected fluids.
d. Notify the Environmental Site Representative of all environmental impacts.
e. Contact the Office of Environmental Quality (214-670-1200) to report the environmental impact.
f. Complete the Environmental Incident Report, AD 3-73, Attachment A (available online on City Intranet) and land mail or email it to the Environmental Site Coordinator before the end of duty.
B. All police personnel will be observant of the overall environmental condition of their police facility. They will:
1. Assure that all outside waste dispensers are covered.
2. Assure that car washing is done in a designated car wash.
3. Notify their Environmental Site Representative of obstructions in storm water drains. The Representative will contact Storm Water Management and insure that drains are cleared.

329.07 Procedures for Hazardous Spills
Procedures for hazardous spills will be followed as outlined in the Emergency Operations Procedure (EOP) Hazardous Material Incidents section.

329.08 Reporting
A. All employees must immediately report environmental concerns to their Environmental Site Representative or a supervisor.
B. Environmental Site Representatives or supervisors will report incidents in compliance with AD 3-74 and send a copy to the department EMR or Environmental Coordinator before their end of duty.
C. Each Environmental Site Representative will maintain copies of incident reports.
D. Environmental Site Representatives will submit weekly reports as directed by the Environmental Management System (EMS) Unit Coordinator.
E. The Environmental Management System (EMS) Unit will submit a monthly report summarizing the department’s environment incidents.

329.09 Classifying Preventability, Assigning Points and Disciplinary Action
A. Incidents will be reviewed by the City’s Environmental Compliance Committee. The employee’s immediate supervisor will recommend classification, points, and discipline after considering any recommendations made by the City’s Environmental Compliance Committee, and forward them up to the employee’s Bureau Commander whose decision is final.
B. The employee may appeal as provided by City of Dallas Personnel Rules.
C. For the classification of preventability, assignment of points and disciplinary action refer to the policies outlined in AD 3-73.

Dallas Police Department General Order

330.00 Consensual and Non-Consensual Search Procedures

Revised 05/10/2018

330.00 CONSENSUAL AND NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCH PROCEDURES
330.01 Definitions
A. Bias Based Searches: Any search of an individual, object, or place that is solely based upon any person’s race, age, gender, or sexual orientation.
B. Probable Cause: Probable cause exists where the facts and circumstances known to the officer, based upon reasonable and trustworthy information, would lead a person of reasonable caution and prudence to believe that the search would produce evidence pertaining to a crime.
C. Recording Device: Any Departmentally Issued device capable of permanently preserving the audio and/or visual record of an encounter between an officer and citizen. The device must have the ability to retrieve and transfer that recording to another device.
D. Body Cavity Search: A search which goes beyond a normal search and consists of looking in an individual’s genital area, anus, or other body orifice outside of the mouth.
E. Strip Search: A search which requires the individual to remove articles of clothing that normally would not be removed in a public place.
F. Protective Frisk (Terry Search): A search conducted for officer safety granted by Terry v. Ohio, 392 U.S. 1 (1968).
G. Consensual Search: In lieu of obtaining a search warrant, a peace officer may obtain consent to search an object, person, vehicle or premises from the individual exercising domain and control over the object or premises. That is, a person may waive their constitutional rights against a warrantless search and seizure by giving their consent to such a search. For such a search to be lawful, it must be shown that the consent was given freely and voluntarily, and not as a result of duress or coercion, and that the person giving the consent to search the premises or vehicle had authority to give consent.
H. Written Consent: The only form approved for obtaining written consent is the departmentally issued Consent to Search Form. Written consent is only valid when signed by both the person granting the consent and the executing officer.
I. Non-Consensual Search: The lawful search of a person, place, or thing in the absence of a warrant or consent. Emergency/exigent circumstances, hot pursuit, imminent destruction of evidence, plain view, mobile premises, vehicle inventory, and search incident to lawful arrest have been held by the courts to be lawful exceptions to the requirement of having a warrant before search is made.

330.02 Policy
The Dallas Police Department holds the rights of individuals to the highest standard and is committed to upholding the Constitutional rights of all citizens that police officers come into contact with. All searches conducted by officers will fall within the guidelines of Federal and State Law. The Consensual and Non-Consensual Search Policy will apply to searches in the absence of a search warrant or exception to the search warrant requirement such as incident to arrest, protective frisk, inventory searches, abandoned property, plain-view, and regulatory administrative searches such as those allowed under the Alcohol and Beverage Code. The Consensual and Non-Consensual Search Policy does not apply to emergency situations where there is both probable cause and exigent circumstances.

330.03 Purpose
Document searches in order to:
A. Protect both officers and citizens.
B. Create a standard for officers to use when conducting searches.
C. Maintain a chain of custody of evidence for trial procedures.

330.04 Requirements for CONSENSUAL SEARCH
A. Consent searches must be voluntary and cannot be obtained by force, threats of force, promises, knowing misrepresentation, intimidation, or by improper exertion of authority. The mere presence of one or more officers does not constitute intimidation or improper exertion of authority.
B. Consent must be obtained from the person exercising control over the vehicle, object, or premise.
C. The individual must be advised of the specific location, place, or object to be searched.
D. Verbal consensual searches are prohibited if there is no recording device available.
E. Written consent is required on all residences or buildings.
F. Audio/Video recordings of consent to search are allowable for persons, movable objects, and vehicles only when that verbal consent is recorded on a working departmentally issued recording device. In the event an in-car DVR is available, it will be utilized over an audio only recording device. If no recording device is available, then written consent must be obtained prior to the search occurring.

330.05 Evidence and Documentation Procedures for CONSENSUAL SEARCH
A. If a person is arrested or any property seized as a result of a consensual search the following procedures will be adhered to:
1. The encounter must be documented on a case report and BlueTeam prior to the end of shift.
2. The audio and/or visual recording or written consent must be placed into evidence according to Standard Operating Procedures at the Baylor Street Property Room.
a. If the recording of the consent is from an in-car DVR, the copy of the video must be downloaded from the Server and placed on a DVD and placed into evidence.
b. If the recording is on another type of Departmentally issued recording device, the recording must be transferred to a CD/DVD and placed into evidence.
c. If the consent is documented on a written consent form, the original form must be placed into evidence.
3. The encounter will be entered into BlueTeam prior to the end of shift.
a. A copy of the video and/or audio will not be transferred to BlueTeam.
b. A copy of the signed consent to search form will be scanned into BlueTeam if one was utilized.
c. The case report number will be entered into BlueTeam.
B. If a search was conducted and no seizure or arrest was made the following procedures will be adhered to:
1. An entry will be made into BlueTeam prior to the end of shift.
2. A copy of the video and/or audio will not be transferred to BlueTeam.
a. If the recording of the consent is from an in-car DVR, the video need not be flagged for retention. The video will automatically be saved for 90 days on the server.
b. If the recording is on another type of Departmentally issued recording device, the recording must be transferred to a CD/DVD and stored at the Division of the officer requesting consent. The CD/DVD will be kept at the Division for 90 days.
3. A copy of the signed consent to search will be scanned into BlueTeam.
C. Every Division in which officers request consensual searches will:
1. Designate a secure locked cabinet or file drawer for the purpose of holding CD/DVDs that were made as a result of searches conducted with no arrest or seizure. The CD/DVDs will be filed in folders by date of search and be kept by the Division for 90 days after the date of search.

330.06 Responsibilities
A. Division Commanders will be responsible for ensuring that secure locations as defined in 330.05 (C) exist at each Division. Division Commanders will also designate a supervisor with oversight responsibilities to ensure that all procedures are being followed.
B. First line supervisors will be responsible for monitoring consensual searches under their command and making sure the request and or search did not violate this General Order. Supervisors will spot check recordings to ensure compliance. They will ensure the BlueTeam entry is correct and forward to a lieutenant (Watch or Unit Commander). The lieutenant (Unit or Watch Commander) will review, approve, and forward it directly to the Program Administrator.
C. Any employee requesting a consensual search will ensure the audio/visual recording device is functioning properly prior to requesting a search. Any employee that realizes the recording device is not functioning properly will notify a supervisor immediately.

330.07 Prohibited Practices
A. Consensual Searches are not allowed for strip searches or body cavity searches.
B. Any bias based search.

330.08 Requirements for NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCH
A. Obtaining a search warrant or consent is preferable to a non-consensual search.
B. Non-consensual searches must fall under one of the legally recognized exceptions to the requirement of having a search warrant or consent:
1. emergency/exigent circumstances.
2. hot pursuit.
3. imminent destruction of evidence.
4. plain view.
5. mobile premises.
6 vehicle inventory.
7. search incident to lawful arrest.
8. protective frisk.
9. any other legally recognized exception.

330.09 Evidence and Documentation Procedures for NON-CONSENSUAL SEARCH
A. If the search is a protective frisk, no documentation is necessary.
B. If the search is incident to a lawful arrest, document the search in the arrest report.
C. If the search is an inventory search of a vehicle, document the search per General Order 313.14 Disposition of Vehicles.
D. If any other Non-Consensual search is performed:
1. Document the search in BlueTeam prior to the end of the shift.
2. Process any evidence seized (if applicable) in accordance with General Order 321.00 Evidence and Property.
3. Forward the BlueTeam entry to a supervisor. They will ensure the BlueTeam entry is correct and forward to a lieutenant. The lieutenant (Unit or Watch Commander) will review, approve, and forward it directly to the Program Administrator.


Dallas Police Department General Order

331.00 Public Recording of Official Acts

Revised 04/14/2020


331.00 PUBLIC RECORDING OF OFFICIAL ACTS
331.01 Policy
It is the policy of the Dallas Police Department to ensure the protection and preservation of every person’s Constitutional rights.

In furtherance of this policy, no member of the Dallas Police Department may prevent or prohibit any person’s ability to observe, photograph, and/or make a video recording (with or without a simultaneous audio recording) of police activity that occurs in the public domain, so long as the person’s location, actions, and/or behavior do not create a legitimate, articulable threat to officer safety, or an unlawful interruption, disruption, impediment, or interference to successful performance of the police officer’s duty or exercise of authority. The public’s access to information regarding the official business of the Dallas Police Department is of critical importance to effective, transparent government.

331.02 Definitions
Interference with Public Duties – A law prohibiting the interruption, disruption, or interference with a peace officer performing a duty or exercising authority imposed or granted by law.

Photographing – The act of capturing and storing a still image, whether in an electronic/digital format, or on any type of light-sensitive film (e.g., traditional 35mm film).

Video/Audio Recording – The act of capturing a series of images that, when replayed in succession, reproduce a sequence of activities in motion. Video/audio recordings may be stored on a length of light sensitive film, a videotape cassette, or in a digital format (e.g., a removable memory card), and may or may not contain a simultaneous audio recording.
Video/Audio Recording Device – For the purposes of this General Order, a Video Recording Device includes, but is not limited to, any device capable of capturing a still or moving image(s), regardless of whether or not a simultaneous audio recording is included. Examples may include any of the following devices:
A cellular telephone of any make, model, or manufacturer, including those devices referred to as “Smart Phones.”
A Personal Digital Assistant, also known as a Personal Data Assistant or PDA.
A tablet-style mobile computer commonly referred to simply as a “tablet.”
Any camera, whether still-photo and/or video, of any make, model, or manufacturer, regardless of whether or not the device is capable of capturing a simultaneous audio recording, and regardless of how the device stores the images it captures.

331.03 General Information
It is increasingly common for uninvolved bystanders at the scene of police activity to photograph and/or video/audio record the actions and conduct of police officers. Officers of the Dallas Police Department should simply assume at any time a member of the general public is likely to b e o b s e r v i n g , and perhaps even photographing or video/audio recording, their activities.
As a result, officers must understand that any bystander has a right to photograph and/or video/audio record the enforcement actions of any police officer so long as the bystander’s actions do not:
A. Place the safety of the bystander, or of any Police Officer(s), witness(es), victim(s), or suspect(s), in jeopardy;
B. Interrupt, disrupt, impede, or interfere with the execution or performance of an officer’s official duties;
C. Interfere with, or violate any law, ordinance, or code;
D. Involve an intrusion into any crime scene, private property, or other location under lawful police control and/or not normally accessible to the general public;
E. Threaten, by words or actions, other persons; or
F. Attempt to incite an immediate breach of the peace or incite others to commit a violation of the law.
In and of themselves, the acts of observing, photographing, and/or making a video/audio recording of any police activity that occurs in a public setting are not criminal offenses. On their own, these acts DO NOT constitute probable cause for the arrest of the observer/bystander, and DO NOT provide any justification whatsoever for any officer of the Dallas Police Department, without a Search and Seizure Warrant or other appropriate court order, to review, seize, damage, erase, or otherwise inspect the contents of a person’s camera or video/audio recording device.

331.04 Special Circumstances
Nothing in this General Order should be construed by members of the Dallas Police Department as an elimination of their ability to seek out, collect, or otherwise gather evidence in the course of a criminal investigation.

However, officers seeking to obtain material contained on a camera or video/audio recording device that is the private property of a bystander must recall that the bystander in possession of the camera or video/audio recording device enjoys the same Constitutional protections from unreasonable search and/or seizure as they would in any other law enforcement activity or investigation.

If an officer has probable cause to believe that a bystander is in possession of any still photos/images, video/audio recordings, and/or audio/sound recordings that are, or could reasonably be considered, evidence related to a crime and the officer reasonably believes an exigent circumstance exists, officers may take all lawful actions to preserve or prevent destruction of that evidence.

Without the bystander’s voluntarily consent to surrender his/her camera or video/audio recording device; to an examination of its contents; and to a seizure by a police officer of any images or video/audios contained within it, officers MUST adhere to the requirements of this order.

331.05 Officer Responsibilities
A. Upon discovery that a bystander is observing, photographing, or video/audio recording the conduct of police activity:
1. DO NOT impede or prevent the bystander’s ability to continue doing so based solely on the discovery of his/her presence. (including, but not limited to, deliberately shining a flashlight into a camera lens to prevent recording)
2. DO NOT seize or otherwise demand to take possession of any camera or video/audio recording device the bystander may possess based solely on the discovery of his/her presence.
3. DO NOT demand to review, manipulate, or erase any images or video/audio recording captured by the bystander based solely on the discovery of his/her presence.
4. For investigative purposes, be mindful of the potential that the bystander may witness, or capture images/video/audio of events considered at some later time to be material evidence.
B. BEFORE taking any police action which would stop a bystander from observing, photographing, or video/audio recording the conduct of police activity, officer(s) must have observed the bystander committing some act that falls within one of the six numbered conditions listed in the section of this Order entitled “GENERAL INFORMATION.”
C. If it becomes necessary to effect the arrest of a bystander who is or has been observing, photographing, or video/audio recording police activity:
1. Ensure the arrest is for an unlawful activity or criminal offense (e.g., interference with public duty, disorderly conduct, assault, etc.).
2. Clearly articulate the facts and circumstances that led to the arrest in all subsequent reporting and charging documents.
D. Do not compromise the integrity of any established crime scene or other secured/restricted area so that a bystander may observe, photograph, or video/audio record police activity.
E. A bystander’s desire or intent to observe, photograph, or video/audio record police activity does not entitle him/her to:
1. Trespass on private property
2. Place him- or herself in physical danger (e.g., within an area defined by members of the SWAT Team as an “inner perimeter”)
3. Enter another person’s private dwelling, storehouse, etc.
4. Enter into or upon any designated or marked crime scene or police operation.
5. Enter into or upon any area not accessible to the general public.
F. In public areas, any form of identification referred to as “press credentials” does not extend any special privileges or access to any individual. Members of the press and members of the general public enjoy the same rights in any area accessible to the general public.
G. No individual is required to display “press credentials” in order to exercise his/her right to observe, photograph, or video/audio record police activity taking place in an area accessible to, or within view of, the general public.

331.06 Supervisor Responsibilities
A. If possible, respond to any scene where officers under your supervision believe that the presence of a bystander who is observing, photographing, and/or video/audio recording their conduct is unlawfully interrupting, disrupting, impeding, or interfering with the successful execution of their official duties.
B. At any scene where the actions of a bystander who is observing, photographing, and/or video/audio recording police activity rise to the level of a criminal offense:
1. Ensure adequate police attention remains focused on whatever situation originally required a police response.
NOTE: All officers should bear in mind that, on rare occasions, they may encounter a person or group of persons who deliberately create hazardous conditions with the intent of provoking an inappropriate police response. Supervisors shall not allow subordinates under their supervision to become distracted from their professional duties at any time.
2. If tactically feasible, inform the bystander that his/her actions may, if continued, rise to the level of a criminal offense and could subject him/her to arrest.
3. If possible, recommend a less-intrusive location to the bystander from which he/she may continue to observe, photograph, or video/audio record the police activity.
C. Ensure that any crime scene is properly secured using tape or other methods, as soon as possible.

331.07 Seizing a Bystander’s Video/Audio Recording Device for Evidentiary Purposes
A. If an officer reasonably believes a bystander possesses any material that is, or could reasonably be considered, evidence related to a crime, the officer may request the bystander voluntarily surrender his/her camera, video/audio recording device, etc., into police custody.
B. If the individual CONSENTS to the request:
1. Exercise due care and caution with any of the individual’s property or electronic device(s).
2. Follow the proper consensual search procedure as listed in G.O. 330 “Consensual Search Procedures”.
3. DO NOT make any attempt to view, download, or otherwise access any material contained on the device.
4. Protection of any potential evidence is paramount. Only members of the appropriate investigative unit may make efforts to access material contained on the device.
NOTE: Upon taking custody of the device, officers are strongly encouraged to place the device into airplane mode if so equipped. This will aid in preventing any remote access to or deletion of the data or other material stored within it.
5. Submit the recovered camera, video/audio recording device, etc., in accordance with General Order 321.00, “Evidence and Property.”
C. If the individual REFUSES the request:
1. If an officer has probable cause to believe a bystander is in possession of any still photos/images, video/audio recordings, and/or audio/sound recordings that are, or could reasonably be considered evidence related to a crime and there is no reason to believe that the evidence is in immediate jeopardy of being tampered with, altered, deleted, or destroyed, the officer shall articulate the facts to support an application for a Search and Seizure Warrant.
2. Coordinate with the appropriate investigative unit to secure a search warrant.
3. If there is PROBABLE CAUSE to believe that evidence exists on a bystander’s device, AND there is PROBABLE CAUSE to believe that the evidence is in immediate jeopardy of being tampered with, altered, deleted, or destroyed, the officer may TEMPORARILY seize the device for safekeeping/preservation of the evidence while the appropriate application(s) for Search and Seizure Warrant(s) are made.
NOTE: Upon taking temporary custody of the device for the purposes of safekeeping/preservation, officers are strongly encouraged to place the device into airplane mode if so equipped. This will aid in preventing any remote access to or deletion of the data, photographs, etc., stored within it.
4. DO NOT make any attempt to view, download, or otherwise access any material contained on the device.
5. Protection of any potential evidence is paramount. Only members of the appropriate investigative unit may make efforts to access material contained on the device after securing a search warrant.
6. Submit the recovered camera, video/audio recording device, etc., in accordance with General Order 321.00, “Evidence and Property.”
7. Complete all appropriate field reports.
D. The controlling supervisor shall:
1. Ensure any camera or video/audio recording device that has been used to photograph and/or video/audio record police activity comes into the custody of the Dallas Police Department:
a. Through the voluntary consent of the individual in possession of the item.
b. Through execution of a Search and Seizure Warrant.
c. Through some valid exception to the warrant requirement.
2. Supervisors must provide the review and approval of any application for a Search and Seizure Warrant.
E. The assigned detective shall apply for, execute, and return any Search and Seizure Warrant(s). Make any appropriate recommendations that may assist in the preservation of data, photographs, video/audio recordings, etc.

Dallas Police Department General Order

332.00 Video Interogation and Technologies Program

Revised 06/24/2024


332.00 VIDEO INTEGRATION AND TECHNOLOGIES PROGRAM SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Department has adopted the use of Body Worn Cameras (BWC) and In-Car Camera Systems to enhance our citizen interactions and provide additional investigatory evidence. The Department recognizes that BWC and in-car camera images have a limited field of view and cannot always show the full story, nor do video images capture an entire scene. The use of body worn cameras and in-car cameras does not reduce the requirement to provide thorough written documentation of an incident.

332.01 Program Objectives
A. It is the intention of the Dallas Police Department to utilize body worn cameras and in-car cameras in a manner that is fair and equitable toward employees and citizens.
B. The Dallas Police Department has adopted the use of body worn cameras and in-car cameras in order to accomplish several objectives. These objectives include, but are not limited to:
1. Enhance Department transparency to the public.
2. Enhance personnel safety.
3. Enhance personnel reporting, evidence collection, and court testimony.
4. Enhance personnel training.
5. Protection from false claims of impropriety.
6. Provide accurate documentation of events, actions, conditions, and statements made during arrests and critical incidents.
7. Document the quality of service provided by personnel.
C. Body worn camera and in-car camera recordings will be used for legitimate law enforcement purposes only and in accordance with applicable law and Departmental policies.

332.02 Definitions
A. General Definitions
1. Body Camera – General Term to describe a department approved camera system that is attached to an officer’s body or clothing for on-duty use. Also referred to as a ‘Body Worn Camera (BWC)’.
a. A wearable camera system with multiple uniform mounting options designed to record audio and video interactions by personnel while in the performance of their duties. The camera components are designed for use in tough environmental conditions encountered during day-to-day law enforcement activities.
b. Equipped with multiple wireless connection technologies for GPS, remote live streaming, and future functionality to upload video “over the air”.
2. In-Car Camera System – General term to describe a department approved camera system that is installed in Department vehicles for on-duty use to record audio and video.
3. Body Camera Dock – also referred to as a docking station. When body cameras are placed into the dock, the internal batteries are recharged while video evidence is automatically downloaded to the cloud storage system. Current department authorized cloud storage system is Evidence.com.
4. Interview Room Camera System – General term to describe a department approved camera system that is installed in interview rooms and is used to record audio and video.
5. Video Integration and Technologies Program (V.I.T.) – The current Body Worn Camera, In-Car Camera, and Interview Room Camera Systems in use by the Department.
6. Video Integration and Technologies (V.I.T.) Team – Individual or Unit with Department-wide responsibility for the Video Integration and Technologies Program. Only members of the V.I.T. Team will be permitted Administrator Access to the cloud storage system.
7. Incident/Event- any activity that is in furtherance of a law enforcement goal and/or investigation. These can include, but not limited to, traffic stops, pedestrian stops, call for service, follow up investigations, interviews, searches, crowd incidents, protests, and arrests.
8. Personnel- any Dallas Police Department employee assigned a body camera.
9. Signal Sidearm – General term to describe the department approved device used to detect when a weapon is withdrawn from the holster.

332.03 General Procedures for Body Worn Cameras
A. All audio/video captured during the scope of a personnel’s duties are the property of the Dallas Police Department and are subject to Departmental policies and applicable laws regarding viewing, release, retention, and destruction.
1. Prior to using a BWC and/or being granted access to Evidence.com, personnel shall receive Department approved training on the proper operation and the Department’s policy with respect to its use. Additional training shall be provided at periodic intervals to ensure the continued effective use of the equipment and to incorporate changes, updates, or other revisions in policies and equipment. No access to Evidence.com will be granted to any personnel of the department without the required training as administered by the V.I.T. Team.
2. Personnel granted access to Evidence.com will have their roles and permissions dictated by their position as listed in IWM. V.I.T. Team Members will be solely responsible for adjusting permissions in Evidence.com for the Department. Any employee requesting an exemption to this policy will be required to make such requests through their Deputy Chief or higher.
3. Personnel are responsible for the BWC and related equipment which will be used with reasonable care to ensure proper functioning. Malfunctions shall be brought to the attention of the personnel’s supervisor as soon as possible so that a replacement unit may be assigned. Personnel shall inspect and test their body worn camera prior to each watch to verify proper functioning and shall notify their supervisor of any problems.
4. In the event that a body worn camera is lost, personnel shall immediately notify his/her supervisor. The officer assigned the equipment will complete the required paperwork for lost city property.
5. Personnel will not remove, dismantle, or tamper with any hardware and/or software component or part of a body worn camera.
6. Personnel will not edit, alter, erase, duplicate, copy, or otherwise distribute in any manner body camera recordings without proper authorization.
7. Personnel will not make copies of any body worn camera file or screen shot for their personal use and are prohibited from using a recording device such as a phone camera or secondary video camera to record such.
8. Under no circumstances will audio/video evidence be converted for personal use. Accessing, copying, editing or releasing recordings or depictions of recordings without proper approval is strictly prohibited.
9. Personnel assigned a body worn camera will use their body worn camera during off-duty employment in any circumstances listed in General Order 332.04. Personnel will download all evidence recorded during their off-duty employment no later than during their next regularly assigned on-duty shift or when directed by a supervisor.
10. Non-Department personnel shall not be allowed to review recordings unless pursuant to written consent of the Chief of Police. Recordings may be reviewed by other law enforcement agencies with supervisor approval.
11. Body camera personnel issued a body camera will utilize their city issued devices to review videos in the field via Bluetooth connection, and add metadata such as call incident number, title, and video category to a video prior to uploading to Evidence.com. (i.e. mobile viewer, city issued cell phone, MDC)
B. Responsibilities of Personnel Assigned a Body Worn Camera
1. Personnel will request additional instruction as needed from a supervisor if they have questions relating to the correct operation of the equipment.
2. Covert and Undercover personnel are required to wear a body camera when covert personnel are identifiable as police, either by identifiable uniform markings or verbal statements.
3. For personnel assigned as a Task Force Officer (TFO), the TFO will comply with the Dallas Police Department’s policies regarding the use of the body camera.
4. Officers who are the authorized and wear the Class C Uniform (per G.O. 801.03(F)) or are authorized and wear conservative apparel appropriate to an office setting (per G.O. 804.09), are not required to wear their body camera while on duty and dressed in their approved apparel unless directed to do so by their Bureau Commander.
a. This only applies when wearing the approved apparel.
b. If your duty function requires any other uniform to be for the day, this exemption does not apply.
c. It is highly recommended to always have your body camera on your person while on duty, and in public.
5. At the beginning of each shift, personnel will ensure:
a. That the BWC is fully charged and operational prior to the Start of Shift or Off-Duty Job.
b. The Body Worn Camera will be secured to the personnel’s uniform in a manner to promote the ease of use of the camera as well as the camera’s ability to clearly record video and audio.
i. The camera will be mounted to the most outside garment of the personnel’s uniform and will not be
worn under fabric such as a jacket or external vest. Wearing an external jacket, an external vest carrier, or exterior armor does not reduce any requirement for properly wearing a body camera. Exceptions are granted when personnel are acting in an emergency capacity and cannot safely or reasonably move the camera to a different position.
ii. The camera lens will never be placed at or below belt level. Undercover officers may wear at the belt level if authorized by the Bureau Commander.
iii. Personnel may not use a body camera without a mount specifically produced by the body camera manufacturer for use with that specific camera. Third-party mounts or self-created mounts are prohibited.
iv. The camera will be placed on the personnel’s front torso. It will not be placed on personnel’s arm or sleeve, the personnel’s side, the personnel’s back, or any portion of the personnel’s trousers.
v. Personnel will not purposely block the camera with any material, device, stock, fabric, or other matter. Exceptions are granted when personnel are acting in an emergency capacity and cannot safely or reasonably move the camera to a different position.
vi. Personnel will not write or decorate on the body camera in hand-written or sticker form. A printed sticker with the employee’s badge number, element number, and/or assignment is permitted.
c. Personnel will pair their body camera to the In-Car Camera System.
d. Once personnel have left the perimeter of the substation, the body camera will remain in the ‘powered-on’ or the ‘On’ state for the entire shift. When personnel return to the perimeter of the substation throughout their shift or for their end of shift, they shall be allowed to ’power-off‘ their camera.
e. At the beginning of each shift, personnel will start the Record mode by double tapping the body camera’s event button and will leave the camera on to record an audio/video sample for one minute. After one minute, stop recording by holding the event button for approximately five seconds.
i. In the “ID”, the CAD incident number will reflect the pattern of XX-XXXXXXX. The first two corresponding numbers will reflect the current year and the last seven numbers will reflect seven zeros. For example, 24-0000000 for the year 2024.
ii. Personnel will type the words “Equipment Check” into the “Title” field.
iii. Personnel will select “Calls for Service/Incident” in the “Categories” field.
6. Prior to the end of each shift, personnel will:
a. Ensure the camera is properly docked and synced for downloading video.
b. Ensure their offense/arrest reports and citations have documented the existence of any body worn camera video.
c. Inform their supervisor of any video that has significant evidentiary value or that may be utilized for training purposes.
C. Categorizing Video Evidence
1. Current categories in use by the department include, but may not limited to:
“1 – Contact/Report/Evidence”: This category shall but utilized for all body camera video, in-car camera video, and interview room video that is not a Start of Shift recording or an Accidental recording. This category carries a 10- year retention period.
“2 – SoS/Accidental”: This category shall be utilized for all Start of Shift videos and/or if the video was accidentally initiated and no contact, report, or evidence is associated with its recording. This category carries a 2-year retention period.
“Restricted Access”: This category is exclusively designated for departmental personnel identified by Command Staff, responsible for handling evidence of a particularly sensitive nature. Only personnel assigned to S.I.U., P.I.U., and I.A.D. are authorized to classify their evidence as "Restricted Access". All other personnel must obtain approval from their Deputy Chief or the V.I.T. Team Sergeant before designating their video category as "Restricted Access".
“X – DO NOT USE – Old DV”: This category is part of the outdated classification system and will be phased out after a transitional period allowing Domestic Violence Unit Detectives the opportunity to identify the evidence in this category and transfer it to the appropriate case file folder for retention. Once this transition period is complete, the category will be eliminated. No departmental personnel shall use this category moving forward.
2. All Video Evidence will be properly categorized for retention on the server no later than the 3rd day from the date the evidence was captured. (The relevant CAD Incident number and Category are both required)
3. If the evidence being captured results from a Critical Incident as defined by (GO 332.07 K.), the evidence will be categorized by the end of the officer’s shift.
4. Supervisors may direct an officer to download any video evidence if they feel it should be categorized immediately.
5. Nothing in this section precludes an officer from either categorizing evidentiary or non-evidentiary video prior to the end of their shift.
6. Officers utilizing planned discretionary leave will ensure all evidentiary and non-evidentiary video is properly categorized before starting that leave.
7. If officers encounter an emergency or unplanned leave and cannot meet the stated guidelines, officers will make every attempt to contact a supervisor to advise of the proper disposition of any untagged evidentiary videos.
8. Everything in this section will apply to officers working in an off-duty capacity.
D. Supervisory Responsibilities
1. Supervisors shall ensure that personnel assigned a body worn camera utilize them in accordance with policy and procedure.
2. Supervisors will ensure videos related to critical incidents are uploaded to corresponding digital files and tagged for retention as soon as practical.
3. Supervisors may have the ability to resolve citizen complaints by reviewing video captured by a personnel’s body worn camera. In those circumstances where a complaint is resolved with no further action needed, the supervisor shall document their review.
4. Supervisors will conduct random BWC reviews/audits of personnel assigned to them. Supervisors will conduct at least two BWC reviews/audits monthly of all personnel assigned to them. Division Commanders will ensure that at least two BWC reviews are conducted monthly for all personnel under their command assigned a BWC, by the designated supervisors.
5. Supervisors will verify personnel are in compliance of G.O. 332.03(B).
6. Supervisors, when reviewing video, should look for training opportunities to enhance personnel performance. In addition, any video believed to benefit recruit and/or in-service training should be forwarded through the chain of command to the police academy.
7. Minor infractions of policy or procedure found during review of video, not related to the operation of the BWC, will be handled as a training issue and supervisors should use the opportunity to counsel with employees to ensure no future violations.

332.04 General Operation of Body Worn Cameras
A. Personnel will utilize the BWC in the following circumstances:
1. Personnel shall record with their body worn camera all incidents that are conducted within the scope of an official law enforcement capacity and, while actively participating in an investigation, keep the camera activated for the entirety of the personnel’s active participation in the investigation.
2. Personnel shall begin recording as soon as practical and safe to do so in the following incidents/events and continue recording until the incident/event is concluded:
a. All criminal investigations.
b. Before arrival on any call for police service.
c. Anytime personnel are in contact with a citizen or suspect, when it is feasible, that the video system may record all or part of the contact.
d. Anytime the personnel’s emergency lighting is activated.
e. Upon observation of suspicious or criminal behavior.
f. Personnel-initiated contacts:
i. Arrest
ii. Field Contacts
iii. Traffic/Pedestrian Stops
iv. Vehicle and/or Foot Pursuits
g. During all prisoner or witness transports. If personnel arrive at a facility that is recorded, such as a detention facility or police interview room, personnel may stop recording upon entering the facility or transferring custody of the prisoner/witness.
h. Participation in any search or arrest warrants.
i. When conducting a knock and talk
j. When conducting consensual searches.
k. Citizen-initiated contacts or flagged down requests for public safety services. 
l. Any time personnel deem necessary.
3. The BWC may be deactivated in the following circumstances:
a. Upon final conclusion of an event/incident
b. Personnel or supervisor discussion that involve police/case tactics or strategy.
c. During non-enforcement activities such as when protecting a traffic crash scene or directing traffic
d. Personal relief or break
e. Personal emergency matters of a sensitive nature (i.e., family emergency, medical emergency, catastrophic event).
f. While conferring with undercover/covert officers, confidential informants, or with federal officers/agents.
g. When directed by a supervisor.
h. Any communication involving attorney-client privilege.
4. It shall be deemed a violation of this policy for personnel to fail to activate the body camera or intentionally terminate a recording in order to commit a violation of Department policy or law.
5. Personnel are not required to obtain consent from a private person when in a public place or in a location where there is no reasonable expectation of privacy. It is at the discretion of personnel to determine if they want to announce a recording is occurring.
6. While in public areas, personnel are not required to advise a subject that they are recording their interaction unless the subject specifically asks if they are being recorded, at which point personnel will inform the subject that they are being recorded.
5. When in a private residence in an official capacity, personnel are not required to advise the resident they are recording. Personnel are not prohibited from but encouraged to advise the citizen of the recording if doing so would better serve the handling of the incident.
B. Prior to deactivating the BWC, personnel will make a recorded announcement as to the reason the device is being deactivated such as-
1. “Contact completed”
2. “Incident concluded”
3. “Instructed by supervisor (name) to end recording”
4. “Personnel or supervisor discussion in the field”
C. If the BWC fails to activate due to equipment failure, personnel will document the failure in a MIR or offense supplement report by the end of their tour of duty. Personnel will also notify their supervisor of the equipment failure.
D. If personnel fail to activate the BWC or fails to record the entire contact, personnel shall document the reasons in an MIR or offense supplement report by the end of their tour of duty.

332.05 Prohibited Use of BWC Equipment
A. In any situation where individuals have an expectation of privacy such as bathrooms and locker rooms unless it is required to capture evidence for a criminal investigation.
B. The use of BWCs in a hospital or doctor’s office setting will be limited to investigative use only.
1. Personnel will not record a patient’s medical interaction and procedures with hospital or medical personnel unless all parties are aware that a recording is taking place, and it is needed as evidence.
2. Officers may record when the patient is an arrestee and is under the officer’s custody.
C. When on break or otherwise engaged in personal activity.
D. During administrative investigations.
E. Images of undercover officers or confidential informants will not be recorded, unless requested by the undercover officer or their supervisor in the furtherance of an investigation.
F. During any work-related meetings, details, or conversations of fellow employees without their knowledge during non- enforcement related activities.
G. Any personal conversations of or between another Department member or employee without the recorded members/employee’s knowledge or permission.
H. Personnel will use only the Department issued body worn camera.
I. The Department issued mobile viewing device will only be used for legitimate law enforcement purposes. Browsing the internet or loading apps onto the phone outside of a law enforcement purpose is strictly prohibited.

332.06 Body Camera Retention, Storage, and Handling of Videos
A. Public Information Act requests for videos will be handled in accordance with Chapter 552 of the Texas Government Code and Departmental procedures.
B. All video will be maintained for a minimum of 90 days. If the video has not been categorized as one to be retained, it will automatically be deleted after two years.
C. All recordings in which a police report is generated will be marked as “Contact/Report/Evidence.””
D. Video Recordings should only be shared within Evidence.com and only to other Trusted Agencies. Video recording hardcopies will only be created if the receiving agency specifically requests so and only for official reasons, to include, but not limited to:
1. Criminal Evidence
2. Court Subpoenas and Discovery (Civil Cases)
3. Public Information Act (Open Records) requests.
4. Internal Affairs Division requests.
5. Approved Training Section requests.
6. Other if approved by the Division Commander.
E. BWC recordings will not be provided to anyone outside of the Dallas Police Department unless the recording is requested through the proper Public Information Act request process or through a Criminal Justice request received on a completed and approved request form.
F. The Open Records/Records Management Unit will set charges for duplications of videos for Public Information Act requests.
G. Per the Texas Occupations Code, a peace officer is entitled to access recordings of an incident involving the officer before the officer is required to make a statement about the incident.
H. Copies of recordings not involving pending criminal action, civil litigation, or internal investigations may be used for training purposes with the approval of the Training Division Commander.

332.07 General Procedures for In-Car Camera Systems
A. The In-Car Camera system utilized by the Department is equipped with at least one camera, a digital video recorder, and with a connection to the cloud storage.
B. Division Responsibility:
1. Each Division/Section/Unit is responsible for the overall operation of the In-Car Dashboard Camera at their level. This Supervisor has primary responsibility for In-Car Camera security, operation, video handling, and training. This includes reporting malfunctioning equipment and providing training to In-Car Camera users.
2. All videos will be maintained for a minimum of 90 days. Uncategorized videos will be retained indefinitely.
C. Officer Responsibilities:
1. Officers will obtain training on the use of In-Car Camera systems and will request additional instruction from a supervisor if they are unsure of the proper operation of the In-Car Camera equipment.
2. At the beginning of each shift, officers operating an In-Car Camera equipped vehicle will determine whether the In-Car Camera equipment is working properly. Officers will ensure:
a. The In-Car Camera is powered on and is positioned and adjusted to record events,
b. All previously recorded video has been uploaded,
c. The officer’s body camera is properly synced.
3. At the beginning of each shift, officers will start the Record mode by turning on the vehicle’s red lights and will leave them on to record an audio/video sample for one minute. After one minute, stop recording by pushing the Stop button.
a. In the “ID”, the CAD incident number will reflect the pattern of XX-XXXXXXX. The first two corresponding numbers will reflect the current year and the last seven numbers will reflect seven zeros. For example, 24- 0000000 for the year 2024.
b. Officers will type the words “Equipment Check” into the “Title” field.
c. Officers will select “Calls for Service/Incident” in the “Categories” field.
4. Officers will verify that the video and audio sample was successfully recorded by clicking on the playback function, selecting the last recorded file, and clicking the Play button. Any problem with the In-Car Camera equipment at this or any other time during the shift will be immediately reported to a supervisor.
5. Supervisors will review videos regularly to ensure that the beginning of shift audio/video sample test procedure is properly conducted.
6. Throughout the shift, the officer will monitor the operation of the In-Car Camera system to ensure it continues to work properly. Officers using In-Car Camera equipped vehicles are responsible for the proper use and security of the systems.
7. When interacting only with other police personnel, outside of the presence of civilians, officers will inform other police personnel if an In-Car Camera system is recording.
8. Officers will enter their CAD incident number into the “I.D.” field and select the correct category at the conclusion of all recorded citizen interactions.
9. Personnel will inform their supervisor of any video that has significant evidentiary value or that may be utilized for training purposes.
D. Commander Responsibilities:
1. Commanders of officers using In-Car Camera equipped vehicles will ensure supervisors conduct random In-Car Camera reviews/audits of officers assigned to their division. Supervisors will conduct at least two In-Car Camera reviews/audits monthly of officers assigned to them. Division Commanders will ensure that at least two In-Car Camera reviews are conducted monthly for all officers under their command by the designated supervisors.
a. The primary purpose of these reviews is to ensure Departmental accountability and promote officer safety. Observed violations should be brought to the officer’s attention and discussed with a focus and emphasis on training. Significant and/or repeated violations may result in disciplinary action.
b. In all cases, violations, and the action taken, will be documented to the Division Commander.

332.08 General Operation of the In-Car Camera System
A. General use of equipment:
1. In-Car Camera systems are programmed to record automatically when the following events occur:
a. Vehicle’s emergency lights or siren are turned on.
b. Vehicle’s rear doors are opened.
c. Vehicle’s speed exceeds a set speed limit.
d. Vehicle impact.
2. In-Car Camera equipment may be manually activated by pushing the Record buttons on the control panel.
3. Only pushing the Stop button on the laptop software interface can stop the recording phase.
4. Under no circumstances are officers to erase, reuse, or in any manner alter In-Car Camera recordings except as provided under our Records Retention Policy. Such activities may subject officers to disciplinary action and criminal sanctions as these recordings may be considered evidence and/or government records.
5. Officers will not duplicate In-Car Camera video recordings without authorization or tamper with In-Car Camera equipment or settings.
6. Only authorized personnel may service (program, repair, adjust, dismantle, or relocate) In-Car Camera equipment. Specific service procedures are contained in the In-Car Camera Resource Manual.
B. In-Car Camera equipment will be used:
1. On any call for police service requiring a Code-3 response.
2. When an officer is in contact with a citizen or suspect, if it is feasible that the video system may record all or part of the contact.
3. Anytime the officer’s emergency lighting is activated.
C. If an officer is not assigned a body camera, the in-car camera equipment will be used:
1. During officer-initiated contacts:
a. Arrest
b. Field Contacts
c. Traffic/Pedestrian Stops
d. Vehicle Pursuits
2. During all prisoner or witness transports. If an officer arrives at a facility that is recorded, such as a detention facility or police interview room, the officer may stop recording upon entering the facility or transferring custody of the prisoner/witness.
3. When participating in any search or arrest warrants.
4. When conducting a knock and talk.
5. When conducting consensual searches.
6. During citizen-initiated contacts or flagged down requests for public safety services.
7. Any time an officer deems necessary.
8. It is recommended that even if officers are assigned a body camera, they also utilize the in-car camera system to record in the above instances.
D. In-Car Camera equipment may be used:
1. To record probable cause/suspicious activity prior to activating the vehicle’s emergency lights.
2. To record the actions of individuals during calls for service or other contacts.
3. To document crime scenes or other incidents where documentation of actions or events may be essential for court.
E. In-Car Camera equipment deactivation (Stop recording) in the following circumstances:
1. In-Car Camera recordings may be stopped by an officer during non-enforcement activities such as when protecting a traffic crash scene or directing traffic.
2. Officer or supervisor discussion that involves police/case tactics or strategy.
3. Officers may stop In-Car Camera recordings of a Traffic/Pedestrian stop only after contact with the citizen has ended.
F. In-Car Camera equipment will not be deactivated:
1. At any time during the recording of enforcement activity for which recording has begun.
2. Once activated for any reason while a pursuit or assist officer is occurring in the division, the In-Car Camera will not be deactivated until the incident has been completed.

332.09 In-Car Camera Retention, Storage, and Handling of Videos
A. Uploading video from In-Car Camera equipped vehicles
1. Video will be automatically uploaded at the end of every incident.
2. If an In-Car Camera system cannot upload video, the officer will immediately:
a. Notify a supervisor immediately; and
b. Take the vehicle to the Radio Shop.
B. If a recording documents a police incident involving serious injury or death, or if the Special Investigations Unit (SIU)/Crimes Against Persons Division, the Public Integrity Section, the Internal Affairs Division, the Office of the Chief, or the Crime Scene Response Unit requests that a video be seized will be handled by the Video Integration and Technologies Team.
C. Public Information Act requests for videos will be handled in accordance with Chapter 552 of the Texas Government Code and Departmental procedures.
D. All videos will be maintained for a minimum of 90 days. Uncategorized videos will be retained indefinitely.
E. All video recordings will be marked with the CAD incident number and the correct category for retention and documented in the appropriate offense/incident or supplemental report. All recordings in which an offense report is generated will be marked as “Contact/Report/Evidence.”
F. Officers will inform their supervisor of any video that has significant evidentiary value or that may be utilized for training purposes.
G. Video recordings should only be shared within Evidence.com and only with other Trusted Agencies. Video recording hardcopies will only be created if the receiving agency specifically requests so and only for official reasons, to include, but not limited to:
1. Criminal Evidence
2. Court Subpoenas and Discovery (Civil Cases)
3. Public Information Act (Open Records) requests
4. Internal Affairs Division requests
5. Approved Training Section requests
6. Other if approved by the Division Commander
H. In-Car Camera recordings will not be provided to anyone outside of the Dallas Police Department unless the recording is requested through the proper Public Information Act request process or through a Criminal Justice request received on a completed and approved Request Form.
I. The Open Records/Records Management Unit will set charges for duplications of videos for Public Information Act requests.
J. Per the Texas Occupations Code, a peace officer is entitled to access recordings of an incident involving the officer before the officer is required to make a statement about the incident.
K. Copies of recordings not involving pending criminal action, civil litigation, or internal investigations may be used for training purposes with the approval of the Training Division Commander.

332.10 Signal Sidearm
A. Installation of the Signal Sidearm will be coordinated with the Dallas Police Department Firearms Training Center. Assigned Dallas Police Department Firearms Training Staff will be the only individuals expressly responsible for the installation and removal of the Signal Sidearm Device with the exception listed below. Employees assigned a Signal Sidearm device may not remove, tamper with, and/or dismantle the device.
B. Specific maintenance of the Signal Sidearm Device will be handled by the Video Integration and Technologies Team. Video Integration and Technologies Team Members may assign, calibrate, and troubleshoot the device but may not install or remove the device from the holster of personnel carrying live ammunition. Video Integration and Technologies Team members may install the Signal Sidearm on holsters for Academy Recruit Classes:
1. At the Quartermaster prior to the holsters being issued to new recruit classes.
2. When conducting the two-day Body Camera Classroom instruction for New Recruit Classes in the Basic Academy equipped with firearm molds.
a. The Dallas Police Department Firearms Training Staff will ensure proper installation and functionality of the Signal Sidearm Device during the Recruit Class’s next training day at the Firearms Training Center.
C. In all cases where the Signal Sidearm Device is being installed, uninstalled, maintained, tested, and/or calibrated, the employee assigned the weapon and holster will unload, clear the weapon, and make the weapon safe. The employee making the weapon safe will use approved weapon-clearing traps to unload and load the weapon.
D. Personnel assigned a Signal Sidearm Device shall be responsible for conducting a test of the Signal Sidearm Device once per month.
1. During testing, the officer will use their personally assigned body camera to verify the camera automatically activates when the weapon is removed from their holster. The employee shall conduct this testing in a safe area with an unloaded weapon that has been made safe using a clearing trap prior to testing.
2. Tagging of videos involved in testing shall be the responsibility of the individual employee.
a. In the “ID”, the CAD incident number will reflect the pattern of XX-XXXXXXX. The first two corresponding numbers will reflect the current year and the last seven numbers will reflect seven zeros. For example, 24- 0000000 for the year 2024.
b. Personnel will type the words “Signal Sidearm Test” into the “Title” field.
c. Personnel will select “Calls for Service/Incident” in the “Categories” field.
E. In the case where the body camera does not automatically activate or the sensor is otherwise malfunctioning, the officer shall immediately notify their supervisor and complete a MIR detailing the malfunction no later than the end of the shift when the issue was found. The officer shall contact the Video Integration and Technologies Team to facilitate an appointment time to troubleshoot the issue. Further appointments with the Firearms Training Center may be made after first troubleshooting the device with the Video Integration and Technologies Team.

332.11 GPS and Live Streaming Body Worn Cameras
Detailed instructions on how to use the Live Streaming System can be located on the Dallas Police Department Intranet Page or by contacting the V.I.T. Team.
A. Supervisors will only be authorized to live stream devices under extreme circumstances for situational awareness, critical incidents and at the discretion of the Chief of Police, or his/her designee.
1. Examples of situational awareness include, but are not limited to:
a. Officer assist.
b. Personnel involved in a major collision.
c. Personnel asking for Code 3 assistance.
d. Personnel not answering the radio or roll call.
2. Examples of Critical Incidents include, but are not limited to:
a. Hostage Rescue
b. Barricaded Persons
c. Active Shooter
d. Civil Unrest
e. Mass Casualty
f. Any incident referred to in General Order 600.00
B. Any unauthorized use or accessing the system in a way other than its intended function is prohibited and could result in disciplinary action.
C. Supervisors, who have received the required body camera training, will have the ability to utilize the GPS of a device as well as live stream a body camera or an in-car camera.
D. When accessing the live streaming system, personnel should only use a City of Dallas computer or electronic device.
E. Currently, live streaming capabilities for body cameras can only occur if the device is actively recording Live Streaming for in-car cameras can occur anytime the vehicle is turned on and is not limited to when the in-car camera is actively recording.
F. If at any point the personnel who is being live streamed ends the body camera recording, or for in-car cameras turns the vehicle power off, the live stream will automatically be terminated. Personnel who have their body worn camera, or in-car camera, live streamed will be aware the live stream is occurring in the following ways:
1. A distinct audible noise will occur from the body worn camera or in-car camera system.
2. The indicator light, located on the display screen of the body worn camera, will change from red to purple.
3. The word “LIVE” will appear underneath the camera symbol located on the display screen.

332.12 VIOLATIONS
A. Any violation of this policy will result in corrective action defined by the Discipline Matrices in G.O. 510.00 “Types of Corrective Action”.

Dallas Police Department General Order

333.00 Interacting with Transgender

and Non-Binary Individuals

Revised 08/31/2020


333.00 PURPOSE
Dallas Police personnel will treat all persons, regardless of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, age or disability, with the courtesy and dignity which is inherently due every person as a human being. Department members will act, speak and conduct themselves in a professional manner, recognizing their obligation to safeguard life and property, and maintain a courteous, professional attitude in all contact with the public. Personnel will not exhibit any bias, prejudice or discriminate against any individual or group, including the transgender/intersex/non-binary community.

333.01 Policy
This policy applies to all employees and establishes guidelines for the appropriate treatment of transgender/non-binary individuals who come in contact with the Dallas Police Department. Officers shall consider a person to be transgender if the person identifies themselves as transgender or, if upon reasonable belief that a person may be transgender, the Officer asks and receives an affirmative response.

333.02 Definitions
Designated Sex (Synonymous with “Sex Assigned at Birth”) - An individual’s sex (male or female) determined at birth based upon the individual’s genitals, reproductive organs and/or chromosomes, and designated on the individual’s birth certificate.

Gender – The social constructs used to classify a person as a man, woman, or both or neither. Gender encompasses all relational aspects of social identity, psychological identity and human behavior.

Gender Expression – The collective ways one conveys gender identity to others, including appearance, behavior, dress, speech and mannerisms. Gender expression may be the same as or different from the gender one was assigned at birth. Regardless of gender identity, people can exhibit a range of gender expressions.

Gender Identity – An individual’s innate, deeply felt psychological identification as being a man or a woman, which may or may not correspond to the sex assigned to the individual at birth (as listed on the individual’s birth certificate). Everyone has a gender identity.

Gender Non-Conforming – Individuals who display traits that are not stereotypically associated with their birth- assigned gender. Gender nonconforming individuals may identify as male, female, transgender, trans, androgynous, agender, and other gender descriptors.

Intersex – A general term used to describe a variety of conditions in which a person is born with a variation in sex characteristics, including chromosomes, reproductive anatomy and/or genitals, and therefore cannot be distinctly identified as male or female. For example, a person may be born with genitalia that appear female, but with internal anatomy that is predominantly male. Being intersex is different from being transgender; the term “Intersex” is not synonymous with the term “transgender”.
LGBTQ - An acronym that stands for lesbian, gay, bisexual, transgender and queer/questioning.

Non-binary- Individuals whose gender is not strictly male or female and whose gender identity blends elements of being a man or a woman
Transgender Individual- A person whose gender identity differs from their assigned sex at birth.

Female-to-Male (FTM) – A person who transitions from “female-to-male”, meaning a person who was assigned female at birth, but identifies and lives as a male. A “female-to-male” individual should be addressed using masculine pronouns (e.g. - he, him, his), regardless of surgical status.

Male-to-Female (MTF) – A person who transitions from “male-to-female”, meaning a person who was assigned male at birth, but identifies and lives as a female. A “male-to-female” individual should be addressed using feminine pronouns (e.g.-she, her, hers), regardless of surgical status.

333.03 Responsibilities
A. The LGBTQ+ Liaison will be responsible for reviewing and updating this written directive. This responsibility includes the authority to modify standard operating procedures pertaining to employee interactions with transgender, intersex and non-binary individuals.
B. Division commanders will monitor their subordinates’ interactions with the public and other employees to ensure this procedure is followed.
C. Supervisors will ensure that this policy is adhered to by all employees under their command. They will set the standard for courtesy and provide a model for their subordinates to follow.
D. Employees will conduct themselves professionally and courteously when interacting with the public and fellow employees and shall follow this procedure when interacting with transgender, intersex, and non- binary individuals.

333.04 Guidelines for Field Operations
All enforcement action such as traffic stops, field contacts, searches and seizures and asset seizures and forfeiture efforts by the Dallas Police Department will be based on a standard of reasonable suspicion or probable cause as required by the Fourth Amendment of the U.S. Constitution and statutory authority. Dallas Police Department personnel will adhere to the following:
A. Forms of Address:
1. Respectfully treat transgender/intersex/non-binary individuals in a manner appropriate to the individuals gender expression.
2. Use pronouns as requested (e.g., “she, her, hers, ma’am, Mrs., etc.”) for an individual who self- identifies as a female; (“he, him, his, sir, Mr., etc.”) for an individual who self-identifies as a male and (they, them, their., etc.) for an individual who self-identifies as non-binary.
3. When requested, address the individual by a name based on his/her gender identity rather than that which is on his/her government-issued identification.
4. If a member of the transgender/intersex/non-binary community is the victim of an offense and their information needs to be released on any external communication that will be shared with the public (dpdbeat.com, press release, social media, etc.) Following Departmental notification procedures, Department personnel will ensure with the permission of the next of kin to respectfully identify the individual according to how the victim identified as well as their preferred name.
B. Dallas Police Department employees will not:
1. Stop, detain, frisk, or search any person in whole or in part for the purpose of determining that person’s gender or in order to call attention to the person’s gender expression.
2. Use language that a reasonable person would consider demeaning or derogatory language aimed at a person’s actual or perceived gender identity or expression or sexual orientation.
3. Consider a person’s gender identification as reasonable suspicion or prima facie evidence that the individual is or has engaged in a crime, including prostitution.
4. Disclose an individual’s transgender/intersex/ non-binary identity to other arrestees, members of the public, or non-Departmental members, absent a proper law enforcement purpose.
C. Calls for Service:
1. Calls for service or complaints generated by transgender individuals shall be addressed and investigated in a manner that is consistent with all Departmental policies. No employee shall fail to respond to a call for service based on gender identity or gender expression of the caller.
2. Employees shall not consider a person’s gender identification as reasonable suspicion or prima facie evidence that the individual is or has engaged in a crime.
D. Search Incident to Arrest:
1. If the transgender/intersex/gender nonconforming arrestee identifies herself as a woman, Officers will adhere to G.O. 313.12 and a female officer will be requested to come to the location to conduct the search. Officers will ensure a body camera is present to record the search.
2. If a female Officer is not available, the arresting Officer will conduct a pat down frisk for weapons for Officer safety and transport the arrestee to Lew Sterrett Jail and request a female Officer from the Intake Division to conduct the search in the sally port.
3. Transgender/ intersex/ non-binary arrestees will not be subject to more invasive search or frisk procedures than non-transgender persons.
4. Officers should take into consideration the presence of needles that may be indicative of medically prescribed hormone treatment and/or therapy and may not necessarily be indicative of illegal drug possession, use, or drug paraphernalia.
E. Prisoner Transportation:
1. Whenever possible, a transgender prisoner shall be transported alone. Officers will ensure that additional units are called in order to assist with transporting additional transgender individuals.
F. Documenting Transgender/Intersex/Non-Binary Individuals:
1. Officers will document the individual’s legal name and legal gender on all legal documents to include citations, offenses, accident reports, affidavits and booking paperwork.
2. If a transgender/ intersex/ non-binary person uses a chosen name different from their legal name, Officers will document the chosen name in the AKA or alias section on citations, offense reports and booking paperwork.
3. In circumstances where there is doubt as to the legal name or gender of an individual, Officers will defer to what is determined on identification issued to the individual by the State of Texas or any other government issued form of identification such as a passport or driver’s license.

Dallas Police Department General Order

334.00 Public Release of Video Recordings

Revised 08/24/2021

334.00 Public Release of Video Recording regarding DPD Critical Incidents
A. Purpose: The Dallas Police Department’s commitment to the public is to be transparent and accountable regarding DPD Critical Incidents. The department respects the interest of the public to be informed in a timely manner with the most accurate information available. In the continuous effort to foster public trust, the department acknowledges its responsibility to educate the public on the department’s procedures and the conduct of its employees, especially when an officer’s use of force results in serious injury or death of an individual.

Recognizing that a video recording may not tell the whole story, the department will provide context, if necessary, when releasing video recordings to the public to provide the most accurate depiction of the police encounter based on the information known at the time.

The department strives to balance its commitment to transparency and accountability to the public with the privacy interest of individuals, applicable laws regarding confidentiality, preservation of the integrity of any related investigations. Such circumstances may necessitate the blurring of images or the delay or deviation from the standard release procedure.
B. A video recording that depicts a police encounter related to a DPD Critical Incident regarding an Officer Involved Shooting will be publicly released within 72 hours of the incident, after the Chief of Police and Director Briefing, as stated in 317.06C. The internal briefing will occur within 72 hours after the incident.
C. A video recording that depicts a police encounter related to a DPD Critical Incident regarding Use of Force resulting in serious bodily injury or death or a Death in Custody will be publicly released within 72 hours after the incident.
D. Applicability: This procedure applies to a video recording of a police encounter related to the following:
1. DPD Critical Incident, meaning an officer-involved shooting or a use of force incident that results in serious bodily injury or death of an individual;
2. All deaths while an arrestee/detainee is in the custody of DPD, unless there is no preliminary evidence of any misconduct, use of force, or act committed by the arrestee/detainee that depicts the individual intended to cause his own injury or death; or
3. Any other DPD police encounter where the Chief of Police determines that the release of the video recording is in the public’s interest.
E. Video Recording Release Procedures
1. The assigned investigative unit will obtain any video evidence related to a DPD Critical Incident.
2. The assigned investigative unit will coordinate with the Media Relations Unit to prepare a video recording of the police encounter for public release.
3. The Media Relations Unit will provide a copy of the publicly released video recording to the Open Records Unit for response to any Public Information requests. The Media Relations Unit will maintain a copy of the publicly released video recording for three years from the date of the incident.
4. The assigned investigative unit will make all efforts to provide the injured individual (or next of kin of a deceased individual) an opportunity to view the prepared video recording of the police encounter prior to release. If the injured individual (or next of kin of the deceased individual) seeks to review the video recording prior to release to the public, the injured individual (or next of kin of a deceased individual) will be allowed to view the video recording prior to release to the public.
a. At the request of the injured individual (or next of kin of a deceased individual) to be present with the requestor for the viewing of the prepared video recording, the Chief of Police or designee, at the Chief’s discretion, may be present during the viewing.
5. The assigned investigative unit may provide the appropriate District Attorney’s office an opportunity to view the video recording of the police encounter prepared for public release. If the District Attorney’s office seeks to review the video recording prior to release to the public, the assigned investigative unit will make the video recording available to the District Attorney’s office within 72 hours after the assigned investigative unit has possession of the video recording.
6. The assigned investigative unit may provide the Director of the OCPO an opportunity to view the video recording of the police encounter prepared for public release. If the Director of OCPO seeks to review the video recording prior to release to the public, the assigned investigative unit will make the video recording available to the OCPO within 72 hours after the assigned investigative unit has possession of the video recording.
7. The Media Relations Unit may notify the involved officer of the video recording of the police encounter prepared for public release and provide an opportunity for the involved officer to view the prepared video recording prior to release.
8. The Chief of Police has discretion to publicly release, in whole or in part, any video recording related to a DPD Critical Incident, Death in Custody, or any other DPD police encounter in the interest of transparency and public trust.
a. If the Chief of Police determines that a video recording of a police encounter related to a DPD Critical Incident or Death in Custody will not be released to the public, in accordance with this General Order, the Chief of Police will notify the Director of the OCPO.
F. Release – Limited Waiver
1. The release of any specific video recording related to a DPD Critical Incident does not waive the department’s right to withhold other audio or video recordings or investigative materials in the same or any other case, as permitted by departmental procedures or as permitted or required by law.
2. The public release of any video recording shall only be made in accordance with the General Orders and Standard Operating Procedures of the department.

Dallas Police Department General Order

335.00 Unmanned Aerial Systems (UAS)

Revised 01/04/2022


335.00 Unmanned Aerial Systems (UAS) Mission Statement
The UAS Squad will support public safety by providing a safe and effective aerial observation platform on law enforcement, fire, and other public safety incidents. The UAS Squad will provide de-escalation tactics, transparency, and increase officer and citizen safety during dynamic situations. Missions will be accomplished efficiently while respecting the law and privacy of the citizens being served.

335.01 Responsibility for Operating Unmanned Aerial Systems
A. The personnel assigned to the Air Support Unit or SWAT who currently have a FAA Part 107 rating will be the only personnel designated for the operation of the Unmanned Aerial Systems (UAS).
B. The Remote Pilot in Command (RPIC) will be responsible for the operation of the UAS with the aid of the Visual Observer (VO).
C. No persons besides the RPIC and VO will be allowed to operate the UAS unless directly instructed to do so by the RPIC or VO.
D. The RPIC will have ultimate operational authority and ensure that the deployment and flight of the UAS meets all requirements and standards to include FAA, The State of Texas, and the Dallas Police Department’s regulations.

335.02 Authority to Operate
A. UAS flights will be made in the following instances:
1. Planned Operations/Special Events
2. Dangerous Tactical Operation
3. State of Emergency
4. Civil Unrest
5. Bombs and hazardous material observations
6. Crime scene photography and reconstruction
7. Fatal Scene
8. Disaster response
9. Public Access Private Property
10. Immediate Pursuit
11. Missing Persons
12. Fugitive apprehension
13. Building Searches
14. Investigating armed and dangerous suspects
15. Search and rescue
16. Non-Invasive Surveillance
17. Traffic collision reconstruction
18. Motor Vehicle Death or SBI Scene
19. Motor Vehicle Accident on Highway or Interstate
20. Public Property
21. Training missions
22. Anything deemed by the Special Operations Division Commander as needing UAS support
23. Mutual Aid
B. All UAS flights will comply with the Texas State Government Code 423 which outlines Use of Unmanned Aircraft.
C. All UAS flights will comply with 4th amendment expectations and established case laws.
D. All UAS flights will comply with the FAA Certificate of Authorization by which the City of Dallas is allowed to operate UAS.
E. UAS flights for the purposes of mass surveillance will not be conducted. UAS will be launched upon request meeting the outlined previous criteria. 

335.03 Operations
A. UAS call out
1. Call outs are incidents where the need for the UAS to provide real time intelligence is critical to the best possible outcome of the incident.
2. The procedures for requesting a call out of the UAS Squad will be to notify dispatch and make the request. The UAS Squad will be called out to respond and provide additional air support options during police operations for officers and commanders during incidents that focus on static locations.
3. Once the request has been made, dispatch will call the UAS Squad Supervisor who will in turn call the requesting personnel. The requesting personnel will brief the UAS Squad Supervisor of the nature of the call out. The decision to respond will be made by the UAS Squad Supervisor or UAS Chief Pilot.
4. The on call UAS Squad members will respond to the incident locations staging area. The UAS Squad will conduct an assessment of the air space and follow UAS Unit SOP in the deployment of the UAS.
5. The UAS Squad Supervisor will establish and make available to communications a call back schedule to ensure that the Dallas Police Department has UAS support outside of assigned working hours. UAS personnel will respond to emergency call outs when assigned to call back.
B. Planned Operations
1. To request the UAS Squad for a Planned operation, requesting personnel should provide written request for assistance no later than 5 days prior to the event. Late request will be accepted but pre-approved request will take priority unless the emergency call out criteria is met or the UAS Unit Commander deems the need for the UAS to be greater on the shorter notice operation.
2. Once accepted, the requesting personnel will schedule an operational brief with the UAS Squad. During this briefing, operational goals, risk, and expectations will be established.
3. A pre-operation assessment of the location will be made based on current factors.
4. Prior to the operation a mission brief will be given and personnel not in the brief will not be allowed to operate the UAS as a RPIC during the operation.
5. Upon completion of the operation, the UAS Squad and requesting personnel will conduct a debrief and assess the operation for performance. Lessons learned from each deployment will help guide the program moving forward.
C. Mutual Aid
1. The UAS Commander will coordinate the request and/or deployment of Unmanned Ariel Systems with Federal, State and mutual aid agencies for any incidents where UAS support is needed and meets the guidelines set forth by the Department’s General Orders.
2. When conducting mutual aid missions, the preferred method of sharing recorded evidence will be through the Axon Evidence.com app. If the outside agencies being assisted does not have the Axon Application, then an SD card will be required to be used. This will be removed directly from the aircraft upon completion of the flight and given to the outside agency to be handled according to their policy, to maintain the best chain of custody. It is preferable for the outside agency to have a laptop on hand to view the data immediately to ensure the desired evidence is collected properly and to avoid unnecessary additional flights.

335.04 Manned vs Unmanned Aircraft
A. Manned aviation has the advantages of flight time, distance, and video recording with less restrictions than unmanned systems. When making considerations for air support during an incident, officers will consider the nature of the event and plan accordingly for the deployment of air support. Unmanned systems will be deployed in the augmentation and support of manned aircraft. UAS must adhere to Texas Government Code 423 which outlines when a UAS may record images on private property. A UAS may only record private property in the following circumstances:
1. With a warrant
2. Life and death situation
3. During a felony in progress
B. A UAS system may not record for:
1. A misdemeanor
2. An offense resulting in a fine only

335.05 Search Warrants
When UAS are requested to work private property, a search warrant will be required unless it meets the exceptions listed in 330.08. The UAS Squad will NOT work private property locations without a warrant, unless with written consent from the property owner, for investigative purposes. Only manned aircraft will be used for the purposes of generating probable cause on private property. UAS will not be used for mass surveillance.
335.06 Data Collection Minimization
In order to safe guard the privacy of the citizens we serve, collection of data to include, but not limited to, digital photographs, digital video, infrared images, and sound recording will be limited to the extent necessary to accomplish the current mission. 

335.07 Data Storage
Only data that meets legitimate training objectives, or has evidentiary value, will be retained after the mission has been concluded. Data will be downloaded/deposited into the storage location of the Unit Commander’s designation. Said data will be safeguarded so as to protect the privacy of citizens who may be depicted in the data. All other data will be destroyed through electronic deletion within 90 days of the conclusion of the flight. Digital logs of aircraft mission profiles are exempt from this requirement. The PIC is responsible for safeguarding and deleting the data as required. Data that meets the standards for an evidentiary hold will be subject to standard departmental retention schedules. Images of identifiable individuals captured by unmanned aerial systems should not be retained or shared unless there is a reasonable suspicion that the image contains evidence of criminal activity or are relevant to an ongoing investigation or pending criminal trial.

335.08 Flight Restriction
UAS must adhere to FAA UAS regulations. The weather minimums for the safe operation of UAS are visibility at 3 standard miles from the operator’s location and 500 feet below any clouds for operations in air space. UAS MAY operate indoors at any time.

335.09 Call Back
The UAS Squad Supervisor will establish and make available to communications a call back schedule to ensure that the Dallas Police Department has UAS support outside of assigned working hours. UAS personnel will respond to emergency call outs when assigned to call back.

335.10 Procedure to Deal with Disruptions or Violence Directed Against City Owned Aircraft/UAS:
18 USC. 32, “makes it a felony to damage or destroy an aircraft.” This statute now also makes it a Federal offense to commit an act of violence against an aircraft, if the act is likely to endanger the safety of the aircraft. A person can receive a sentence of up to 20-years for shooting down or disabling a UAS, which the FAA has designated as an “aircraft.” Should violence be directed against a City of Dallas aircraft/UAS, or violence is directed against UAS pilots and crew and said interference causes the damage or destruction of operational UAS, the crime will be:
A. immediately documented
B. the perpetrator(s) located and arrested if possible
C. The Division Commander will be immediately notified and given a full report of the criminal acts and any resultant damages as soon as possible, to include the report number the offense is filed under
D. It will be the responsibility of the UAS Supervisor to make the proper notifications to the FAA or other federal law enforcement agencies having jurisdiction

335.11 ARMING OF UAS
Deployment of any type of projectile, chemical agent, or electrical current weapon from a City of Dallas UAS is PROHIBITED unless authorized by the Chief of Police.

335.12 CIVILIAN DRONE OPERATORS
Procedures for dealing with civilians at special events, mass gatherings, critical incidents, etc.
A. It is important to remember that the same regulations of FAA Part 107 which apply for the officers also applies to civilians. With proper licensing and approval, the operation of a drone is permissible.
B. Actions to cause concern are flight over people, failing to yield the right of way to manned aircraft, and other FAA violations causing concern for safety to the public.
C. Officers should survey the crowd for the drone operator causing concern. Once identified the individual may be approached and requested to provide identification.
D. This is not a reason to detain. The goal is to get voluntary compliance and provide a detailed report to the FAA for the individual’s violations.
E. The remote pilot’s name, date of birth, address, and contact information should be recorded. Along with this, the FAA Part 107 information should be recorded if they have one, as well as the drone’s FAA registration. It is required that all drones over 0.55 pounds be registered with the FAA.
F. Dallas Police will not seize the drone in question.
G. Officers should file a Miscellaneous Incident Report and forward it to the UAS Team in the Air Support Division, who will then forward it to the FAA.
H. Officers should consult the Texas Penal Code for any offenses resulting in bodily injury.

Dallas Police Department General Order

336.00 Investigative Facial Recognition Technology (IFRT)

Revised 02/14/2025

336.00 Investigative Facial Recognition Technology (IFRT)
336.01 Purpose
Investigative Facial Recognition Technology (IFRT) has great potential to bring valuable insight into criminal investigations, greatly benefit investigations into violent crimes, and support of intelligence for public safety. Any risks related to facial recognition technology will be mitigated by transparent, limited, and responsible use of IFRT as described.
It is the purpose of this order to provide the Dallas Police Department (DPD) personnel with acceptable guidelines and principles for the collection, access, use, dissemination, and retention of Investigative Facial Recognition Technology (IFRT). Any use or requests for IFRT must be specifically authorized by DPD and be in accordance with laws, statutes, policies, and procedures governing the department. This order will ensure that all IFRT uses are consistent with authorized purposes while not violating the privacy, civil rights, and civil liberties of individuals. Any match found through the use of the department’s IFRT shall be considered an investigative lead and the requesting investigator shall continue to conduct a thorough and comprehensive investigation.

336.02 Definitions
A. Classification – The probabilistic comparison of vectors obtained from feature extraction with photos in a database.
B. Examiner – An analyst assigned to the Dallas Fusion Center / Real Time Crime Center (DFC/RTCC), who has received advanced training in the investigative facial recognition system, and its features. Examiners have at least a working knowledge of the limitations of facial recognition. They are required to assess image quality and appropriateness for facial recognition searches and to perform one-to-many and one-to-one facial image comparisons.
C. Face Detection – A process of isolating the facial features from other parts of the facial image.
D. Investigative Facial Recognition Technology (IFRT) – Facial recognition technology conducts an algorithmic comparison of images of an individual’s facial features for the purposes of verification or identification.
E. Personally Identifiable Information – Personally Identifiable Information (PII) is information which can be used alone to distinguish or trace an individual’s identity, such as name, social security number, or biometric records alone or when combined with other personal or identifying information which is linkable to a specific individual, such as date and place of birth, or mother’s maiden name.
F. Probable Cause – Reasonable and trustworthy facts and circumstances, within an officer’s knowledge, that leads an officer to reasonably believe that an individual has committed, is committing, or about to commit a crime, or that seizable property exists in a particular place or on a particular person.
G. Probe Image – The probe image is any unknown image being submitted for facial recognition.
H. Reasonable Suspicion – Specific, articulable facts that, within the totality of circumstances, would lead an officer to reasonably suspect that an individual has or is about to be engaged in criminal activity. More than a hunch but less than probable cause. An individual’s mere presence in a particular neighborhood or area is not sufficient to support reasonable suspicion.
I. Vectors – A set of coordinates constructed from the unique characteristics of a person’s face (distance between the nose and the mouth, between the eyes, etc.)

336.03 Use of Investigative Facial Recognition Technology (IFRT)
A. The Dallas Police Department has adopted the use of IFRT for legitimate law enforcement purposes. Authorized uses of IFRT are limited to the following:
1. Identifying suspects or persons of interest, as part of an active or ongoing criminal investigation for offenses limited to the following: (Murder, Rape, Robbery, Aggravated Robbery, Aggravated Assault, Arson, Human Trafficking, Kidnapping, Terrorism, and all sexual offenses).
2. To assist in the identification of a person who lacks capacity or is otherwise unable to
3. To assist in identifying an individual when there is a basis to believe that an individual is a missing person.
4. A reasonable suspicion that an identifiable individual has committed a criminal offense or is involved in or planning criminal conduct or activity that presents a threat to any individual, the community, the state, or the nation and that the information is relevant to the criminal conduct or activity (e.g., to thwart an active terrorism scheme or plot).
B. The use of IFRT does not by itself establish a basis for a stop, probable cause to arrest or to obtain a search warrant. IFRT may generate investigative leads through a combination of automated biometric comparisons and human analysis.

336.04 General Procedures
A. The DFC/RTCC will be the only unit approved to complete an analysis of facial comparison using facial recognition technology.
B. A detective/officer will need approval from their immediate supervisor to submit a request for a facial recognition comparison.
C. The detective/officer will submit a request for facial comparison to the Dallas Fusion Center email address dallasfusion@dallaspolice.gov. The request will include the following:
1. Title of the offense.
2. Case number associated with the offense.
3. A still image of the person needing to be identified.
4. A description of the individual’s relationship to an offense (victim or suspect).
5. The requesting detective/officer’s name and badge number.
6. An email approval from the requestor's supervisor with the supervisor's name and badge number.
D. Once a facial recognition examiner receives the request, the examiner will review the request for the criteria listed under 336.04(C), to determine if the minimum criteria have been met and if the request follows any of the objectives listed in 336.03(A).
E. If a facial comparison request is denied by an examiner, the examiner will immediately contact the requesting detective/officer via written communication and explain the reasons for the denial. The examiner will include the detective’s/officer’s immediate supervisor and the IFRT program administrator in the correspondence.
F. If the request is approved, the examiner, in support of case detectives, shall conduct a facial comparison using the still image and information provided, using the Department approved investigative facial recognition technology and any other approved investigative tools.
G. After the examiner completes their review, the examiner will seek a secondary peer review, conducted by another trained facial recognition examiner assigned to the DFC/RTCC. If there is a difference of opinion between the examiners with the findings, the program administrator will have the final approval. If a positive match is not identified or approved by the program administrator, then a report of negative results will be provided to the requestor.
H. If a possible candidate match is approved, the examiner will prepare a possible match report and send it to the requestor via a password-protected email. The possible match report will include the submitted probe image, the possible match image, and a notification stating that the determination of a possible match candidate alone does not constitute probable cause to effect an arrest or obtain an arrest or search warrant, and further investigation is needed to establish probable cause.
I. The facial recognition examiner will record all facial comparison requests in the program's internal log.
J. Upon receiving the facial comparison result(s) packet, the detective/officer will supplement the case in the Report Management System (RMS) regarding the results of the facial comparison request and include the facial comparison result packet in their case filing.
K. External law enforcement agencies are not permitted to access the Department’s facial recognition technology or make facial comparison requests.
L. Requests from non-law enforcement agencies will be denied.

336.05 Responsibilities and Limitations
A. The Intelligence Division Commander will monitor the Department’s use of facial recognition technology.
B. A facial recognition program administrator shall be appointed by the Intelligence Commander and be a supervisor assigned to the DFC/RTCC.
1. The facial recognition program administrator will report directly to the Intelligence Division Commander.
2. The facial recognition program administrator will monitor the use of IFRT by Fusion analysts and provide monthly and annual reports on the use of the IFRT system, to maintain compliance and transparency.
C. Facial recognition examiners shall be appointed by the program administrator and assigned to the DFC/RTCC.
1. Facial recognition examiners will be sworn personnel who hold the rank of Senior Corporal or non-sworn personnel who hold the rank of Senior Criminal Intelligence Analyst.
2. Sworn and non-sworn facial recognition examiners shall complete training for investigative facial recognition technology by an authorized vendor, shall complete an approved intelligence-gathering training course, implicit bias training, and shall complete annual refresher training on facial recognition technology.
D. Investigative facial recognition technology is an investigative tool only.
1. Facial recognition results ARE NOT considered a positive identification and DO NOT establish probable cause without further investigation. Facial recognition results are advisory results, and any possible leads must be confirmed by further analysis and investigation.
2. Facial recognition WILL NOT be used to monitor or identify individuals in crowds and/or those engaging in First Amendment-protected activities except as it relates to a current or ongoing criminal investigation, adhering to 336.03(A)
3. Examiners will use still images lawfully obtained from open-source social media posts, CCTV camera feeds, and/or body-worn camera feeds. Live video feeds WILL NOT be monitored or submitted for purposes of facial comparison analysis and identification.
E. Any unauthorized use of the system in a way other than its intended function is prohibited and could result in disciplinary action.

336.06 Oversight, Audits, and Retention
A. The primary responsibility for the operation of the IFRT program, including the receiving, seeking, retention, evaluations, use, sharing, and dissemination of information, is assigned to the program administrator.
B. The program administrator has oversight of the department’s IFRT and shall:
1. Ensure that the facial recognition program remains in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and policies including the Criminal Justice Information System security standards.
2. Ensure that appropriate disciplinary actions are enforced for policy violations.
3. Ensure the monthly and annual audits are completed and submitted to the Division Commander.
C. The program administrator will maintain the system’s internal log and the unit’s logbook for retention purposes. The program administrator will archive the logbook per the department's retention procedures and Fusion retention procedures, per 28 CFR Part 23.
D. Case detectives are responsible for following their unit’s standard operating procedures for case filing retention as it relates to IFRT results submitted to them by the IFRT examiner, per Texas CCP, Art. 39.14, and State of Texas retention schedule for records of public safety agencies.